Frenic VG1

NOTES
• Measures against surge currents

When running general-purpose motors Environmental conditions If an overvoltage trip occurs while the inverter is High Performance Vector Control Inverter
• Driving a 400V general-purpose motor • Installation location stopped or operated under a light load, it is
When driving a 400V general-purpose motor with Use the inverter in a location with an ambient assumed that the surge current is generated by
an inverter using extremely long cables, damage to temperature range of -10 to 50˚C. open/close of the phase-advancing capacitor in the
the insulation of the motor may occur. Use an output The inverter and braking resistor surfaces become power system.
circuit filter (OFL) if necessary after checking with hot under certain operating conditions. Install the We recommend connecting a DC REACTOR to the
the motor manufacturer. Fuji's motors do not require inverter on nonflammable material such as metal. inverter.
the use of output circuit filters because of their Ensure that the installation location meets the • Megger test
reinforced insulation. environmental conditions specified in "Environment" When checking the insulation resistance of the
in inverter specifications. inverter, use a 500V megger and follow the
• Torque characteristics and temperature rise
When the inverter is used to run a general-purpose instructions contained in the Instruction Manual.
motor, the temperature of the motor becomes
Combination with peripheral devices
higher than when it is operated using a commercial Wiring
• Installing a molded case circuit
power supply. In the low-speed range, the cooling breaker (MCCB) • Wiring distance of control circuit
effect will be weakened, so decrease the output Install a recommended molded case circuit breaker When performing remote operation, use twisted
torque of the motor. If constant torque is required in (MCCB) or an earth leakage circuit breaker (ELCB) shielded wire and limit the distance between the
the low-speed range, use a Fuji inverter motor or a in the primary circuit of each inverter to protect the inverter and the control box to 20m.
motor equipped with an externally powered wiring. Ensure that the circuit breaker capacity is
ventilating fan. equivalent to or lower than the recommended
• Wiring length between inverter and motor
If long wiring is used between the inverter and the motor, the
• Vibration capacity.
inverter will overheat or trip as a result of overcurrent (high-
When the motor is mounted to a machine, • Installing a magnetic contactor (MC) frequency current flowing into the stray capacitance) in the
resonance may be caused by the natural in the output (secondary) circuit wires connected to the phases. Ensure that the wiring is
frequencies, including that of the machine. If a magnetic contactor (MC) is mounted in the shorter than 50m. If this length must be exceeded, lower the
Operation of a 2-pole motor at 60Hz or more may inverter's secondary circuit for switching the motor carrier frequency or mount an output circuit filter (OFL).
cause abnormal vibration. to commercial power or for any other purpose, When wiring is longer than 50m, and sensorless vector
* Study use of tier coupling or dampening rubber. ensure that both the inverter and the motor are fully control or vector control with speed sensor is selected,
* It is also recommended to use the inverter jump stopped before you turn the MC on or off. Remove execute off-line tuning.
frequencies control to avoid resonance points. the surge killer integrated with the MC.
• Wiring size
• Noise • Installing a magnetic contactor (MC) Select cables with a sufficient capacity by referring
When an inverter is used with a general-purpose in the input (primary) circuit to the current value or recommended wire size.
motor, the motor noise level is higher than that with Do not turn the magnetic contactor (MC) in the
a commercial power supply. To reduce noise, raise primary circuit on or off more than once an hour as • Wiring type
carrier frequency of the inverter. High-speed an inverter fault may result. If frequent starts or Do not use multicore cables that are normally used
operation at 60Hz or more can also result in more stops are required during motor operation, use for connecting several inverters and motors.
noise. FWD/REV signals. • Grounding
• Protecting the motor Securely ground the inverter using the grounding
When running special motors terminal.
The electronic thermal facility of the inverter can
• Explosion-proof motors protect the general-purpose motor. The operation
level and the motor type (general-purpose motor,
Selecting inverter capacity
When driving an explosion-proof motor with an
inverter, use a combination of a motor and an inverter motor) should be set. For high-speed • Driving general-purpose motor
inverter that has been approved in advance. motors or water-cooled motors, set a small value for Select an inverter according to the applicable motor
the thermal time constant to protect the motor. ratings listed in the standard specifications table for
• Brake motors
If you connect the motor thermal relay to the motor the inverter. When high starting torque is required or
For motors equipped with parallel-connected
with a long cable, a high-frequency current may flow quick acceleration or deceleration is required, select
brakes, their braking power must be supplied from
into the wiring stray capacitance. This may cause an inverter with a capacity one size greater than the
the primary circuit (commercial power supply). If the
the relay to trip at a current lower than the set value standard.
brake power is connected to the inverter power
for the thermal relay. If this happens, lower the
output circuit (secondary circuit) by mistake, • Driving special motors
carrier frequency or use the output circuit filter
problems may occur. Select an inverter that meets the following condition:
(OFL).
Do not use inverters for driving motors equipped Inverter rated current > Motor rated current.
with series-connected brakes. • Discontinuance of power-factor correcting capacitor
Do not mount power factor correcting capacitors in Transportation and storage
• Geared motors
the inverter (primary) circuit. (Use the DC
If the power transmission mechanism uses an oil-
REACTOR to improve the inverter power factor.) Do When transporting or storing inverters, follow the
lubricated gearbox or speed changer/reducer, then
not use power factor correcting capacitors in the procedures and select locations that meet the
continuous motor operation at low speed may
inverter output circuit (secondary). An overcurrent environmental conditions that agree with the
cause poor lubrication. Avoid such operation.
trip will occur, disabling motor operation. inverter specifications.
• Single-phase motors
• Discontinuance of surge killer
Single-phase motors are not suitable for inverter-
Do not mount surge killers in the inverter output
driven variable speed operation. Use three-phase
(secondary) circuit.
motors.
• Reducing noise
Use of a filter and shielded wires are typical
measures against noise to ensure that EMC
Directives are met.
High performance enabled by the comprehensive use of Fuji technology.

Easy maintenance for the end-user.
Maintains safety and protects the environment.
Gate City Ohsaki, East Tower, 11-2, Opens up possibilities for the new generation.
Osaki 1-chome, Shinagawa-ku,
Tokyo 141-0032, Japan
Phone: +81-3-5435-7057 Fax: +81-3-5435-7420
URL: http://www.fujielectric.com/
Printed in Japan 2012-11(K12/K12)CM 10 FOLS

24A1-E-0002
The Dawn of a New Era Product introduction
Specifications Specifications
Standard
Inverter (Unit Type)
The FRENIC-VG is creating a new era via the industry-leading performance. Structure Features
Converter section Inverter section
Common
Power
- Built-in converter (rectifier) Easier arrangement for small-scale
supply M
- Built-in control circuit system
INV
- External DC reactor as standard*
- DC input is available.
Improved Adaptation to This type consists of the converter and inverter circuits.The
Functions
Terminal
* Available for 75kW or higher
Control Environment inverter can be operated using a commercial power supply.
* DC power can also be supplied without using the converter circuit.
capacity models
Performance and Safety
NEW
Protective
Functions
CONCEPT Stack type
Easier A Wide Range
Dimensions
External
Maintenance of Applications
Functions of Parts
Names and
Unit type
External Dimensions Dedicated Motor

of Dedicated Motors Specifications
NEW Inverter (Stack Type)
Converter section Inverter section Structure

Power
supply M - The converter (rectifier) is separately set.
- External control circuit
INV - Built-in DC reactor
Wiring Diagram
M Features
- DC supply enables the multi-drive arrangement
The converter and inverter sections are separately - Energy can be shared within DC bus lines.
set in this type.The converter (diode stack) or PWM - Downsized panel
converter is required depending on the intended - Large-capacity system is easily built.
use. Moreover, a combination of inverters can be
Options
- Maintainability
used with one converter.
High performance enabled by the comprehensive use of Fuji technology. Converter
Delivery Period
and Code
Maintains safety and protects the environment. Diode rectifier PMW converter (Stack Type) PMW converter (Unit Type)
Opens up possibilities for the new generation. RHD-D series RHC-D series* RHC-C series*
NEW NEW
Suppressing Harmonics
Guidelines for
With the FRENIC-VG, Fuji has concentrated its technologies to deliver the best-performing CNV CNV CNV
Available
inverter on the market. In addition to basic performance, this model features the following soon
This converter is used where no This converter is used where electric power regeneration or harmonic
dramatic improvements: support for previously difficult applications due to technical and capability electric power regeneration control is required. Peripheral devices are separately required.
limitations, easier, more user-friendly maintenance, and environmental friendliness and safety. is required. * D series and C series differ in form but show identical function and performance.
Please use them according to the installation space and purposes.
Fuji Electric proudly introduces the FRENIC-VG to the world.

2 3
The Dawn of a New Era Product introduction
Standard
Inverter (Unit Type)
The FRENIC-VG is creating a new era via the industry-leading performance. Structure Features
Converter section Inverter section
Common
Power
- Built-in converter (rectifier) Easier arrangement for small-scale
supply M
- Built-in control circuit system
INV
- External DC reactor as standard*
- DC input is available.
Improved Adaptation to This type consists of the converter and inverter circuits.The
Functions
Terminal
* Available for 75kW or higher
Control Environment inverter can be operated using a commercial power supply.
* DC power can also be supplied without using the converter circuit.
capacity models
Performance and Safety
NEW
Protective
Functions
CONCEPT Stack type
Easier A Wide Range
Dimensions
External
Maintenance of Applications
Functions of Parts
Names and
Unit type

NEW Inverter (Stack Type)
Converter section Inverter section Structure

Power
supply M - The converter (rectifier) is separately set.
- External control circuit
INV - Built-in DC reactor
Wiring Diagram
M Features
- DC supply enables the multi-drive arrangement
The converter and inverter sections are separately - Energy can be shared within DC bus lines.
set in this type.The converter (diode stack) or PWM - Downsized panel
converter is required depending on the intended - Large-capacity system is easily built.
use. Moreover, a combination of inverters can be
Options
- Maintainability
used with one converter.
High performance enabled by the comprehensive use of Fuji technology. Converter
Delivery Period
and Code
Maintains safety and protects the environment. Diode rectifier PMW converter (Stack Type) PMW converter (Unit Type)
Opens up possibilities for the new generation. RHD-D series RHC-D series* RHC-C series*
NEW NEW
Guidelines for
With the FRENIC-VG, Fuji has concentrated its technologies to deliver the best-performing CNV CNV CNV
Available
inverter on the market. In addition to basic performance, this model features the following soon
This converter is used where no This converter is used where electric power regeneration or harmonic
dramatic improvements: support for previously difficult applications due to technical and capability electric power regeneration control is required. Peripheral devices are separately required.
limitations, easier, more user-friendly maintenance, and environmental friendliness and safety. is required. * D series and C series differ in form but show identical function and performance.
Please use them according to the installation space and purposes.
Fuji Electric proudly introduces the FRENIC-VG to the world.

2 3
Improved Control Performance A Wide Range of Applications
Realizes the industry-leading control performance Ratings for intended use
The operation mode for the motor is selected according to motor load condition. Motors larger by one or two frames can be driven
Induction motor with medium load (MD) and light load (LD) use.
Achieved speed response Specification Applied load Feature Applicable overload rating
Power supply
voltage
Applicable motor capacity [kW]
of 600 Hz Follow-up characteristics High Duty 200V

Unit Type
0.75 to 90
Stack Type*2
under impact load

HD Powerful drive at low noise Current: 150% 1min/200% 3sec
(Tested with a dedicated motor with PG under vector control with Spec 400V 3.7 to 630
speed sensor: about six times greater than our conventional model) 200V
Middle Duty Can drive motors of frames
MD 150% 1min
Spec one size larger *1 400V 110 to 450 *2 30 to 800
25.0 200V 37 to 110
dB Low Duty Can drive motors of frames Unit type:120% 1min
LD
Spec one or two sizes larger *1 Stack type:110% 1min 400V 37 to 710 37 to 1000
dBMg Note）A DCL may be selected according to applicable specifications.

*1 This varies depending on motor specifications and power supply voltage (unit type only).
*2 Carrier frequency becomes 2kHz.
Torque current 100%
-25.0 command value
dB 1 10
Frequency Hz
100 1000
A standard built-in brake circuit with expanded capacity range Control method
Actual speed
0.0 value
100r/min Having a standard built-in brake circuit (with 200V 55kW or less and Not only the induction motors but also the synchronous motors
deg
400V 160KW or less), is useful when applying the inverter to the vertical can be driven, and for the induction motors, you can select the
Phase Motor current
transfer machine, which is frequently used under the regenerative load. most suitable control method according to your individual needs.
(deg) * Unit type only
Target motors Control method
-360
deg 1 10
Frequency Hz
100 1000
Load ON(100%) Load OFF(0%)
0.5s
Servo function Induction motor
-Vector control with speed sensor
-Speed sensorless vector control
-V/f Control
FRN7.5VG1S-2J(600Hz, -3dB) - Position control by built-in APC
FRN7.5VG7S-2(105Hz, -3dB) - The ABS encoder I/F option card with 17-bit high resolution has been prepared.
FRN37VG1S-4J, at 500r/min operation - Vector control with speed sensor
FRN7.5VG5S-2(54Hz, -3dB) - Pulse train input enabled (optional) Synchronous motor
(including pole position detection)
* With the stack type, "100 Hz" is achieved. - The option card for the SX and E-SX bus I/F has been prepared.
Uneven rotation A wide range of options

Speed and torque characteristics
reduced by one-third - Providing options supporting various interfaces such as high-speed serial communications
Under vector control with sensor
* Compared with our conventional models - Options can be used by just inserting them into the connectors inside the inverter. Up to five cards can be mounted.
(For details, please contact us because the combination of the optional cards has some restrictions.)
Categoly Name Type

Analog card Synchronized interface OPC-VG1-SN*1
F/V converter OPC-VG1-FV*1
Analog input/output interface expansion card OPC-VG1-AIO
FRN37VG1S-4J Digital card (for 8-bit bus) Digital input OPC-VG1-DI
0.5r/min Digital input OPC-VG1-DIO
150 PG interface card +5V line driver OPC-VG1-PG
100 Open collector OPC-VG1-PGo
Axial torque (%)
50 ABS encoder with 17-bit high resolution OPC-VG1-SPGT

0 Rotation speed PG card for synchronous motor drive Line driver OPC-VG1-PMPG
1000 2000 3000 (r/min)
-50 Open collector OPC-VG1-PMPGo
Conventional model FRN37VG7S-4 T-Link communication card OPC-VG1-TL
-100
0.5r/min CC-Link communication card OPC-VG1-CCL
-150
High-speed serial communication card (for UPAC) OPC-VG1-SIU*1
Digital card (for 16-bit bus) SX bus communication card OPC-VG1-SX
E-SX bus communication card OPC-VG1-ESX
at 30r/min operation User programming card OPC-VG1-UPAC*1
FRN37VG1S-4J
PROFINET-IRT communication card OPC-VG1-PNET*1
Safety card Functional safety card OPC-VG1-SAFE
Field bus interface card PROFIBUS-DP communication card OPC-VG1-PDP*1
DeviceNet communication card OPC-VG1-DEV*1
Control circuit terminal Terminal block for high-speed communications OPC-VG1-TBSI
*1 comming soon
4 5
Improved Control Performance A Wide Range of Applications
Realizes the industry-leading control performance Ratings for intended use
The operation mode for the motor is selected according to motor load condition. Motors larger by one or two frames can be driven
Induction motor with medium load (MD) and light load (LD) use.
Achieved speed response Specification Applied load Feature Applicable overload rating
Power supply
voltage
Applicable motor capacity [kW]
of 600 Hz Follow-up characteristics High Duty 200V

Unit Type
0.75 to 90
Stack Type*2
under impact load

HD Powerful drive at low noise Current: 150% 1min/200% 3sec
(Tested with a dedicated motor with PG under vector control with Spec 400V 3.7 to 630
speed sensor: about six times greater than our conventional model) 200V
Middle Duty Can drive motors of frames
MD 150% 1min
Spec one size larger *1 400V 110 to 450 *2 30 to 800
25.0 200V 37 to 110
dB Low Duty Can drive motors of frames Unit type:120% 1min
LD
Spec one or two sizes larger *1 Stack type:110% 1min 400V 37 to 710 37 to 1000
dBMg Note）A DCL may be selected according to applicable specifications.

*1 This varies depending on motor specifications and power supply voltage (unit type only).
*2 Carrier frequency becomes 2kHz.
Torque current 100%
-25.0 command value
dB 1 10
Frequency Hz
100 1000
A standard built-in brake circuit with expanded capacity range Control method
Actual speed
0.0 value
100r/min Having a standard built-in brake circuit (with 200V 55kW or less and Not only the induction motors but also the synchronous motors
deg
400V 160KW or less), is useful when applying the inverter to the vertical can be driven, and for the induction motors, you can select the
Phase Motor current
transfer machine, which is frequently used under the regenerative load. most suitable control method according to your individual needs.
(deg) * Unit type only
Target motors Control method
-360
deg 1 10
Frequency Hz
100 1000
Load ON(100%) Load OFF(0%)
0.5s
Servo function Induction motor
-Vector control with speed sensor
-Speed sensorless vector control
-V/f Control
FRN7.5VG1S-2J(600Hz, -3dB) - Position control by built-in APC
FRN7.5VG7S-2(105Hz, -3dB) - The ABS encoder I/F option card with 17-bit high resolution has been prepared.
FRN37VG1S-4J, at 500r/min operation - Vector control with speed sensor
FRN7.5VG5S-2(54Hz, -3dB) - Pulse train input enabled (optional) Synchronous motor
(including pole position detection)
* With the stack type, "100 Hz" is achieved. - The option card for the SX and E-SX bus I/F has been prepared.
Uneven rotation A wide range of options

Speed and torque characteristics
reduced by one-third - Providing options supporting various interfaces such as high-speed serial communications
Under vector control with sensor
* Compared with our conventional models - Options can be used by just inserting them into the connectors inside the inverter. Up to five cards can be mounted.
(For details, please contact us because the combination of the optional cards has some restrictions.)
Categoly Name Type

Analog card Synchronized interface OPC-VG1-SN*1
F/V converter OPC-VG1-FV*1
Analog input/output interface expansion card OPC-VG1-AIO
FRN37VG1S-4J Digital card (for 8-bit bus) Digital input OPC-VG1-DI
0.5r/min Digital input OPC-VG1-DIO
150 PG interface card +5V line driver OPC-VG1-PG
100 Open collector OPC-VG1-PGo
Axial torque (%)
50 ABS encoder with 17-bit high resolution OPC-VG1-SPGT

0 Rotation speed PG card for synchronous motor drive Line driver OPC-VG1-PMPG
1000 2000 3000 (r/min)
-50 Open collector OPC-VG1-PMPGo
Conventional model FRN37VG7S-4 T-Link communication card OPC-VG1-TL
-100
0.5r/min CC-Link communication card OPC-VG1-CCL
-150
High-speed serial communication card (for UPAC) OPC-VG1-SIU*1
Digital card (for 16-bit bus) SX bus communication card OPC-VG1-SX
E-SX bus communication card OPC-VG1-ESX
at 30r/min operation User programming card OPC-VG1-UPAC*1
FRN37VG1S-4J
PROFINET-IRT communication card OPC-VG1-PNET*1
Safety card Functional safety card OPC-VG1-SAFE
Field bus interface card PROFIBUS-DP communication card OPC-VG1-PDP*1
DeviceNet communication card OPC-VG1-DEV*1
Control circuit terminal Terminal block for high-speed communications OPC-VG1-TBSI
*1 comming soon
4 5
A Wide Range of Applications and Easier Maintenance Easier Maintenance and Greater Reliability
Product Arrangement and Easier Change of the Inverters (Stack type) Upgraded PC loader functions
The inverters (stack type) have an arrangement with consideration for the installation of the product into the panel and easier change. PC Loader can be used via the USB connector (mini B) provided on the front cover.
FRENIC-VG
The inverters (stack type) (132 to 315 kW) can easily be installed or changed because they have wheels. PC USB Mini B
connector
With the inverters (stack type) (630 to 800 kW), stacks are divided for each output phase (U, V and W), which has realized the lighter weight. - The front cover does not have to be removed.
Nominal applied motor capacity
30 to 110 132 to 315 630 to 800 - No RS-485 converter is needed.
[kW] (MD spec) USB cable
Connection available
- Commercial cables can be used. in the inverter front.
FRN30SVG1S-4 to FRN132SVG1S-4 to FRN630BVG1S-4 to
Type
FRN110SVG1S-4 FRN315SVG1S-4 FRN800BVG1S-4
Categoly Single unit Single unit Stack by phase [Fault diagnosis using the trace back function] [Easy edit and detail monitor]
Wheels Not provided Provided Provided
Edited on the trace screen on the loader Data editing and detailed data monitor analysis operations
P P P
are much easier than with a conventional PC loader.
N N N
Function code setting User-defined displays (customized displays),

data explanation display for each code.
Arrangement U-phase V-phase W-phase
Trace function Real-time trace: for long-term monitoring

U,V,W U,V,W
Historical trace: for detailed data diagnosis for

IM IM short periods
M - Internal data, time and date around the fault are recorded. Trace back: for fault analysis (last three times)
The weight of one stack is reduced (50 kg or The models where each stack Trim weight by dividing the The real-time clock (clock function) is built-in as standard. *The paid-for loader software (WPS-VG1-PCL) supports real-time
less) to give consideration to replacement work. is heavy have wheels in order stack into 3 parts by each - Data are backed up by battery. tracing and historical tracing. Trace data can be stored in the memory
to change the stacks easily. output phase (U, V and W). *Battery: 30kW or more (built-in as standard), up to 22kW (available as option: OPK-BP)
Type Weight [kg] even while the power is off. (With 22 kW or lower power loaders,
FRN30SVG1S-4 A lifter for replacement*1 In the event of a breakdown, - Trace waveform can be checked on the PC loader
Maintenance FRN37SVG1S-4 28 support is possible as an option [memory back-up battery].)
is available. only the target phase needs Fault
FRN45SVG1S-4
FRN55SVG1S-4 to be replaced with a new one.
35
FRN75SVG1S-4 The stack to be replaced
FRN90SVG1S-4
FRN110SVG1S-4
43
Lifter (Conceptual view) should be an exclusive part. Multifunctional the Keypad
*1) The lifter will be available soon.
- Wide 7-segment LED ensures easy view. - Remote control operation is available.
The Keypad can be remotely operated by
How to expand the capacity range of the inverters (stack type) - The back-light is incorporated in the LCD panel, which
enables the easy inspection in the dark control panel.
extending the cable length at the RJ-45 connector.
Direct parallel connection system and multiwinding motor drive system are provided for driving a large capacity motor. - JOG (jogging) operation can be executed using
- Enhanced copy function
the Keypad.
*1) OPC-VG1-TBSI is separately required. The function codes can be copied to other inverters easily.
System Direct parallel connection system Multiwinding motor drive system
*2) Engine cut off operation. If a stack fails in case of direct (Three patterns of function codes can be stored.) Copying - The HELP key displays operation guidance.
Multiwinding motor parallel connection, the operation continues with lower data in advance reduces restoration time when problems
Drive motor Single-winding motor
(Exclusive use motor where winding separates off) output power using the stacks that have not failed occur, by replacing the Keypad when changing the unit.
Restriction of The minimum wiring length (L)
Features There is no particular limit.
wiring length varies with the capacity.
Engine cut off Enabled
More reliable functions
200kW 200kW
operation*2 Enabled
(However, the wiring should be switched over.) Fault
Number of inverters to be connected 2 to 3 inverters 2 to 6 inverters
Alarm severity selection
U,V,W U,V,W
Save alarm data
P P
When 2 inverters When 2 inverters Alarm severity (serious and minor) can be selected, eliminating
are connected N are connected N
355kW IM Detailed data are stored for OU the risk of critical facility stoppage due to a minor fault.
Time of occurrence
P,N P,N P,N P,N Example) If one inverter goes wrong when 200kW x the last four alarms, including: 2011／01／01
OC 30-relay Y-terminal Inverter
2 inverters are driving a 355kW motor, you 12：36：45 Selection
Arrangement diagram *1 *1 *1 *1 Time of occurrence output output output
U,V,W U,V,W U,V,W U,V,W
can continue operation with the 200kW - Time to sound alarm LU 2011／01／01
Motor overload, No output Operation
inverter (capacity of one inverter). - Speed setting value
12：36：45 N＊＝1500.0r／ｍ
Time of occurrence Provided
OC 2011／01／02 N ＝1500.0r／ｍ communications error, (minor fault) continued Can be selected
(Note) To start the engine cut off operation, consideration is needed to DC fan lock, etc. for each function.
L - Detection speed value Time of occurrence
f ＊＝50.0Hz
12：36：45 N＊＝1500.0r／ｍ
Output Not provided Shut off
IM IM the switch over operation of PG signals or motor constants and TRQ＝
N ＝1500.0r／ｍ 90％
sequence circuit. For details, refer to the operation manual. - Torque command value 2011／01／05
f ＊＝50.0Hz Blown fuse, excessive current,
- Temperature
12：36：45 N＊＝1500.0r／ｍ TMP ＝ 43℃ Output Not provided Shut off Fixed
TRQ＝ 90％＝ ground fault, etc.
Example of the arrangement when direct parallel connection is used N ＝1500.0r／ｍ Iout 251.6A
(heat sink, internal temperature)
TMP ＝ Vout 35℃
f ＊＝50.0Hz
N＊＝1500.0r／ｍ
＝ 190V
Parallel connection of the 2 or 3 inverters with the same capacity enables larger capacity and system redundancy. - Accumulated operation time TRQ＝
N ＝1500.0r／ｍ 90％＝ FLX＊
Iout ＝
256.2A 100％
PG fault diagnosis
A typical combination is shown in the table below, but other combinations are also available. - Output current detection value TMP ＝ Vout 55℃
f ＊＝50.0Hz ＝ 200V
TRQ＝ 90％＝ FLX＊
Iout ＝
180.0A 100％ - The PG interface circuit incorporated as standard detects disconnection
- Magnetic-flux reference value of the power supply line as well as the PG signal line.
Combination example for direct parallel connection 2 direct parallel connection systems 3 direct parallel connection systems TMP ＝ Vout 45℃
＝ 132V
- I/O status Iout ＝ FLX＊＝
210.6A 100％
- Operation can be continued in sensorless mode during PG disconnection
P P
Nominal applied motor capacity Vout ＝ 160V
or fault. (Soon to be supported)
Stacks arrangement examples N N FLX＊＝ 100％
[kW] (MD spec)
Old model: The inverter was stopped by a trip and the motor ran freely.
355 FRN200SVG1S-4 ×2 P,N P,N P,N P,N P,N New model: The mode is automatically switched to sensorless vector control mode when a
- The number of alarm data to be stored has been increased from the conventional model.
400 FRN220SVG1S-4 ×2 *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 PG fault is detected, minimizing effect to the machined products.
Thanks to the real-time clock function built-in as standard, the (Sensorless control shows lower control performance than vector control with a speed sensor. Combine equipment
500 FRN280SVG1S-4 ×2 U,V,W U,V,W U,V,W U,V,W U,V,W
complete data of the latest and last 3 alarm occurences is stored: and machines to be used and check their operation in advance for insufficient torque at low speed, etc.)
630 FRN220SVG1S-4 ×3 time, speed command, torque, current and others. This enables
710 FRN280SVG1S-4 ×3 machine units to be checked for abnormalities. - A mode was added that judges if it is a PG fault or a fault on the inverter side
Simulated output mode is provided at the PG pulse output terminal (FA and FB).
800 FRN280SVG1S-4 ×3 IM As for previous model, new alarm data overwrote and deleted existing alarm data.
IM Operation can be checked by connecting this to the PG input terminal.
*1) OPC-VG1-TBSI is separately required. This is solved with the new VG model.
6 7
A Wide Range of Applications and Easier Maintenance Easier Maintenance and Greater Reliability
Product Arrangement and Easier Change of the Inverters (Stack type) Upgraded PC loader functions
The inverters (stack type) have an arrangement with consideration for the installation of the product into the panel and easier change. PC Loader can be used via the USB connector (mini B) provided on the front cover.
FRENIC-VG
The inverters (stack type) (132 to 315 kW) can easily be installed or changed because they have wheels. PC USB Mini B
connector
With the inverters (stack type) (630 to 800 kW), stacks are divided for each output phase (U, V and W), which has realized the lighter weight. - The front cover does not have to be removed.
Nominal applied motor capacity
30 to 110 132 to 315 630 to 800 - No RS-485 converter is needed.
[kW] (MD spec) USB cable
Connection available
- Commercial cables can be used. in the inverter front.
FRN30SVG1S-4 to FRN132SVG1S-4 to FRN630BVG1S-4 to
Type
FRN110SVG1S-4 FRN315SVG1S-4 FRN800BVG1S-4
Categoly Single unit Single unit Stack by phase [Fault diagnosis using the trace back function] [Easy edit and detail monitor]
Wheels Not provided Provided Provided
Edited on the trace screen on the loader Data editing and detailed data monitor analysis operations
P P P
are much easier than with a conventional PC loader.
N N N
Function code setting User-defined displays (customized displays),

data explanation display for each code.
Arrangement U-phase V-phase W-phase
Trace function Real-time trace: for long-term monitoring

U,V,W U,V,W
Historical trace: for detailed data diagnosis for

IM IM short periods
M - Internal data, time and date around the fault are recorded. Trace back: for fault analysis (last three times)
The weight of one stack is reduced (50 kg or The models where each stack Trim weight by dividing the The real-time clock (clock function) is built-in as standard. *The paid-for loader software (WPS-VG1-PCL) supports real-time
less) to give consideration to replacement work. is heavy have wheels in order stack into 3 parts by each - Data are backed up by battery. tracing and historical tracing. Trace data can be stored in the memory
to change the stacks easily. output phase (U, V and W). *Battery: 30kW or more (built-in as standard), up to 22kW (available as option: OPK-BP)
Type Weight [kg] even while the power is off. (With 22 kW or lower power loaders,
FRN30SVG1S-4 A lifter for replacement*1 In the event of a breakdown, - Trace waveform can be checked on the PC loader
Maintenance FRN37SVG1S-4 28 support is possible as an option [memory back-up battery].)
is available. only the target phase needs Fault
FRN45SVG1S-4
FRN55SVG1S-4 to be replaced with a new one.
35
FRN75SVG1S-4 The stack to be replaced
FRN90SVG1S-4
FRN110SVG1S-4
43
Lifter (Conceptual view) should be an exclusive part. Multifunctional the Keypad
*1) The lifter will be available soon.
- Wide 7-segment LED ensures easy view. - Remote control operation is available.
The Keypad can be remotely operated by
How to expand the capacity range of the inverters (stack type) - The back-light is incorporated in the LCD panel, which
enables the easy inspection in the dark control panel.
extending the cable length at the RJ-45 connector.
Direct parallel connection system and multiwinding motor drive system are provided for driving a large capacity motor. - JOG (jogging) operation can be executed using
- Enhanced copy function
the Keypad.
*1) OPC-VG1-TBSI is separately required. The function codes can be copied to other inverters easily.
System Direct parallel connection system Multiwinding motor drive system
*2) Engine cut off operation. If a stack fails in case of direct (Three patterns of function codes can be stored.) Copying - The HELP key displays operation guidance.
Multiwinding motor parallel connection, the operation continues with lower data in advance reduces restoration time when problems
Drive motor Single-winding motor
(Exclusive use motor where winding separates off) output power using the stacks that have not failed occur, by replacing the Keypad when changing the unit.
Restriction of The minimum wiring length (L)
Features There is no particular limit.
wiring length varies with the capacity.
Engine cut off Enabled
More reliable functions
200kW 200kW
operation*2 Enabled
(However, the wiring should be switched over.) Fault
Number of inverters to be connected 2 to 3 inverters 2 to 6 inverters
Alarm severity selection
U,V,W U,V,W
Save alarm data
P P
When 2 inverters When 2 inverters Alarm severity (serious and minor) can be selected, eliminating
are connected N are connected N
355kW IM Detailed data are stored for OU the risk of critical facility stoppage due to a minor fault.
Time of occurrence
P,N P,N P,N P,N Example) If one inverter goes wrong when 200kW x the last four alarms, including: 2011／01／01
OC 30-relay Y-terminal Inverter
2 inverters are driving a 355kW motor, you 12：36：45 Selection
Arrangement diagram *1 *1 *1 *1 Time of occurrence output output output
U,V,W U,V,W U,V,W U,V,W
can continue operation with the 200kW - Time to sound alarm LU 2011／01／01
Motor overload, No output Operation
inverter (capacity of one inverter). - Speed setting value
12：36：45 N＊＝1500.0r／ｍ
Time of occurrence Provided
OC 2011／01／02 N ＝1500.0r／ｍ communications error, (minor fault) continued Can be selected
(Note) To start the engine cut off operation, consideration is needed to DC fan lock, etc. for each function.
L - Detection speed value Time of occurrence
f ＊＝50.0Hz
12：36：45 N＊＝1500.0r／ｍ
Output Not provided Shut off
IM IM the switch over operation of PG signals or motor constants and TRQ＝
N ＝1500.0r／ｍ 90％
sequence circuit. For details, refer to the operation manual. - Torque command value 2011／01／05
f ＊＝50.0Hz Blown fuse, excessive current,
- Temperature
12：36：45 N＊＝1500.0r／ｍ TMP ＝ 43℃ Output Not provided Shut off Fixed
TRQ＝ 90％＝ ground fault, etc.
Example of the arrangement when direct parallel connection is used N ＝1500.0r／ｍ Iout 251.6A
(heat sink, internal temperature)
TMP ＝ Vout 35℃
f ＊＝50.0Hz
N＊＝1500.0r／ｍ
＝ 190V
Parallel connection of the 2 or 3 inverters with the same capacity enables larger capacity and system redundancy. - Accumulated operation time TRQ＝
N ＝1500.0r／ｍ 90％＝ FLX＊
Iout ＝
256.2A 100％
PG fault diagnosis
A typical combination is shown in the table below, but other combinations are also available. - Output current detection value TMP ＝ Vout 55℃
f ＊＝50.0Hz ＝ 200V
TRQ＝ 90％＝ FLX＊
Iout ＝
180.0A 100％ - The PG interface circuit incorporated as standard detects disconnection
- Magnetic-flux reference value of the power supply line as well as the PG signal line.
Combination example for direct parallel connection 2 direct parallel connection systems 3 direct parallel connection systems TMP ＝ Vout 45℃
＝ 132V
- I/O status Iout ＝ FLX＊＝
210.6A 100％
- Operation can be continued in sensorless mode during PG disconnection
P P
Nominal applied motor capacity Vout ＝ 160V
or fault. (Soon to be supported)
Stacks arrangement examples N N FLX＊＝ 100％
[kW] (MD spec)
Old model: The inverter was stopped by a trip and the motor ran freely.
355 FRN200SVG1S-4 ×2 P,N P,N P,N P,N P,N New model: The mode is automatically switched to sensorless vector control mode when a
- The number of alarm data to be stored has been increased from the conventional model.
400 FRN220SVG1S-4 ×2 *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 PG fault is detected, minimizing effect to the machined products.
Thanks to the real-time clock function built-in as standard, the (Sensorless control shows lower control performance than vector control with a speed sensor. Combine equipment
500 FRN280SVG1S-4 ×2 U,V,W U,V,W U,V,W U,V,W U,V,W
complete data of the latest and last 3 alarm occurences is stored: and machines to be used and check their operation in advance for insufficient torque at low speed, etc.)
630 FRN220SVG1S-4 ×3 time, speed command, torque, current and others. This enables
710 FRN280SVG1S-4 ×3 machine units to be checked for abnormalities. - A mode was added that judges if it is a PG fault or a fault on the inverter side
Simulated output mode is provided at the PG pulse output terminal (FA and FB).
800 FRN280SVG1S-4 ×3 IM As for previous model, new alarm data overwrote and deleted existing alarm data.
IM Operation can be checked by connecting this to the PG input terminal.
*1) OPC-VG1-TBSI is separately required. This is solved with the new VG model.
6 7
Easy change of the cooling fan Easy wiring (removable control terminal block)
- The terminal block can be connected to the inverter after control wiring work is completed. Wiring work is simplified.
Unit Type Inverter body Fan body
The cooling fan can easily be changed - Restoration time for updating equipment, problem occurrence, and inverter replacement has been drastically reduced. Just mount the wired terminal block board to the replaced inverter.
without removing the front cover and printed
Unit Type Stack Type
board.
Inverter body Fan body

Stack Type
Adaptation to Environment and Safety
The cooling fan installed at the top can easily
be changed without drawing the stacks. Conforms to safety standards (Soon to be supported) Enhanced environmental resistance
However, for the 220 to 315kW inverter,
remove the 2 connection bars from the DC - The functional safety (FS) function STO that conforms to the Environmental resistance has been enhanced compared to
side and change the cooling fan. FS standard EN61800-5-2 is incorporated as standard. conventional inverters.
- The FS functions STO, SS1, SLS and SBC that conform to FS (1) Environmental resistance of cooling fan has been enhanced.
standard EN61800-5-2 can be also available by installing the option (2) Ni and Sn plating are employed on copper bars.
card OPC-VG1-SAFE. (Available only when controlling the motor
Environmental resistance has been enhanced on the FRENIC-VG
using feedback encoder (closed loop).)
compared to conventional models; however, the following environments
Safety function STO: Safe Torque Off should be examined based on how the equipment is being used.
This function shuts off the output of the inverter (motor output torque) immediately. a. Sulfidizing gas (present in some activities such as tire manufacturers,
Safety function SS1: Safe Stop 1 paper manufacturers, sewage treatment, and the textile industry)
This function decreases the motor speed to shut down the motor output torque (by STO FS b. Conductive dust and foreign particles (such as with metal
processing, extruding machines, printing machines, and waste treatment)
function) after the motor reaches the specified speed or after the specified time has elapsed.
c. Others: under unique environments not included
Safety function SLS: Safely Limited Speed
under standard environments
This function prevents the motor from rotating over the specified speed.
Safety function SBC: Safe Brake Control Contact Fuji before using the product in environments such as
Components with a longer service life This function outputs a safe signal of the motor brake control. those indicated above.
For the various consumable parts inside the inverter, their

designed lives have been extended to 10 years.
Life-limited component Design lifetime*1
RoHS Directive compliance
This also extended the equipment maintenance cycles. Cooling fan
Life conditions FRENIC-VG complies with European regulations that limit the use of specific hazardous substances (RoHS) as a standard.
Smoothing capacitor on main circuit 10 years
Ambient temperature: 40°C*2, load factor: 100% (HD spec), 80% (MD and LD specs) Electrolytic capacitors on PCB Six hazardous substances About RoHS
*1) The planned life is determined by calculation, and is not the guaranteed value.
Lead, mercury, cadmium, hexavalent chromium, polybrominated Directive 2002/95/EC, promulgated by the European Parliament and
*2) For the stack type, the ambient temperature is 30°C.
biphenyl (PBB), polybrominated diphenyl ether (PBDE) European Council, limits the use of specific hazardous substances
*Does not apply to the parts of some inverter models. included in electrical and electronic devices.
Enhanced lifetime alarm Useful functions for test run and adjustment
- Lifetime alarms can be checked rapidly on the Keypad and - Customization of functions for test run and adjustment Input/output terminal inverting stack type
PC loader (optional). (Individual items on the loader can be set to be displayed or not.)
If there is no space on the lower side, an input/output inverting AC
- Facility maintenance can be performed much easier thanks - Each communications I/O map input/output status is displayed (for PLC software terminal
debug) on the loader or the keypad (keypad to be supported soon). stack type is available, with the motor terminals located on the block
to lifetime alarms.
upper side and the DC bus terminals located on the lower side
- Simulated fault alarm issued by a special function on the Keypad R S T U V W MC
Items (only for the 220kW inverter). Contact us for specific details
- Monitor data hold function
Facility maintenance warning Inverter lifetime - Simulated operation mode This has the opposite
Inverter accumulated No. of inverter input/output location
time (h) starts (times)
Accumulated time (h) alarm information Simulated connection allows the inverter to be operated with internal parts in the
of the standard stack
No. of starts (times) is displayed. same way as if they were connected to the motor, without actually being connected. M
type.
- The externally input I/O monitor and PG pulse states can be
P.N
checked on the Keypad.
DC bar
- ASR auto tuning (to be supported soon on the keypad). terminal
Wheels
Converter Inverter
8 9
Easy change of the cooling fan Easy wiring (removable control terminal block)
- The terminal block can be connected to the inverter after control wiring work is completed. Wiring work is simplified.
Unit Type Inverter body Fan body
The cooling fan can easily be changed - Restoration time for updating equipment, problem occurrence, and inverter replacement has been drastically reduced. Just mount the wired terminal block board to the replaced inverter.
without removing the front cover and printed
board.
Inverter body Fan body

Stack Type
Adaptation to Environment and Safety
The cooling fan installed at the top can easily
be changed without drawing the stacks. Conforms to safety standards (Soon to be supported) Enhanced environmental resistance
However, for the 220 to 315kW inverter,
remove the 2 connection bars from the DC - The functional safety (FS) function STO that conforms to the Environmental resistance has been enhanced compared to
side and change the cooling fan. FS standard EN61800-5-2 is incorporated as standard. conventional inverters.
- The FS functions STO, SS1, SLS and SBC that conform to FS (1) Environmental resistance of cooling fan has been enhanced.
standard EN61800-5-2 can be also available by installing the option (2) Ni and Sn plating are employed on copper bars.
card OPC-VG1-SAFE. (Available only when controlling the motor
Environmental resistance has been enhanced on the FRENIC-VG
using feedback encoder (closed loop).)
compared to conventional models; however, the following environments
Safety function STO: Safe Torque Off should be examined based on how the equipment is being used.
This function shuts off the output of the inverter (motor output torque) immediately. a. Sulfidizing gas (present in some activities such as tire manufacturers,
Safety function SS1: Safe Stop 1 paper manufacturers, sewage treatment, and the textile industry)
This function decreases the motor speed to shut down the motor output torque (by STO FS b. Conductive dust and foreign particles (such as with metal
processing, extruding machines, printing machines, and waste treatment)
function) after the motor reaches the specified speed or after the specified time has elapsed.
c. Others: under unique environments not included
Safety function SLS: Safely Limited Speed
under standard environments
This function prevents the motor from rotating over the specified speed.
Safety function SBC: Safe Brake Control Contact Fuji before using the product in environments such as
Components with a longer service life This function outputs a safe signal of the motor brake control. those indicated above.
For the various consumable parts inside the inverter, their

designed lives have been extended to 10 years.
Life-limited component Design lifetime*1
RoHS Directive compliance
This also extended the equipment maintenance cycles. Cooling fan
Life conditions FRENIC-VG complies with European regulations that limit the use of specific hazardous substances (RoHS) as a standard.
Smoothing capacitor on main circuit 10 years
Ambient temperature: 40°C*2, load factor: 100% (HD spec), 80% (MD and LD specs) Electrolytic capacitors on PCB Six hazardous substances About RoHS
*1) The planned life is determined by calculation, and is not the guaranteed value.
Lead, mercury, cadmium, hexavalent chromium, polybrominated Directive 2002/95/EC, promulgated by the European Parliament and
*2) For the stack type, the ambient temperature is 30°C.
biphenyl (PBB), polybrominated diphenyl ether (PBDE) European Council, limits the use of specific hazardous substances
*Does not apply to the parts of some inverter models. included in electrical and electronic devices.
Enhanced lifetime alarm Useful functions for test run and adjustment
- Lifetime alarms can be checked rapidly on the Keypad and - Customization of functions for test run and adjustment Input/output terminal inverting stack type
PC loader (optional). (Individual items on the loader can be set to be displayed or not.)
If there is no space on the lower side, an input/output inverting AC
- Facility maintenance can be performed much easier thanks - Each communications I/O map input/output status is displayed (for PLC software terminal
debug) on the loader or the keypad (keypad to be supported soon). stack type is available, with the motor terminals located on the block
to lifetime alarms.
upper side and the DC bus terminals located on the lower side
- Simulated fault alarm issued by a special function on the Keypad R S T U V W MC
Items (only for the 220kW inverter). Contact us for specific details
- Monitor data hold function
Facility maintenance warning Inverter lifetime - Simulated operation mode This has the opposite
Inverter accumulated No. of inverter input/output location
time (h) starts (times)
Accumulated time (h) alarm information Simulated connection allows the inverter to be operated with internal parts in the
of the standard stack
No. of starts (times) is displayed. same way as if they were connected to the motor, without actually being connected. M
type.
- The externally input I/O monitor and PG pulse states can be
P.N
checked on the Keypad.
DC bar
- ASR auto tuning (to be supported soon on the keypad). terminal
Wheels
Converter Inverter
8 9
Application Examples
Large crane and Application to plants Feeding part of semiconductor Test equipment
overhead crane manufacturing device, wire saw for automobiles
Electric room
M Feed
winder
M
Material Dancer M
Traverse
M
Operation M M
Dancer M
room
Traverse
main Spindle M
Container unwinder
Monitoring room
Travel equipment
High reliability Control with high speed and high accuracy Smooth torque characteristic High-speed response control
VG supports your facility with long life service and high In addition to high speed and high accuracy, VG contributes to stable facility The smooth drive characteristic in which torque ripple is High-speed rotation and torque control with high
reliability. operation with high reliability and long service life. The trace back function suppressed contributes to machining quality. response are available for engine and transmission tests.
The trace back function allows easy fault diagnosis. makes diagnosing the cause of problems easy when an abnormality arises.
Bus system support Bus system support System support System support
The bus system is supported to allow centralized control Centralized control and monitoring are achieved by The system becomes more simple and highly efficient by The system can be supported in cases such as the
of elevation, traverse, and trolley, as well as centralized supporting various fieldbuses. using same bus system for main axis (spindle) and the other vehicle body inertia simulation function for a brake test
monitoring of running conditions. axes (traverse and winding) driven by small capacity servos. apparatus by combining with the controller.
Servo press: large size for automobiles, small size for Winding equipment Shipboard winch Flying shear
machines such as crimping terminal processing machines (paper and metal) (Cutting while moving)
Position control Tension control High reliability and tension control Position control
The press position is controlled based on an instantaneous Tension-type winding control capability with high Torque is controlled up to extra low speed using the Position control is performed according to the position
position command given by the upper order CNC. accuracy torque control has been improved. sensorless feature. command given by the upper order CNC.
Control with high responsibility contributes to shortening of Dancer-type winding control capability by the speed Stable drive is maintained against load variation caused The machine cuts the material while moving at the same
the operation cycle. control with high speed response has been improved. by waves. speed (as the material).
Precision synchronization control System support System support

Large machines are driven with several motors to increase thrust. The controller that calculates winding diameter achieves The system is configured by an upper controller that
Precision synchronization control of several inverters and motors constant tension control. calculates synchronous operation between the material
using the high-speed bus system can be applied. feed axis, cutter feed axis and cut axis.
10 11
Application Examples
Large crane and Application to plants Feeding part of semiconductor Test equipment
overhead crane manufacturing device, wire saw for automobiles
Electric room
M Feed
winder
M
Material Dancer M
Traverse
M
Operation M M
Dancer M
room
Traverse
main Spindle M
Container unwinder
Monitoring room
Travel equipment
High reliability Control with high speed and high accuracy Smooth torque characteristic High-speed response control
VG supports your facility with long life service and high In addition to high speed and high accuracy, VG contributes to stable facility The smooth drive characteristic in which torque ripple is High-speed rotation and torque control with high
reliability. operation with high reliability and long service life. The trace back function suppressed contributes to machining quality. response are available for engine and transmission tests.
The trace back function allows easy fault diagnosis. makes diagnosing the cause of problems easy when an abnormality arises.
Bus system support Bus system support System support System support
The bus system is supported to allow centralized control Centralized control and monitoring are achieved by The system becomes more simple and highly efficient by The system can be supported in cases such as the
of elevation, traverse, and trolley, as well as centralized supporting various fieldbuses. using same bus system for main axis (spindle) and the other vehicle body inertia simulation function for a brake test
monitoring of running conditions. axes (traverse and winding) driven by small capacity servos. apparatus by combining with the controller.
Servo press: large size for automobiles, small size for Winding equipment Shipboard winch Flying shear
machines such as crimping terminal processing machines (paper and metal) (Cutting while moving)
Position control Tension control High reliability and tension control Position control
The press position is controlled based on an instantaneous Tension-type winding control capability with high Torque is controlled up to extra low speed using the Position control is performed according to the position
position command given by the upper order CNC. accuracy torque control has been improved. sensorless feature. command given by the upper order CNC.
Control with high responsibility contributes to shortening of Dancer-type winding control capability by the speed Stable drive is maintained against load variation caused The machine cuts the material while moving at the same
the operation cycle. control with high speed response has been improved. by waves. speed (as the material).
Precision synchronization control System support System support

Large machines are driven with several motors to increase thrust. The controller that calculates winding diameter achieves The system is configured by an upper controller that
Precision synchronization control of several inverters and motors constant tension control. calculates synchronous operation between the material
using the high-speed bus system can be applied. feed axis, cutter feed axis and cut axis.
10 11
Model variation (Inverter) Model variation (converter)
200V Series 400V Series 200V Series 400V Series
Unit Type Unit Type Inverter (Stack Type) Unit Type (PWM) Unit Type (PWM) Stack Type (PWM) Diode rectifier [soon-to-be-released]
Standard
Nominal applied motor HD LD HD MD LD MD LD Nominal applied motor MD(CT) LD(VT) MD(CT) LD(VT) MD LD MD LD
(kW) (150%, 1 min./200%, 3 sec.) (120%, 1 min.) (150%, 1 min./200%, 3 sec.) (150%, 1 min.) (120%, 1 min.) (150%, 1 min.) (110%, 1 min.) (kW) (150%, 1 min.) (120%, 1 min.) (150%, 1 min.) (120%, 1 min.) (150%, 1 min.) (110%, 1 min.) (150%, 1 min.) (110%, 1 min.)
Applied load High Duty Spec Low Duty Spec High Duty Spec Middle Duty Spec Low Duty Spec Middle Duty Spec Low Duty Spec Applied load High Duty Spec Low Duty Spec High Duty Spec Low Duty Spec Middle Duty Spec Low Duty Spec Middle Duty Spec Low Duty Spec
0.75 FRN0.75VG1S-2 7.5 RHC7.5-2C RHC7.5-4C
Common
1.5 FRN1.5VG1S-2 11 RHC11-2C RHC7.5-2C RHC11-4C RHC7.5-4C
2.2 FRN2.2VG1S-2 15 RHC15-2C RHC11-2C RHC15-4C RHC11-4C
3.7 FRN3.7VG1S-2 FRN3.7VG1S-4 18.5 RHC18.5-2C RHC15-2C RHC18.5-4C RHC15-4C
5.5 FRN5.5VG1S-2 FRN5.5VG1S-4 22 RHC22-2C RHC18.5-2C RHC22-4C RHC18.5-4C
Functions
Terminal
7.5 FRN7.5VG1S-2 FRN7.5VG1S-4 30 RHC30-2C RHC22-2C RHC30-4C RHC22-4C
11 FRN11VG1S-2 FRN11VG1S-4 37 RHC37-2C RHC30-2C RHC37-4C RHC30-4C
Protective
Functions
30 FRN30VG1S-2 FRN30VG1S-4 FRN30SVG1S-4 90 RHC90-2C RHC75-2C RHC90-4C RHC75-4C
37 FRN37VG1S-2 FRN30VG1S-2 FRN37VG1S-4 FRN30VG1S-4 FRN37SVG1S-4 FRN30SVG1S-4 110 RHC90-2C RHC110-4C RHC90-4C
45 FRN45VG1S-2 FRN37VG1S-2 FRN45VG1S-4 FRN37VG1S-4 FRN45SVG1S-4 FRN37SVG1S-4 132 RHC132-4C RHC110-4C RHC132S-4D
Dimensions
55 FRN55VG1S-2 FRN45VG1S-2 FRN55VG1S-4 FRN45VG1S-4 FRN55SVG1S-4 FRN45SVG1S-4 160 RHC160-4C RHC132-4C RHC160S-4D RHC132S-4D
External
75 FRN75VG1S-2 FRN55VG1S-2 FRN75VG1S-4 FRN55VG1S-4 FRN75SVG1S-4 FRN55SVG1S-4 200 RHC200-4C RHC160-4C RHC200S-4D RHC160S-4D RHD200S-4D
132 FRN132VG1S-4 FRN110VG1S-4 FRN110VG1S-4 FRN132SVG1S-4 FRN110SVG1S-4 315 RHC315-4C RHC280-4C RHC315S-4D RHC280S-4D RHD315S-4D
Functions of Parts
Names and
160 FRN160VG1S-4 FRN132VG1S-4 FRN132VG1S-4 FRN160SVG1S-4 FRN132SVG1S-4 355 RHC355-4C RHC315-4C RHC315S-4D RHD315S-4D
200 FRN200VG1S-4 FRN160VG1S-4 FRN160VG1S-4 FRN200SVG1S-4 FRN160SVG1S-4 400 RHC400-4C RHC355-4C

220 FRN220VG1S-4 FRN200VG1S-4 FRN200VG1S-4 FRN220SVG1S-4 FRN200SVG1S-4 450
250 FRN220VG1S-4 FRN250SVG1S-4 FRN220SVG1S-4 500 RHC500-4C RHC400-4C

280 FRN280VG1S-4 FRN220VG1S-4 FRN280SVG1S-4 FRN250SVG1S-4 630 RHC630-4C RHC630B-4D
315 FRN315VG1S-4 FRN280VG1S-4 FRN315SVG1S-4 FRN280SVG1S-4 710 RHC710B-4D RHC630B-4D
355 FRN355VG1S-4 FRN315VG1S-4 FRN280VG1S-4 FRN315SVG1S-4 800 RHC800B-4D RHC710B-4D
400 FRN400VG1S-4 FRN355VG1S-4 FRN315VG1S-4 1000 RHC800B-4D
450 FRN400VG1S-4 FRN355VG1S-4
630 FRN630VG1S-4 FRN500VG1S-4 FRN630BVG1S-4
710 FRN630VG1S-4 FRN710BVG1S-4 FRN630BVG1S-4
Wiring Diagram
800 FRN800BVG1S-4 FRN710BVG1S-4
1000 FRN800BVG1S-4
How to read the model number Description of converter type
Options
FRN 30 S VG 1 S - 4 J RHC 315 S - 4 D J
Code Series name Code Destination / Instruction Manual Code Series name Code* Destination / Instruction Manual
FRN FRENIC Series J Japanese RHC PMW converter J Japanese
E English RHD Diode rectifier
Warranty
Code Nominal applied motor capacity E English
C Chinese C Chinese
0.75 0.75kW
1.5 1.5kW Code Input power source Code Nominal applied motor capacity
* This item is available only with the D series.
2.2 2.2kW 2 Three-phase 200V 132 132kW
Code Developed inverter series
4 Three-phase 400V
C C Series
Delivery Period
800 800kW 800 800kW
Code Structure
and Code
D D Series
Code Form S Standard
None Unit type Code Form
Code Developed inverter series None Unit type Code Input power source
S Standard stack
1 1 Series S Standard stack 2 Three-phase 200V
B Stack by phase
B Stack by phase 4 Three-phase 400V
Code Application range
Guidelines for
VG High performance vector control
Caution! The product detail described in this document is intended for selecting a model. When using a product, read the Instruction Manual carefully and use the product properly. Caution! The product detail described in this document is intended for selecting a model. When using a product, read the Instruction Manual carefully and use the product properly.
12 13
Model variation (Inverter) Model variation (converter)
200V Series 400V Series 200V Series 400V Series
Unit Type Unit Type Inverter (Stack Type) Unit Type (PWM) Unit Type (PWM) Stack Type (PWM) Diode rectifier [soon-to-be-released]
Standard
Nominal applied motor HD LD HD MD LD MD LD Nominal applied motor MD(CT) LD(VT) MD(CT) LD(VT) MD LD MD LD
(kW) (150%, 1 min./200%, 3 sec.) (120%, 1 min.) (150%, 1 min./200%, 3 sec.) (150%, 1 min.) (120%, 1 min.) (150%, 1 min.) (110%, 1 min.) (kW) (150%, 1 min.) (120%, 1 min.) (150%, 1 min.) (120%, 1 min.) (150%, 1 min.) (110%, 1 min.) (150%, 1 min.) (110%, 1 min.)
Applied load High Duty Spec Low Duty Spec High Duty Spec Middle Duty Spec Low Duty Spec Middle Duty Spec Low Duty Spec Applied load High Duty Spec Low Duty Spec High Duty Spec Low Duty Spec Middle Duty Spec Low Duty Spec Middle Duty Spec Low Duty Spec
0.75 FRN0.75VG1S-2 7.5 RHC7.5-2C RHC7.5-4C
Common
1.5 FRN1.5VG1S-2 11 RHC11-2C RHC7.5-2C RHC11-4C RHC7.5-4C
2.2 FRN2.2VG1S-2 15 RHC15-2C RHC11-2C RHC15-4C RHC11-4C
3.7 FRN3.7VG1S-2 FRN3.7VG1S-4 18.5 RHC18.5-2C RHC15-2C RHC18.5-4C RHC15-4C
5.5 FRN5.5VG1S-2 FRN5.5VG1S-4 22 RHC22-2C RHC18.5-2C RHC22-4C RHC18.5-4C
Functions
Terminal
Protective
Functions
30 FRN30VG1S-2 FRN30VG1S-4 FRN30SVG1S-4 90 RHC90-2C RHC75-2C RHC90-4C RHC75-4C
37 FRN37VG1S-2 FRN30VG1S-2 FRN37VG1S-4 FRN30VG1S-4 FRN37SVG1S-4 FRN30SVG1S-4 110 RHC90-2C RHC110-4C RHC90-4C
Dimensions
55 FRN55VG1S-2 FRN45VG1S-2 FRN55VG1S-4 FRN45VG1S-4 FRN55SVG1S-4 FRN45SVG1S-4 160 RHC160-4C RHC132-4C RHC160S-4D RHC132S-4D
External
132 FRN132VG1S-4 FRN110VG1S-4 FRN110VG1S-4 FRN132SVG1S-4 FRN110SVG1S-4 315 RHC315-4C RHC280-4C RHC315S-4D RHC280S-4D RHD315S-4D
Functions of Parts
Names and
160 FRN160VG1S-4 FRN132VG1S-4 FRN132VG1S-4 FRN160SVG1S-4 FRN132SVG1S-4 355 RHC355-4C RHC315-4C RHC315S-4D RHD315S-4D
200 FRN200VG1S-4 FRN160VG1S-4 FRN160VG1S-4 FRN200SVG1S-4 FRN160SVG1S-4 400 RHC400-4C RHC355-4C

220 FRN220VG1S-4 FRN200VG1S-4 FRN200VG1S-4 FRN220SVG1S-4 FRN200SVG1S-4 450
250 FRN220VG1S-4 FRN250SVG1S-4 FRN220SVG1S-4 500 RHC500-4C RHC400-4C

280 FRN280VG1S-4 FRN220VG1S-4 FRN280SVG1S-4 FRN250SVG1S-4 630 RHC630-4C RHC630B-4D
315 FRN315VG1S-4 FRN280VG1S-4 FRN315SVG1S-4 FRN280SVG1S-4 710 RHC710B-4D RHC630B-4D
355 FRN355VG1S-4 FRN315VG1S-4 FRN280VG1S-4 FRN315SVG1S-4 800 RHC800B-4D RHC710B-4D
400 FRN400VG1S-4 FRN355VG1S-4 FRN315VG1S-4 1000 RHC800B-4D
630 FRN630VG1S-4 FRN500VG1S-4 FRN630BVG1S-4
710 FRN630VG1S-4 FRN710BVG1S-4 FRN630BVG1S-4
Wiring Diagram
800 FRN800BVG1S-4 FRN710BVG1S-4
1000 FRN800BVG1S-4
How to read the model number Description of converter type
Options
FRN 30 S VG 1 S - 4 J RHC 315 S - 4 D J
Code Series name Code Destination / Instruction Manual Code Series name Code* Destination / Instruction Manual
FRN FRENIC Series J Japanese RHC PMW converter J Japanese
E English RHD Diode rectifier
Warranty
Code Nominal applied motor capacity E English
C Chinese C Chinese
0.75 0.75kW
1.5 1.5kW Code Input power source Code Nominal applied motor capacity
* This item is available only with the D series.
2.2 2.2kW 2 Three-phase 200V 132 132kW
Code Developed inverter series
4 Three-phase 400V
C C Series
Delivery Period
800 800kW 800 800kW
Code Structure
and Code
D D Series
Code Form S Standard
None Unit type Code Form
Code Developed inverter series None Unit type Code Input power source
S Standard stack
1 1 Series S Standard stack 2 Three-phase 200V
B Stack by phase
B Stack by phase 4 Three-phase 400V
Code Application range
Guidelines for
VG High performance vector control
Caution! The product detail described in this document is intended for selecting a model. When using a product, read the Instruction Manual carefully and use the product properly. Caution! The product detail described in this document is intended for selecting a model. When using a product, read the Instruction Manual carefully and use the product properly.
12 13
Standard specifications
HD specification for heavy overload (Unit Type) MD specification for middle overload (Unit Type)
Standard
Three-phase 200V series Three-phase 400V series
Type FRN VG1S-2J 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 90 Type FRN VG1S-4J 90 110 132 160 200 220 280 315 355 400
Nominal applied motor [kW] 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 90 Nominal applied motor [kW] (*8) 110 132 160 200 220 250 315 355 400 450
Common
Rated capacity [kVA] (*1) 1.9 3.0 4.1 6.8 10 14 18 24 28 34 45 55 68 81 107 131 Rated capacity [kVA] (*1) 160 192 231 287 316 356 445 495 563 640
Rated current [A] 5 8 11 18 27 37 49 63 76 90 119 146 180 215 283 346 Rated current [A] 210 253 304 377 415 468 585 650 740 840
Overload current rating 150% of rated current -1min. (*2), 200% -3s(*3) Overload current rating 150% of rated current -1min. (*2)
Main power 3-phase 200 to 220V/50Hz, Main power 3-phase 380 to 440V/50Hz,
3-phase 200 to 230V, 50Hz/60Hz
Phase, Voltage, Frequency 200 to 230V/60Hz (*4) Phase, Voltage, Frequency 380 to 480V/60Hz (*3)
Functions
Terminal
Power supply voltage

Auxiliary control power supply Auxiliary control power supply
Single-phase 200 to 230V, 50Hz/60Hz Single phase 380 to 480V, 50Hz/60Hz
Phase, Voltage, Frequency Phase, Voltage, Frequency
Auxiliary input for fan power Single phase 200 to 220V, 50Hz Auxiliary input for fan power Single phase 380 to 440V, 50Hz
−
Phase, Voltage, Frequency (*5) 200 to 230V/60Hz (*4) Phase, Voltage, Frequency (*4) 380 to 480V/60Hz (*3)
Voltage/frequency variation
Protective
Voltage: +10 to -15% (Voltage unbalance: 2% or less (*6)), Frequency: +5 to -5% Voltage/frequency variation Voltage: +10 to -15% (Voltage unbalance: 2% or less (*5)), Frequency: +5 to -5%
Functions
Rated current [A] (with DCR) 3.2 6.1 8.9 15.0 21.1 28.8 42.2 57.6 71.0 84.4 114 138 167 203 282 334 Rated current [A] (with DCR) 210 238 286 357 390 443 559 628 705 789
(*7) (without DCR) 5.3 9.5 13.2 22.2 31.5 42.7 60.7 80.1 97.0 112 151 185 225 270 − − (*6) (without DCR) −
Required power supply capacity [kVA] (*8) 1.2 2.2 3.1 5.2 7.4 10 15 20 25 30 40 48 58 71 98 116 Required power supply capacity [kVA] (*7) 140 165 199 248 271 312 388 436 489 547
Braking method /braking torque Braking resistor discharge control: 150% braking torque, Separately installed braking resistor (option), Separately installed braking unit (option for FRN200VG1S-4J or higher) Braking resistor discharge control: 150% braking torque, Braking resistor discharge control: 150% braking torque,
Dimensions
Carrier frequency [kHz] (*9) 2 to 15 2 to 10 Braking method /braking torque Separately installed braking resistor (option) Separately installed braking resistor (option)
External
Approx.weight [kg] Separately installed braking unit (option)
6.2 6.2 6.2 6.2 6.2 6.2 11 11 11 12 25 32 42 43 62 105
Protective structure IP20 closed type IP00 open type (IP20 closed type is available as option) Carrier frequency [kHz] 2
Approx.weight [kg] 62 64 94 98 129 140 245 245 330 330
Three-phase 400V series Protective structure IP00 open type (IP20 closed type is available as option)
Functions of Parts
Names and
Type FRN VG1S-4J 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 90 110 132 160 200 220 280 315 355 400 500 630 Note 1) The specifications above are established when the function code F80 = 3 (MD specification) is applied.
When used with the MD specification with 90kW or higher, DC reactor is necessary ( to be ordered separately from inverter unit based on the rating)
Nominal applied motor [kW] 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 90 110 132 160 200 220 280 315 355 400 500 630 *1) When the rated output voltage is 440V
Rated capacity [kVA] (*1) 6.8 10 14 18 24 29 34 45 57 69 85 114 134 160 192 231 287 316 396 445 495 563 731 891 *2) When the converted inverter output frequency is less than 1Hz, the inverter may trip earlier in some ambient temperature conditions if the motor is overloaded
*3) When the power supply is 380 to 398V at 50 Hz or 380 to 430V at 60Hz, a connector inside the inverter must be reconnected accordingly.
Rated current [A] 9.0 13.5 18.5 24.5 32.0 39.0 45.0 60.0 75.0 91.0 112 150 176 210 253 304 377 415 520 585 650 740 960 1170
The output of the inverter with 380V may drop depending on situations.For the detail, refer to the FRENIC-VG User Manual 10.5.

Overload current rating 150% of rated current -1min. (*2) 200% -3s. (*3) *4) The auxiliary power input is used as an AC fan power input when combining the unit such as high power factor PWM converter with power regenerative function.(Generally not used.)
Main power 3-phase 380 to 440V/50Hz, Max. voltage [V] - Min. voltage [V]
3-phase 380 to 480V, 50Hz/60Hz *5) Voltage unbalance [%] = × 67
Phase, Voltage, Frequency 380 to 480V/60Hz (*4) Three-phase average voltage [V]
Auxiliary control power supply Use an AC reactor if the voltage unbalance exceeds 2%.
Single phase 380 to 480V, 50Hz/60Hz *6) The value is calculated on assumption that the inverter is connected with a power supply capacity of 10 times the inverter capacity and %X is 5%.
Phase, Voltage, Frequency
*7) This shows values when the DC reactor is used.
Auxiliary input for fan power − Single phase 380 to 440V, 50Hz *8) Since heat generation of the motor due to low carrier may be increased depending on the load condition, designate the MD specification when ordering the motor.
Phase, Voltage, Frequency (*5) 380 to 480V/60Hz (*4)
Voltage/frequency variation Voltage: +10 to -15% (Voltage unbalance: 2% or less (*6)), Frequency: +5 to -5%
Rated current [A] (with DCR) 7.5 10.6 14.4 21.1 28.8 35.5 42.2 57.0 68.5 83.2 102 138 164 210 238 286 357 390 500 559 628 705 881 1115
(*7) (without DCR) 13.0 17.3 23.2 33 43.8 52.3 60.6 77.9 94.3 114 140 − − − − − − − − − − − − −
Wiring Diagram
Required power supply capacity [kVA] (*8) 5.2 7.4 10 15 20 25 30 40 48 58 71 96 114 140 165 199 248 271 347 388 436 489 610 773
Braking method /braking torque Braking resistor discharge control: 150% braking torque, Separately installed braking resistor (option), Separately installed braking unit (option for FRN200VG1S-4J or higher)
Carrier frequency [kHz] (*9) 2 to 15 2 to 10 2 to 5
Approx.weight [kg] 6.2 6.2 6.2 11 11 11 11 25 26 31 33 42 62 64 94 98 129 140 245 245 330 330 555 555
Protective structure IP20 closed type IP00 open type (IP20 closed type is available as option)
Options
Note 1) The specification above are established when the function code F80 = 0 (HD specification) is applied.
When used with the HD specification with 75kW or higher, DC reactor is necessary ( to be ordered separately from inverter unit based on the rating)
*1) The rated output voltage is 220V for 200V series and 440V for 400V series.
*2) When the inverter output frequency converter value is 10Hz or less, the inverter may trip early due to overload depending on the conditions such as ambient temperature.
*4) 200V series: Make an individual order for 220 to 230V/50Hz.
Warranty
400V series: The inverters with the power supply of 380 to 398V/50Hz and 380 to 430V/60Hz must be switched using a connector inside the inverter.
The output of the inverter with 380V may drop depending on situations.For the detail, refer to the FRENIC-VG User Manual chapter 10.5.
*5) The auxiliary power input is used as an AC fan power input when combining the unit such as high power factor PWM converter with power regenerative function.(Generally not used.)
Max. voltage [V] - Min. voltage [V]
*6) Voltage unbalance [%] = × 67
Three-phase average voltage [V]
Delivery Period
Use an AC reactor if the voltage unbalance exceeds 2%.
and Code
*7) The value is calculated on assumption that the inverter is connected with a power supply capacity of 500kVA (or 10 times the inverter capacity if the inverter capacity exceeds 50kVA) and %X is 5%.
*8) This shows values when the DC reactor is used. (Optional for 55kW or less model)
*9) The inverter may automatically reduce carrier frequency in accordance with ambient temperature or output current in order to protect itself.
Guidelines for
14 15
HD specification for heavy overload (Unit Type) MD specification for middle overload (Unit Type)
Standard
Type FRN VG1S-2J 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 90 Type FRN VG1S-4J 90 110 132 160 200 220 280 315 355 400
Nominal applied motor [kW] 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 90 Nominal applied motor [kW] (*8) 110 132 160 200 220 250 315 355 400 450
Common
Rated capacity [kVA] (*1) 1.9 3.0 4.1 6.8 10 14 18 24 28 34 45 55 68 81 107 131 Rated capacity [kVA] (*1) 160 192 231 287 316 356 445 495 563 640
Rated current [A] 5 8 11 18 27 37 49 63 76 90 119 146 180 215 283 346 Rated current [A] 210 253 304 377 415 468 585 650 740 840
Overload current rating 150% of rated current -1min. (*2), 200% -3s(*3) Overload current rating 150% of rated current -1min. (*2)
Main power 3-phase 200 to 220V/50Hz, Main power 3-phase 380 to 440V/50Hz,
3-phase 200 to 230V, 50Hz/60Hz
Phase, Voltage, Frequency 200 to 230V/60Hz (*4) Phase, Voltage, Frequency 380 to 480V/60Hz (*3)
Functions
Terminal

Auxiliary control power supply Auxiliary control power supply
Single-phase 200 to 230V, 50Hz/60Hz Single phase 380 to 480V, 50Hz/60Hz
Phase, Voltage, Frequency Phase, Voltage, Frequency
Auxiliary input for fan power Single phase 200 to 220V, 50Hz Auxiliary input for fan power Single phase 380 to 440V, 50Hz
−
Phase, Voltage, Frequency (*5) 200 to 230V/60Hz (*4) Phase, Voltage, Frequency (*4) 380 to 480V/60Hz (*3)
Voltage/frequency variation
Protective
Voltage: +10 to -15% (Voltage unbalance: 2% or less (*6)), Frequency: +5 to -5% Voltage/frequency variation Voltage: +10 to -15% (Voltage unbalance: 2% or less (*5)), Frequency: +5 to -5%
Functions
Rated current [A] (with DCR) 3.2 6.1 8.9 15.0 21.1 28.8 42.2 57.6 71.0 84.4 114 138 167 203 282 334 Rated current [A] (with DCR) 210 238 286 357 390 443 559 628 705 789
(*7) (without DCR) 5.3 9.5 13.2 22.2 31.5 42.7 60.7 80.1 97.0 112 151 185 225 270 − − (*6) (without DCR) −
Required power supply capacity [kVA] (*8) 1.2 2.2 3.1 5.2 7.4 10 15 20 25 30 40 48 58 71 98 116 Required power supply capacity [kVA] (*7) 140 165 199 248 271 312 388 436 489 547
Braking method /braking torque Braking resistor discharge control: 150% braking torque, Separately installed braking resistor (option), Separately installed braking unit (option for FRN200VG1S-4J or higher) Braking resistor discharge control: 150% braking torque, Braking resistor discharge control: 150% braking torque,
Dimensions
Carrier frequency [kHz] (*9) 2 to 15 2 to 10 Braking method /braking torque Separately installed braking resistor (option) Separately installed braking resistor (option)
External
Approx.weight [kg] Separately installed braking unit (option)
6.2 6.2 6.2 6.2 6.2 6.2 11 11 11 12 25 32 42 43 62 105
Protective structure IP20 closed type IP00 open type (IP20 closed type is available as option) Carrier frequency [kHz] 2
Approx.weight [kg] 62 64 94 98 129 140 245 245 330 330
Three-phase 400V series Protective structure IP00 open type (IP20 closed type is available as option)
Functions of Parts
Names and
Type FRN VG1S-4J 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 90 110 132 160 200 220 280 315 355 400 500 630 Note 1) The specifications above are established when the function code F80 = 3 (MD specification) is applied.
When used with the MD specification with 90kW or higher, DC reactor is necessary ( to be ordered separately from inverter unit based on the rating)
Nominal applied motor [kW] 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 90 110 132 160 200 220 280 315 355 400 500 630 *1) When the rated output voltage is 440V
Rated capacity [kVA] (*1) 6.8 10 14 18 24 29 34 45 57 69 85 114 134 160 192 231 287 316 396 445 495 563 731 891 *2) When the converted inverter output frequency is less than 1Hz, the inverter may trip earlier in some ambient temperature conditions if the motor is overloaded
Rated current [A] 9.0 13.5 18.5 24.5 32.0 39.0 45.0 60.0 75.0 91.0 112 150 176 210 253 304 377 415 520 585 650 740 960 1170
The output of the inverter with 380V may drop depending on situations.For the detail, refer to the FRENIC-VG User Manual 10.5.

Overload current rating 150% of rated current -1min. (*2) 200% -3s. (*3) *4) The auxiliary power input is used as an AC fan power input when combining the unit such as high power factor PWM converter with power regenerative function.(Generally not used.)
Main power 3-phase 380 to 440V/50Hz, Max. voltage [V] - Min. voltage [V]
3-phase 380 to 480V, 50Hz/60Hz *5) Voltage unbalance [%] = × 67
Phase, Voltage, Frequency 380 to 480V/60Hz (*4) Three-phase average voltage [V]
Auxiliary control power supply Use an AC reactor if the voltage unbalance exceeds 2%.
Single phase 380 to 480V, 50Hz/60Hz *6) The value is calculated on assumption that the inverter is connected with a power supply capacity of 10 times the inverter capacity and %X is 5%.
*7) This shows values when the DC reactor is used.
Auxiliary input for fan power − Single phase 380 to 440V, 50Hz *8) Since heat generation of the motor due to low carrier may be increased depending on the load condition, designate the MD specification when ordering the motor.
Phase, Voltage, Frequency (*5) 380 to 480V/60Hz (*4)
Voltage/frequency variation Voltage: +10 to -15% (Voltage unbalance: 2% or less (*6)), Frequency: +5 to -5%
Rated current [A] (with DCR) 7.5 10.6 14.4 21.1 28.8 35.5 42.2 57.0 68.5 83.2 102 138 164 210 238 286 357 390 500 559 628 705 881 1115
(*7) (without DCR) 13.0 17.3 23.2 33 43.8 52.3 60.6 77.9 94.3 114 140 − − − − − − − − − − − − −
Wiring Diagram
Required power supply capacity [kVA] (*8) 5.2 7.4 10 15 20 25 30 40 48 58 71 96 114 140 165 199 248 271 347 388 436 489 610 773
Carrier frequency [kHz] (*9) 2 to 15 2 to 10 2 to 5
Approx.weight [kg] 6.2 6.2 6.2 11 11 11 11 25 26 31 33 42 62 64 94 98 129 140 245 245 330 330 555 555
Protective structure IP20 closed type IP00 open type (IP20 closed type is available as option)
Options
Note 1) The specification above are established when the function code F80 = 0 (HD specification) is applied.
When used with the HD specification with 75kW or higher, DC reactor is necessary ( to be ordered separately from inverter unit based on the rating)
*1) The rated output voltage is 220V for 200V series and 440V for 400V series.
*4) 200V series: Make an individual order for 220 to 230V/50Hz.
Warranty
400V series: The inverters with the power supply of 380 to 398V/50Hz and 380 to 430V/60Hz must be switched using a connector inside the inverter.
The output of the inverter with 380V may drop depending on situations.For the detail, refer to the FRENIC-VG User Manual chapter 10.5.
*5) The auxiliary power input is used as an AC fan power input when combining the unit such as high power factor PWM converter with power regenerative function.(Generally not used.)
Max. voltage [V] - Min. voltage [V]
*6) Voltage unbalance [%] = × 67
Delivery Period
and Code
*8) This shows values when the DC reactor is used. (Optional for 55kW or less model)
Guidelines for
14 15
LD specifications for light overload (Unit Type) MD specifications for middle overload (Stack Type)
Standard
Type FRN VG1S-2J 30 37 45 55 75 90 Type FRN V1S-4J 30S 37S 45S 55S 75S 90S 110S 132S 160S 200S 220S 250S 280S 315S 630B(*5) 710B(*5) 800B(*5)
Nominal applied motor [kW] 37 45 55 75 90 110 Nominal applied motor [kW] 30 37 45 55 75 90 110 132 160 200 220 250 280 315 630 710 800
Common
Rated capacity [kVA] (*1) 55 68 81 107 131 158 Rated capacity [kVA] (*1) 45 57 69 85 114 134 160 192 231 287 316 356 396 445 891 1044 1127
Rated current [A] 146 180 215 283 346 415 Rated current [A] 60 75 91 112 150 176 210 253 304 377 415 468 520 585 1170 1370 1480
Overload current rating 120% of rated current -1min. (*2) Overload current rating 150% of rated current -1min. (*2)
Main power 3-phase 200 to 220V/50Hz, Main power Refer to the specifications of PWM converter of DC input type.

Phase, Voltage, Frequency 200 to 230V/60Hz (*3) Auxiliary control power supply
Functions
Terminal
Single phase 380 to 480V, 50/60Hz
Auxiliary control power supply Phase, Voltage, Frequency

Single phase 200 to 230V,50Hz/60Hz
Auxiliary input for fan power Single phase 380 to 440V, 50Hz
Auxiliary input for fan power Single phase 200 to 230V, 50Hz Auxiliary input for fan power
− Phase, Voltage, Frequency 380 to 480V, 60Hz (*3)
Phase, Voltage, Frequency (*4) 200 to 230V, 60Hz (*3)
Protective
Voltage/frequency variation Voltage/frequency variation Voltage:+10 to -15%, Frequency:+5 to -5%
Functions
Voltage: +10 to -15% (Voltage unbalance: 2% or less (*5)), Frequency: +5 to -5%
Rated current [A] (with DCR) 138 167 203 282 334 410 Carrier frequency [kHz] (*4) 2
(*6) (without DCR) 185 225 270 − − − Approx. weight [kg] 28 28 28 35 35 43 43 85 85 85 126 126 126 126 126×3(*6) 126×3(*6) 126×3(*6)
Required power supply capacity [kVA] (*7) 48 58 71 98 116 143 Protective structure IP00 open type
Dimensions
Note 1) The above specifications are for Function Code F80=3 (MD specification).
Carrier frequency [kHz] (*8) 2 to 10 2 to 5
External
*1) When the rated output voltage is 440V
Approx.weight [kg] 25 32 42 43 62 105 *2) When the converted inverter output frequency is less than 1Hz, the inverter may trip earlier in some ambient temperature conditions if the motor is overloaded.
Protective structure IP00 open type (IP20 closed type is available as option)
*4) When the synchronous motor is run at a low carrier frequency, the permanent magnet may be over-heated and demagnetized by harmonic components of the output current.
Be sure to check the permissible carrier frequency of the motor.
Three-phase 400V series *5) One set of the inverter consists of three stacks.
Functions of Parts
*6) This weight may be changed.For details, contact the Sales Department at Fuji.
Names and
Type FRN VG1S-4J 30 37 45 55 75 90 110 132 160 200 220 280 315 355 400 500 630
Nominal applied motor [kW] 37 45 55 75 90 110 132 160 200 220 280 355 400 450 500 630 710
Rated capacity [kVA] (*1)
Rated current [A]
57
75
69
91
85
112
114
150
134
176
160
210
192
253
231
304
287
377
316
415
396
520
495
650
563
740
640
840
731
960
891
1170 1370
1044
LD specifications for light overload (Stack Type)

Overload current rating 120% of rated current -1min. (*2)
Main power 3-phase 380 to 480V, 3-phase 380 to 440V/50Hz,
Three-phase 400V series
Phase, Voltage, Frequency 50Hz/60Hz 380 to 480V/60Hz (*3) Type FRN V1S-4J 30S 37S 45S 55S 75S 90S 110S 132S 160S 200S 220S 250S 280S 315S 630B(*5) 710B(*5) 800B(*5)
Auxiliary control power supply Nominal applied motor [kW] 37 45 55 75 90 110 132 160 200 220 250 280 315 355 710 800 1000
Single phase 380 to 480V, 50Hz/60Hz
Phase, Voltage, Frequency Rated capacity [kVA] (*1) 57 69 85 114 134 160 192 231 287 316 356 396 445 495 1044 1127 1409
Auxiliary input for fan power Single phase 380 to 440V, 50Hz Rated current [A] 75 91 112 150 176 210 253 304 377 415 468 520 585 650 1370 1480 1850
−
Phase, Voltage, Frequency (*4) 380 to 480V, 60Hz (*3) Overload current rating 110% of rated current -1min. (*2)
Voltage/frequency variation Voltage: +10 to -15% (Voltage unbalance: 2% or less (*5)), Frequency: +5 to -5% Main power Refer to the specifications of PWM converter of DC input type.

Rated current [A] (with DCR) 68.5 83.2 102 138 164 210 238 286 357 390 500 628 705 789 881 1115 1256 Auxiliary control power supply
(*6) (without DCR) 94.3 114 140 − − − − − − − − − − − − − − Phase, Voltage, Frequency
Wiring Diagram
Required power supply capacity [kVA] (*7) 48 58 71 96 114 140 165 199 248 271 347 436 489 547 611 773 871
Braking method /braking torque Braking resistor discharge control: 110% braking torque, Separately installed braking resistor (option), Separately installed braking unit (option for FRN200VG1S-4J or higher) Auxiliary input for fan power
Phase, Voltage, Frequency 380 to 480V, 60Hz (*3)
Carrier frequency [kHz] (*8) 2 to 10 2 to 5 2
Approx.weight [kg] 25 26 31 33 42 62 64 94 98 129 140 245 245 330 330 555 555 Voltage/frequency variation Voltage:+10 to -15%, Frequency:+5 to -5%
Protective structure IP00 open type (IP20 closed type is available as option) Carrier frequency [kHz] (*4) 2
Approx. weight [kg] 28 28 28 35 35 43 43 85 85 85 126 126 126 126 126×3(*6) 126×3(*6) 126×3(*6)
Options
Note 1) The above specifications are for Function Code F80=1 (LD specification). Protective structure IP00 open type
When used with the LD specification with 55kW or higher, DC reactor is necessary (to be ordered separately from inverter unit based on the rating)
*1) The rated output voltage is 220V for 200V series and 440V for 400V series. Note 1) The above specifications are for Function Code F80=1 (LD specification).
*2) When the converted inverter output frequency is less than 10Hz, the inverter may trip earlier in some ambient temperature conditions if the motor is overloaded. *1) When the rated output voltage is 440V
*3) 200V series: Make an individual order for 220 to 230V/50Hz. *2) When the converted inverter output frequency is less than 1Hz, the inverter may trip earlier in some ambient temperature conditions if the motor is overloaded.
400V series: The inverters with the power supply of 380 to 398V/50Hz and 380 to 430V/60Hz must be switched using a connector inside the inverter. *3) When the power supply is 380 to 398V at 50 Hz or 380 to 430V at 60Hz, a connector inside the inverter must be reconnected accordingly.
Warranty
The output of the inverter with 380V may drop depending on situations.For the detail, refer to the FRENIC-VG User Manual 10.5. If using another voltage, contact Fuji.
*4) The auxiliary power input is used as an AC fan power input when combining the unit such as high power factor PWM converter with power regenerative function.(Generally not used.) *4) When the synchronous motor is run at a low carrier frequency, the permanent magnet may be over-heated and demagnetized by harmonic components of the output current.
Max. voltage [V] - Min. voltage [V] Be sure to check the permissible carrier frequency of the motor.
*5) Voltage unbalance [%] = × 67 *5) One set of the inverter consists of three stacks.
*6) This weight may be changed. For details, contact the Sales Department at Fuji.
Delivery Period
and Code
*7) This shows values when the DC reactor is used. (Optional for FRN45VG1S-2J and FRN45VG1S-4J or lower model)
Guidelines for
─ 16 ─ ─ 17 ─
LD specifications for light overload (Unit Type) MD specifications for middle overload (Stack Type)
Standard
Type FRN VG1S-2J 30 37 45 55 75 90 Type FRN V1S-4J 30S 37S 45S 55S 75S 90S 110S 132S 160S 200S 220S 250S 280S 315S 630B(*5) 710B(*5) 800B(*5)
Nominal applied motor [kW] 37 45 55 75 90 110 Nominal applied motor [kW] 30 37 45 55 75 90 110 132 160 200 220 250 280 315 630 710 800
Common
Rated capacity [kVA] (*1) 55 68 81 107 131 158 Rated capacity [kVA] (*1) 45 57 69 85 114 134 160 192 231 287 316 356 396 445 891 1044 1127
Rated current [A] 146 180 215 283 346 415 Rated current [A] 60 75 91 112 150 176 210 253 304 377 415 468 520 585 1170 1370 1480
Overload current rating 120% of rated current -1min. (*2) Overload current rating 150% of rated current -1min. (*2)
Main power 3-phase 200 to 220V/50Hz, Main power Refer to the specifications of PWM converter of DC input type.

Phase, Voltage, Frequency 200 to 230V/60Hz (*3) Auxiliary control power supply
Functions
Terminal
Auxiliary control power supply Phase, Voltage, Frequency

Single phase 200 to 230V,50Hz/60Hz
Auxiliary input for fan power Single phase 200 to 230V, 50Hz Auxiliary input for fan power
− Phase, Voltage, Frequency 380 to 480V, 60Hz (*3)
Phase, Voltage, Frequency (*4) 200 to 230V, 60Hz (*3)
Protective
Voltage/frequency variation Voltage/frequency variation Voltage:+10 to -15%, Frequency:+5 to -5%
Functions
Voltage: +10 to -15% (Voltage unbalance: 2% or less (*5)), Frequency: +5 to -5%
Rated current [A] (with DCR) 138 167 203 282 334 410 Carrier frequency [kHz] (*4) 2
(*6) (without DCR) 185 225 270 − − − Approx. weight [kg] 28 28 28 35 35 43 43 85 85 85 126 126 126 126 126×3(*6) 126×3(*6) 126×3(*6)
Required power supply capacity [kVA] (*7) 48 58 71 98 116 143 Protective structure IP00 open type
Dimensions
Note 1) The above specifications are for Function Code F80=3 (MD specification).
Carrier frequency [kHz] (*8) 2 to 10 2 to 5
External
*1) When the rated output voltage is 440V
Approx.weight [kg] 25 32 42 43 62 105 *2) When the converted inverter output frequency is less than 1Hz, the inverter may trip earlier in some ambient temperature conditions if the motor is overloaded.
Protective structure IP00 open type (IP20 closed type is available as option)
*4) When the synchronous motor is run at a low carrier frequency, the permanent magnet may be over-heated and demagnetized by harmonic components of the output current.
Be sure to check the permissible carrier frequency of the motor.
Three-phase 400V series *5) One set of the inverter consists of three stacks.
Functions of Parts
*6) This weight may be changed.For details, contact the Sales Department at Fuji.
Names and
Type FRN VG1S-4J 30 37 45 55 75 90 110 132 160 200 220 280 315 355 400 500 630
Nominal applied motor [kW] 37 45 55 75 90 110 132 160 200 220 280 355 400 450 500 630 710
Rated capacity [kVA] (*1)
Rated current [A]
57
75
69
91
85
112
114
150
134
176
160
210
192
253
231
304
287
377
316
415
396
520
495
650
563
740
640
840
731
960
891
1170 1370
1044
LD specifications for light overload (Stack Type)

Overload current rating 120% of rated current -1min. (*2)
Main power 3-phase 380 to 480V, 3-phase 380 to 440V/50Hz,
Three-phase 400V series
Phase, Voltage, Frequency 50Hz/60Hz 380 to 480V/60Hz (*3) Type FRN V1S-4J 30S 37S 45S 55S 75S 90S 110S 132S 160S 200S 220S 250S 280S 315S 630B(*5) 710B(*5) 800B(*5)
Auxiliary control power supply Nominal applied motor [kW] 37 45 55 75 90 110 132 160 200 220 250 280 315 355 710 800 1000
Single phase 380 to 480V, 50Hz/60Hz
Phase, Voltage, Frequency Rated capacity [kVA] (*1) 57 69 85 114 134 160 192 231 287 316 356 396 445 495 1044 1127 1409
Auxiliary input for fan power Single phase 380 to 440V, 50Hz Rated current [A] 75 91 112 150 176 210 253 304 377 415 468 520 585 650 1370 1480 1850
−
Phase, Voltage, Frequency (*4) 380 to 480V, 60Hz (*3) Overload current rating 110% of rated current -1min. (*2)
Voltage/frequency variation Voltage: +10 to -15% (Voltage unbalance: 2% or less (*5)), Frequency: +5 to -5% Main power Refer to the specifications of PWM converter of DC input type.

Rated current [A] (with DCR) 68.5 83.2 102 138 164 210 238 286 357 390 500 628 705 789 881 1115 1256 Auxiliary control power supply
(*6) (without DCR) 94.3 114 140 − − − − − − − − − − − − − − Phase, Voltage, Frequency
Wiring Diagram
Required power supply capacity [kVA] (*7) 48 58 71 96 114 140 165 199 248 271 347 436 489 547 611 773 871
Braking method /braking torque Braking resistor discharge control: 110% braking torque, Separately installed braking resistor (option), Separately installed braking unit (option for FRN200VG1S-4J or higher) Auxiliary input for fan power
Phase, Voltage, Frequency 380 to 480V, 60Hz (*3)
Carrier frequency [kHz] (*8) 2 to 10 2 to 5 2
Approx.weight [kg] 25 26 31 33 42 62 64 94 98 129 140 245 245 330 330 555 555 Voltage/frequency variation Voltage:+10 to -15%, Frequency:+5 to -5%
Protective structure IP00 open type (IP20 closed type is available as option) Carrier frequency [kHz] (*4) 2
Approx. weight [kg] 28 28 28 35 35 43 43 85 85 85 126 126 126 126 126×3(*6) 126×3(*6) 126×3(*6)
Options
Note 1) The above specifications are for Function Code F80=1 (LD specification). Protective structure IP00 open type
When used with the LD specification with 55kW or higher, DC reactor is necessary (to be ordered separately from inverter unit based on the rating)
*1) The rated output voltage is 220V for 200V series and 440V for 400V series. Note 1) The above specifications are for Function Code F80=1 (LD specification).
*2) When the converted inverter output frequency is less than 10Hz, the inverter may trip earlier in some ambient temperature conditions if the motor is overloaded. *1) When the rated output voltage is 440V
*3) 200V series: Make an individual order for 220 to 230V/50Hz. *2) When the converted inverter output frequency is less than 1Hz, the inverter may trip earlier in some ambient temperature conditions if the motor is overloaded.
400V series: The inverters with the power supply of 380 to 398V/50Hz and 380 to 430V/60Hz must be switched using a connector inside the inverter. *3) When the power supply is 380 to 398V at 50 Hz or 380 to 430V at 60Hz, a connector inside the inverter must be reconnected accordingly.
Warranty
The output of the inverter with 380V may drop depending on situations.For the detail, refer to the FRENIC-VG User Manual 10.5. If using another voltage, contact Fuji.
*4) The auxiliary power input is used as an AC fan power input when combining the unit such as high power factor PWM converter with power regenerative function.(Generally not used.) *4) When the synchronous motor is run at a low carrier frequency, the permanent magnet may be over-heated and demagnetized by harmonic components of the output current.
Max. voltage [V] - Min. voltage [V] Be sure to check the permissible carrier frequency of the motor.
*5) Voltage unbalance [%] = × 67 *5) One set of the inverter consists of three stacks.
*6) This weight may be changed. For details, contact the Sales Department at Fuji.
Delivery Period
and Code
*7) This shows values when the DC reactor is used. (Optional for FRN45VG1S-2J and FRN45VG1S-4J or lower model)
Guidelines for
─ 16 ─ ─ 17 ─
Common items
Common specifications for inverters
Standard
Item Unit Type Stack Type Item Unit Type Stack Type
Vector control with speed sensor Vector control with speed sensor
For induction motor Speed sensorless vector control Speed sensorless vector control 1:1500 (with no. of PG pulses is 1024P/R)
Common
Motor control Synchronous Vector control
Control V/f control V/f control Speed control range When the base speed is 1500 r/min,
method motor control with speed sensor
1 to 1500 r/min to max. speed
For synchronous motor Vector control with speed sensor (including magnetic pole position detection)
Test mode Simulated operation mode

KEYPAD operation: CW or CCW operation by or key, and key
Functions
Terminal
Analog setting: 0.005% of max. speed Running and operation
Speed setting Digital input signal operation: FWD or REV command, coast-to-stop command, reset input, multistep speed selection command, etc.
Digital setting: 0.005% of max. speed
Setting resolution
Torque setting KEYPAD operation : or key
0.01% of rated torque Setting resistor :Potentiometers (variable resistors) (three terminals:1 to 5kΩ)
Torque current setting
Analog input :0 to ±10V, 4 to 20mA
Protective
Functions
Analog setting: ±0.1% of max. speed (25±10°C) Analog setting: ±0.1% of max. speed (25±10°C) UP/DOWN control :Speed increases when UP signal (DI) is ON, and decreases when DOWN signal (DI) is ON.
Speed Speed setting
Induction motor Vector control Control accuracy Digital setting: ±0.005% of max. speed (-10 to 50°C) Digital setting: ±0.005% of max. speed (-10 to 40°C) Multistep speed :Up to 15 different speeds can be selected by combining four external input signals (DI).
control with speed sensor Torque ±3% of rated torque (with dedicated motor) Digital signal :Can be set by "16-bit parallel signals" available by the option card.
Serial link operation :RS-485 (standard). Setting through different communication options is possible.
Control response Speed 600Hz *1 100Hz
Dimensions
Jogging operation : or key, or FWD or REV terminals in jogging mode
External
Maximum speed 800Hz by inverter output frequency conversion *1 150Hz by inverter output frequency conversion
Induction motor :+15V, +12V complimentary output PG (insulated)
1:1500
/ max. receivable frequency: 100kHz
Speed control range When the base speed is 1500 r/min, 1 to 1500 r/min to max. speed (with no. of PG pulses is 1024P/R)
:+5V line driver output PG (insulated): with option card OPC-VG1-PG installed
Functions of Parts
1:6 (constant torque range: constant output range)
Names and
Speed detection
Analog setting: ±0.005% of max. speed Synchronous motor :+5V line driver output PG (insulated): with option card OPC-VG1-PMPG installed
Speed setting
Digital setting: ±0.005% of max. speed / max. receivable frequency: 100kHz
Setting resolution :ABS encoder with 17-bit high resolution (TS5667N253: made by Tamagawa Seiki)
Torque setting
0.01% of rated torque with option card OPC-VG1-SPGT installed

Analog setting: ±0.1% of max. speed (25±10°C) Analog setting: ±0.1% of max. speed (25±10°C) The PI calculation w/ feed forward term is performed.
Speed
Digital setting: ±0.1% of max. speed (-10 to 50°C) Digital setting: ±0.1% of max. speed (-10 to 40°C) Speed control Control parameter switchover
Speed sensorless Control accuracy
The control parameter can be switched by external signals
vector control Torque ±5% of rated torque
Control
Transistor output: Inverter running, Speed equivalence, Speed detection, inverter overload early warning, torque limiting, etc.
Control response Speed 40Hz *1 20Hz Running status signal
Analog output: Motor speed, Output voltage, Torque, Load factor, etc.
Induction motor 0.01 to 3600s (4 independent settings for acceleration and deceleration selectable with external signals)
control 1:250 Acceleration/Deceleration time
(S-curve acceleration/deceleration in addition to linear acceleration/deceleration)
Wiring Diagram
Speed control range When the base speed is 1500 r/min, 6 to 1500 r/min to max. speed
1:4 (constant torque range: constant output range) Gain for speed setting Sets the proportional relationship between analog speed setting and motor speed in the range of 0 to 200%.
Jump speed Jump speed (3 points) and jump width (1 point) can be set.
Analog setting: 0.005% of max. speed
Setting resolution
Digital setting: 0.005% of max. speed Rotating motor pick up (Flying start) A rotating motor can be smoothly picked up by the inverter without stopping.
Analog setting: ±0.2% of max. output frequency (25±10°C) Analog setting: ±0.2% of max. output frequency (25±10°C) Auto-restart after momentary power failure Automatic restart is available without stopping the motor after a momentary power failure.
Output frequency control accuracy
Options
V/f control Digital setting: ±0.01% of max. output frequency (-10 to 50°C) Digital setting: ±0.01% of max. output frequency (-10 to 40°C)
Slip compensation control Compensates for the decrease of speed due to load and realizes stable operation (by V/f control w/ induction motor).
Maximum frequency 500Hz 150Hz Droop control The motor speed droops in proportion to output torque (disabled with V/f control).
0.2 to 500Hz 0.2 to 150Hz Limits the torque to predetermined values (selectable from "common to 4 quadrants", "independent driving and braking", etc.)
Control range Torque limiting
1:4 (constant torque range: constant output range) 1:4 (constant torque range: constant output range) Analog and external signal (2 steps) settings are available.
Warranty
Analog setting: 0.005% of max. speed Analog setting: 0 to ±10V /0 to ±150% (up to 300% by gain adjustment)
Speed setting Torque control
Setting resolution Digital setting: 0.005% of max. speed Digital setting: A "16-bit parallel signal" setting is available using an optional card.
Torque setting 0.01% of rated torque PID control Analog input by PID control is possible.
Delivery Period
and Code
Synchronous motor Vector control Analog setting: ±0.1% of max. speed (25±10°C) Analog setting: ±0.1% of max. speed (25±10°C) Cooling fan ON/OFF control Cooling fan is stopped during motor stoppage and low temperature to elongate the cooling fan life and reduce cooling fan noise.
Speed
control with speed sensor Control accuracy Digital setting: ±0.005% of max. speed (-10 to 50°C) Digital setting: ±0.005% of max. speed (-10 to 40°C)
Toggle monitor control Monitors that the communications between the host device (PLC) and the inverter are working properly.
Torque ±3% of rated torque (with dedicated motor)
Internal setting (3 steps) and analog setting (hold function) are enabled by combining the fixed values
Torque bias
Response control Speed 600Hz *1 100Hz (1 step, polarity switching by motor rotation direction function) and external signal (DI signal).
Guidelines for
*1: Maximum value. This value may not be reached depending on the carrier frequency settings.
18 19
Common items
Common specifications for inverters
Standard
Vector control with speed sensor Vector control with speed sensor
For induction motor Speed sensorless vector control Speed sensorless vector control 1:1500 (with no. of PG pulses is 1024P/R)
Common
Motor control Synchronous Vector control
Control V/f control V/f control Speed control range When the base speed is 1500 r/min,
method motor control with speed sensor
1 to 1500 r/min to max. speed
For synchronous motor Vector control with speed sensor (including magnetic pole position detection)
Test mode Simulated operation mode

KEYPAD operation: CW or CCW operation by or key, and key
Functions
Terminal
Analog setting: 0.005% of max. speed Running and operation
Speed setting Digital input signal operation: FWD or REV command, coast-to-stop command, reset input, multistep speed selection command, etc.
Digital setting: 0.005% of max. speed
Setting resolution
Torque setting KEYPAD operation : or key
0.01% of rated torque Setting resistor :Potentiometers (variable resistors) (three terminals:1 to 5kΩ)
Analog input :0 to ±10V, 4 to 20mA
Protective
Functions
Analog setting: ±0.1% of max. speed (25±10°C) Analog setting: ±0.1% of max. speed (25±10°C) UP/DOWN control :Speed increases when UP signal (DI) is ON, and decreases when DOWN signal (DI) is ON.
Speed Speed setting
Induction motor Vector control Control accuracy Digital setting: ±0.005% of max. speed (-10 to 50°C) Digital setting: ±0.005% of max. speed (-10 to 40°C) Multistep speed :Up to 15 different speeds can be selected by combining four external input signals (DI).
control with speed sensor Torque ±3% of rated torque (with dedicated motor) Digital signal :Can be set by "16-bit parallel signals" available by the option card.
Serial link operation :RS-485 (standard). Setting through different communication options is possible.
Control response Speed 600Hz *1 100Hz
Dimensions
Jogging operation : or key, or FWD or REV terminals in jogging mode
External
Induction motor :+15V, +12V complimentary output PG (insulated)
1:1500
Speed control range When the base speed is 1500 r/min, 1 to 1500 r/min to max. speed (with no. of PG pulses is 1024P/R)
:+5V line driver output PG (insulated): with option card OPC-VG1-PG installed
Functions of Parts
1:6 (constant torque range: constant output range)
Names and
Speed detection
Analog setting: ±0.005% of max. speed Synchronous motor :+5V line driver output PG (insulated): with option card OPC-VG1-PMPG installed
Speed setting
Digital setting: ±0.005% of max. speed / max. receivable frequency: 100kHz
Setting resolution :ABS encoder with 17-bit high resolution (TS5667N253: made by Tamagawa Seiki)
Torque setting
0.01% of rated torque with option card OPC-VG1-SPGT installed

Analog setting: ±0.1% of max. speed (25±10°C) Analog setting: ±0.1% of max. speed (25±10°C) The PI calculation w/ feed forward term is performed.
Speed
Digital setting: ±0.1% of max. speed (-10 to 50°C) Digital setting: ±0.1% of max. speed (-10 to 40°C) Speed control Control parameter switchover
Speed sensorless Control accuracy
The control parameter can be switched by external signals
vector control Torque ±5% of rated torque
Control
Transistor output: Inverter running, Speed equivalence, Speed detection, inverter overload early warning, torque limiting, etc.
Control response Speed 40Hz *1 20Hz Running status signal
Analog output: Motor speed, Output voltage, Torque, Load factor, etc.
Induction motor 0.01 to 3600s (4 independent settings for acceleration and deceleration selectable with external signals)
control 1:250 Acceleration/Deceleration time
(S-curve acceleration/deceleration in addition to linear acceleration/deceleration)
Wiring Diagram
Speed control range When the base speed is 1500 r/min, 6 to 1500 r/min to max. speed
1:4 (constant torque range: constant output range) Gain for speed setting Sets the proportional relationship between analog speed setting and motor speed in the range of 0 to 200%.
Jump speed Jump speed (3 points) and jump width (1 point) can be set.
Analog setting: 0.005% of max. speed
Setting resolution
Digital setting: 0.005% of max. speed Rotating motor pick up (Flying start) A rotating motor can be smoothly picked up by the inverter without stopping.
Analog setting: ±0.2% of max. output frequency (25±10°C) Analog setting: ±0.2% of max. output frequency (25±10°C) Auto-restart after momentary power failure Automatic restart is available without stopping the motor after a momentary power failure.
Output frequency control accuracy
Options
V/f control Digital setting: ±0.01% of max. output frequency (-10 to 50°C) Digital setting: ±0.01% of max. output frequency (-10 to 40°C)
Slip compensation control Compensates for the decrease of speed due to load and realizes stable operation (by V/f control w/ induction motor).
Maximum frequency 500Hz 150Hz Droop control The motor speed droops in proportion to output torque (disabled with V/f control).
0.2 to 500Hz 0.2 to 150Hz Limits the torque to predetermined values (selectable from "common to 4 quadrants", "independent driving and braking", etc.)
Control range Torque limiting
1:4 (constant torque range: constant output range) 1:4 (constant torque range: constant output range) Analog and external signal (2 steps) settings are available.
Warranty
Analog setting: 0.005% of max. speed Analog setting: 0 to ±10V /0 to ±150% (up to 300% by gain adjustment)
Speed setting Torque control
Setting resolution Digital setting: 0.005% of max. speed Digital setting: A "16-bit parallel signal" setting is available using an optional card.
Torque setting 0.01% of rated torque PID control Analog input by PID control is possible.
Delivery Period
and Code
Synchronous motor Vector control Analog setting: ±0.1% of max. speed (25±10°C) Analog setting: ±0.1% of max. speed (25±10°C) Cooling fan ON/OFF control Cooling fan is stopped during motor stoppage and low temperature to elongate the cooling fan life and reduce cooling fan noise.
Speed
control with speed sensor Control accuracy Digital setting: ±0.005% of max. speed (-10 to 50°C) Digital setting: ±0.005% of max. speed (-10 to 40°C)
Toggle monitor control Monitors that the communications between the host device (PLC) and the inverter are working properly.
Torque ±3% of rated torque (with dedicated motor)
Internal setting (3 steps) and analog setting (hold function) are enabled by combining the fixed values
Torque bias
Response control Speed 600Hz *1 100Hz (1 step, polarity switching by motor rotation direction function) and external signal (DI signal).
Guidelines for
*1: Maximum value. This value may not be reached depending on the carrier frequency settings.
18 19
Common items
Standard
Motor selection Motor can be selected from three types by using (F79) or by combining the external signals (DI signals). Loads sampling data retained in the inverter to display with a graph.
Historical trace (*1)
Sampling time: 50μs to 1s
Common
NTC thermistor (Fuji Electric product or equivalent item)
Temperature detection Loads data from the inverter on a real-time basis to display with a graph.
PTC thermistor (Trip level set by parameter) (for motor overheat protection) Real-time trace (*1)
Sampling time: 1ms to 1s
PG detection circuit self diagnosis Self-diagnosis for detection circuit of the pulse encoder input signal (PA, PB)
Loads sampling data retained in the inverter at an alarm to display with a graph.
Display and Loader
Running efficiency of the unit can be improved by calculating the max. elevation speed achieved Sampling time: 50μs to 1s (Note that sampling is enabled at 400μs or more except current.)
Load adaptive control function Trace back
Functions
setting Sampling data are stored into the memory using the battery power. Data stored period: 5 years or more (at ambient temperature 25°C)
Terminal
by the weight for a vertical transfer unit or other similar units.
Battery: built-in as standard for 30kW or higher capacity models, available as option for 22kW or lower capacity models.
Option: Use of OPC-VG1-TBSI
Multiple winding motor drive Maximum number of motor windings: 6 Operation monitor (*1) I/O monitor, system monitor, alarm history monitor
Control specification: Only vector control with a speed sensor is available. Function code setting Function code setting states can be checked. Also edit, transfer, comparison, initialization are available.
Protective
Functions
Option: Use of OPC-VG1-TBSI Charge lamp Lit when the power is being supplied to the inverter body. Lit even with control power.
Direct parallel connection system Maximum number of parallel modules: 3
Main circuit capacitor life Auto life judgment function installed
There are restrictions on the conditions of use, such as output wiring length. For details, refer to the User Manual.
Control Maintenance • Displays and records accumulated time for control PCB capacitor life and cooling fan operation time
UP/DOWN control Speed setting is possible by combining the UP command, DOWN command, and zero clear command using the external signal (DI signal).
Common functions • Displays and records inverter operation time.
Dimensions
Stopping function 3 types of stopping functions: STOP 1, 2 and 3. • Displays and records the maximum output current and the maximum internal temperature for the past one hour.
External
Outputs the input pulse such as a motor PG signal by fixed or free frequency dividing. RS-485 This is a input terminal to connect computers and programmable controllers via RS-485 communications.
PG pulse output
Open collector and complimentary (same voltage as PGP terminal) can be switched by setting the unit internal switch. Communications USB connector (Mini B type) for connection with a computer.The following operations are enabled using the inverter
USB
support loader: function code edit, transfer verification, inverter test run, and monitoring various states.
Observer Suppresses load disturbances and vibrations.
Functions of Parts
Set the VG7 function codes to activate each operation of the code (excluding the function codes for the VG7 third motor).
Names and
Off-line tuning Rotary type and non-rotary type are available for tuning the motor constants. Function code data
Values read from the VG7 can be written to the FRENIC-VG without changing them by using the PC loader (except for some special items).
Compatibility with VG7
On-line tuning Used for tuning continuosly motor constants due to the motor temperature change.
earlier models Communications T-Link, SX bus, and CC-Link are fully compatible. The host PLC software can be used without any change (except for some special items).
Standard function: position control by servo lock and built-in transmitting circuit.
Installation adaptor An adapter to fit the installation dimensions of earlier models is available as option.
Position control Options: OPC-VG1-PG (PR) : for line driver type pulse command input

OPC-VG1-PGo (PR) : for open collector type pulse command input Safe Torque Off (STO)
Safety function Standard function Stopping function • Stops the inverter output transistor by hardware -and therefore stops the output torque of the motor- immediately
Options: OPC-VG1-PG (PR) : for line driver type pulse command input by turning OFF digital input signals (EN1 terminal or EN2 terminal), which are externally controlled.
Pulse train synchronous operation
OPC-VG1-PGo (PR) : for open collector type pulse command input • US and Canada Safety Standard
Display 7-segment LED, LCD with backlight UL, cUL (UL508C, C22.2 No.14) (Pending certification)
• Machinery Directive
Language display Japanese, English, Chinese, Korean (French, Spanish, German, and Italian *1) IEC/EN ISO13849-1: PL-d (Pending certification)
• Detected speed value • Speed reference value • Output frequency • Torque current reference value IEC/EN60204-1: stop category 0 (Pending certification)
• Torque reference value • Torque calculation value • Power consumption (motor output) • Output current IEC/EN61800-5-2: SIL2 (Pending certification)
• Output voltage • DC link circuit voltage • Magnetic-flux reference value • Magnetic-flux calculation value Product standard Conformance to standard IEC/EN62061: SIL2 (Pending certification)
Wiring Diagram
• Load shaft speed • PID reference value • PID feedback value • PID output value • Low Voltage Directive
Running/stopping
• Ai adjusted value (12) • Ai adjusted value (Ai1) • Ai adjusted value (Ai2) • Optional monitor 1 to 6 EN61800-5-1: Over voltage category 3 (Pending certification)
• Presence of digital input/output signal • Motor temperature • Heat sink temperature • EMC Directive
• Load factor • Input power • Integral power consumption • Operation time
IEC/EN 61800-3(Certification being approved),IEC/EN 61326-3-1(Pending certification)
• Motor accumulated operation time/no. of starts (for each motor), etc.
(Emission) EMC filter (Option) : Unit type (220kW or lower) : Category 2
Setting mode Names and data are displayed. Unit type (280kW or higher) : Category 3
Stack type : Category 3
Options
Displays the following alarm codes;
(Immunity) 2nd Env.
• dbH (Braking resistor overheat)(*) • dCF (DC fuse blown) • EF (Ground fault)
• Er1 (Memory error) • Er2 (KEYPAD panel communication error) • Er3 (CPU error) Usage environment Indoor use only. Free from corrosive and flammable gases, dusts, and oil mist (pollution degree 2 - IEC60664-1). No direct sunlight.
Display and • Er4 (Network error) • Er5 (RS-485 error) • Er6 (Operation procedure error) • Er7 (Output wiring error)
Keypad • Er8 (A/D converter error) • Er9 (Speed disagreement) • Erb (Inter-inverter communication error) -10 to +50°C (-10 to +40°C: In case of 22 kW or lower
setting Ambient temperature -10 to +40°C
• Lin (Input phase loss)(*) • LU (Undervoltage) • nrb (NTC thermistor disconnection) • OC (Overcurrent) installed side-by-side without clearance)
Alarm mode
Warranty
• OH1 (Overheating at heat sink) • OH2 (External alarm input) • OH3 (Inverter internal overheat) • OH4 (Motor overheat)
• OL1 (Motor 1 overload) • OL2 (Motor 2 overload) • OL3 (Motor 3 overload) • P9 (PG error) Ambient humidity 5 to 95% RH (No dew condensation allowed)
• OLU (Inverter unit overload) • OS (Overspeed) • OU (Overvoltage) • ErH(Hardware error)
3000m or less
• PbF (Charging circuit error) (*) • dO (Excessive position deviation) • dbA (Braking transistor abnormal) (*)
• EC(Encoder communications error) • Err (Simulated fault) • OPL (Output phase loss detection) • dFA (DC fan lock) Altitude However, the output may be reduced at the altitude of 1001 to 3000m For use at the altitude of 2001 to 3000m,
• Et1(Encoder error) • LOC (Start stall) • ArF (Toggle error) • ArE (E-SX error) the insulation class of the control circuit is changed from "Enhanced insulation" to "Basic insulation".
Delivery Period
Installation
and Code
environment • 200V 55kW or less, 400V 75kW or less 0.3mm: 2 to 9Hz
[L-AL] is displayed.
Minor fault 3mm: 2 to 9Hz or less, 9.8m/s2: 9 to 20Hz or less, 1m/s2 : 9 to 200Hz
Stores and displays the detailed cause that triggers the minor fault.
2m/s2: 20 to 55Hz or less, 1m/s2: 55 to 200Hz or less
Vibration
The latest and last ten pieces of alarm codes and the latest and the last three pieces of alarm detailed data are stored. • 200V 75kW or more, 400V 90kW or more
Stores and displays alarm date and time by the calendar and time display function [accuracy: ±27 sec/month (Ta=25°C)]. 3mm: 2 to 9Hz or less, 2m/s2: 9 to 55Hz or less,
Alarm during running 1m/s2: 55 to 200Hz or less
Data stored period: 5 years or more (at ambient temperature 25°C)
Guidelines for
Battery: built-in as standard for 30kW or higher capacity models, available as option for 22kW or lower capacity models. Storage temperature -25 to 70°C (-10 to +30°C for long-term storage)
*1: This will be available soon. Storage humidity 5 to 95% RH (No dew condensation allowed)
*) Not available for the stack type
*1) This function is available by the licensed FRENIC VG Loader (WPS-VG1-PCL).
20 21
Common items
Standard
Motor selection Motor can be selected from three types by using (F79) or by combining the external signals (DI signals). Loads sampling data retained in the inverter to display with a graph.
Historical trace (*1)
Sampling time: 50μs to 1s
Common
NTC thermistor (Fuji Electric product or equivalent item)
Temperature detection Loads data from the inverter on a real-time basis to display with a graph.
PTC thermistor (Trip level set by parameter) (for motor overheat protection) Real-time trace (*1)
Sampling time: 1ms to 1s
PG detection circuit self diagnosis Self-diagnosis for detection circuit of the pulse encoder input signal (PA, PB)
Loads sampling data retained in the inverter at an alarm to display with a graph.
Display and Loader
Running efficiency of the unit can be improved by calculating the max. elevation speed achieved Sampling time: 50μs to 1s (Note that sampling is enabled at 400μs or more except current.)
Load adaptive control function Trace back
Functions
setting Sampling data are stored into the memory using the battery power. Data stored period: 5 years or more (at ambient temperature 25°C)
Terminal
by the weight for a vertical transfer unit or other similar units.
Battery: built-in as standard for 30kW or higher capacity models, available as option for 22kW or lower capacity models.
Option: Use of OPC-VG1-TBSI
Multiple winding motor drive Maximum number of motor windings: 6 Operation monitor (*1) I/O monitor, system monitor, alarm history monitor
Control specification: Only vector control with a speed sensor is available. Function code setting Function code setting states can be checked. Also edit, transfer, comparison, initialization are available.
Protective
Functions
Option: Use of OPC-VG1-TBSI Charge lamp Lit when the power is being supplied to the inverter body. Lit even with control power.
Direct parallel connection system Maximum number of parallel modules: 3
Main circuit capacitor life Auto life judgment function installed
There are restrictions on the conditions of use, such as output wiring length. For details, refer to the User Manual.
Control Maintenance • Displays and records accumulated time for control PCB capacitor life and cooling fan operation time
UP/DOWN control Speed setting is possible by combining the UP command, DOWN command, and zero clear command using the external signal (DI signal).
Common functions • Displays and records inverter operation time.
Dimensions
Stopping function 3 types of stopping functions: STOP 1, 2 and 3. • Displays and records the maximum output current and the maximum internal temperature for the past one hour.
External
Outputs the input pulse such as a motor PG signal by fixed or free frequency dividing. RS-485 This is a input terminal to connect computers and programmable controllers via RS-485 communications.
PG pulse output
Open collector and complimentary (same voltage as PGP terminal) can be switched by setting the unit internal switch. Communications USB connector (Mini B type) for connection with a computer.The following operations are enabled using the inverter
USB
support loader: function code edit, transfer verification, inverter test run, and monitoring various states.
Observer Suppresses load disturbances and vibrations.
Functions of Parts
Set the VG7 function codes to activate each operation of the code (excluding the function codes for the VG7 third motor).
Names and
Off-line tuning Rotary type and non-rotary type are available for tuning the motor constants. Function code data
Values read from the VG7 can be written to the FRENIC-VG without changing them by using the PC loader (except for some special items).
Compatibility with VG7
On-line tuning Used for tuning continuosly motor constants due to the motor temperature change.
earlier models Communications T-Link, SX bus, and CC-Link are fully compatible. The host PLC software can be used without any change (except for some special items).
Standard function: position control by servo lock and built-in transmitting circuit.
Installation adaptor An adapter to fit the installation dimensions of earlier models is available as option.
Position control Options: OPC-VG1-PG (PR) : for line driver type pulse command input

OPC-VG1-PGo (PR) : for open collector type pulse command input Safe Torque Off (STO)
Safety function Standard function Stopping function • Stops the inverter output transistor by hardware -and therefore stops the output torque of the motor- immediately
Options: OPC-VG1-PG (PR) : for line driver type pulse command input by turning OFF digital input signals (EN1 terminal or EN2 terminal), which are externally controlled.
Pulse train synchronous operation
OPC-VG1-PGo (PR) : for open collector type pulse command input • US and Canada Safety Standard
Display 7-segment LED, LCD with backlight UL, cUL (UL508C, C22.2 No.14) (Pending certification)
• Machinery Directive
Language display Japanese, English, Chinese, Korean (French, Spanish, German, and Italian *1) IEC/EN ISO13849-1: PL-d (Pending certification)
• Detected speed value • Speed reference value • Output frequency • Torque current reference value IEC/EN60204-1: stop category 0 (Pending certification)
• Torque reference value • Torque calculation value • Power consumption (motor output) • Output current IEC/EN61800-5-2: SIL2 (Pending certification)
• Output voltage • DC link circuit voltage • Magnetic-flux reference value • Magnetic-flux calculation value Product standard Conformance to standard IEC/EN62061: SIL2 (Pending certification)
Wiring Diagram
• Load shaft speed • PID reference value • PID feedback value • PID output value • Low Voltage Directive
Running/stopping
• Ai adjusted value (12) • Ai adjusted value (Ai1) • Ai adjusted value (Ai2) • Optional monitor 1 to 6 EN61800-5-1: Over voltage category 3 (Pending certification)
• Presence of digital input/output signal • Motor temperature • Heat sink temperature • EMC Directive
• Load factor • Input power • Integral power consumption • Operation time
IEC/EN 61800-3(Certification being approved),IEC/EN 61326-3-1(Pending certification)
• Motor accumulated operation time/no. of starts (for each motor), etc.
(Emission) EMC filter (Option) : Unit type (220kW or lower) : Category 2
Setting mode Names and data are displayed. Unit type (280kW or higher) : Category 3
Stack type : Category 3
Options
Displays the following alarm codes;
(Immunity) 2nd Env.
• dbH (Braking resistor overheat)(*) • dCF (DC fuse blown) • EF (Ground fault)
• Er1 (Memory error) • Er2 (KEYPAD panel communication error) • Er3 (CPU error) Usage environment Indoor use only. Free from corrosive and flammable gases, dusts, and oil mist (pollution degree 2 - IEC60664-1). No direct sunlight.
Display and • Er4 (Network error) • Er5 (RS-485 error) • Er6 (Operation procedure error) • Er7 (Output wiring error)
Keypad • Er8 (A/D converter error) • Er9 (Speed disagreement) • Erb (Inter-inverter communication error) -10 to +50°C (-10 to +40°C: In case of 22 kW or lower
setting Ambient temperature -10 to +40°C
• Lin (Input phase loss)(*) • LU (Undervoltage) • nrb (NTC thermistor disconnection) • OC (Overcurrent) installed side-by-side without clearance)
Alarm mode
Warranty
• OH1 (Overheating at heat sink) • OH2 (External alarm input) • OH3 (Inverter internal overheat) • OH4 (Motor overheat)
• OL1 (Motor 1 overload) • OL2 (Motor 2 overload) • OL3 (Motor 3 overload) • P9 (PG error) Ambient humidity 5 to 95% RH (No dew condensation allowed)
• OLU (Inverter unit overload) • OS (Overspeed) • OU (Overvoltage) • ErH(Hardware error)
3000m or less
• PbF (Charging circuit error) (*) • dO (Excessive position deviation) • dbA (Braking transistor abnormal) (*)
• EC(Encoder communications error) • Err (Simulated fault) • OPL (Output phase loss detection) • dFA (DC fan lock) Altitude However, the output may be reduced at the altitude of 1001 to 3000m For use at the altitude of 2001 to 3000m,
• Et1(Encoder error) • LOC (Start stall) • ArF (Toggle error) • ArE (E-SX error) the insulation class of the control circuit is changed from "Enhanced insulation" to "Basic insulation".
Delivery Period
Installation
and Code
environment • 200V 55kW or less, 400V 75kW or less 0.3mm: 2 to 9Hz
[L-AL] is displayed.
Minor fault 3mm: 2 to 9Hz or less, 9.8m/s2: 9 to 20Hz or less, 1m/s2 : 9 to 200Hz
Stores and displays the detailed cause that triggers the minor fault.
2m/s2: 20 to 55Hz or less, 1m/s2: 55 to 200Hz or less
Vibration
The latest and last ten pieces of alarm codes and the latest and the last three pieces of alarm detailed data are stored. • 200V 75kW or more, 400V 90kW or more
Stores and displays alarm date and time by the calendar and time display function [accuracy: ±27 sec/month (Ta=25°C)]. 3mm: 2 to 9Hz or less, 2m/s2: 9 to 55Hz or less,
Alarm during running 1m/s2: 55 to 200Hz or less
Data stored period: 5 years or more (at ambient temperature 25°C)
Guidelines for
Battery: built-in as standard for 30kW or higher capacity models, available as option for 22kW or lower capacity models. Storage temperature -25 to 70°C (-10 to +30°C for long-term storage)
*1: This will be available soon. Storage humidity 5 to 95% RH (No dew condensation allowed)
*) Not available for the stack type
*1) This function is available by the licensed FRENIC VG Loader (WPS-VG1-PCL).
20 21
Terminal Functions
Main circuit and analog input terminal
Standard
Category Symbol Terminal name Unit Type Stack Type Item Unit Type Stack Type
L1/R,L2/S,L3/T Power input Connects a 3-phase power supply. Not available in the stack type PLC PLC signal power supply Connects to PLC output signal power supply. It can also be used as a power supply for loads connected to the transistor outputs.
Connects a 3-phase motor.As for the number of stacks CM Digital input common Common terminal to digital input signals.
U,V,W Inverter output Connects a 3-phase motor.
Common
per phase, 1 terminal is allotted per phase (stack).
Digital input EN１,EN２
Connects a DC REACTOR. Safety function When the circuit is open between EN1-PS or EN2-PS terminals, the switching elements of
The "P1" terminal for connecting a DC reactor (Safety
P (+),P1 For DC REACTOR connection A DC REACTOR is optional for 55kW or lower, input terminal the inverter main circuit is turned off and the output is shut off (Certification pending).
is not available with the stack type. function) PS
and must be always installed for 75kW or higher.
Connects a braking resistor via the braking unit.
Functions
Terminal
P (+),N (-) For BRAKING UNIT connection/For DC bus Used as a DC bus.
Used for a DC bus connection system.
Main circuit P (+),DB For EXTERNAL BRAKING RESISTOR connection Connects an external braking resistor (optional).
The "DB" terminal for connecting an external
braking resistor is not available with the stack type.
Analog output and transistor output terminal
G For inverter Ground terminal for inverter chassis. Item Unit type Stack type
Protective
Functions
R0,T0 Auxiliary control power supply Connects the same AC power supply as that of the main circuit to back up the control circuit power supply.
Provides the monitor signal of 0 to ±10V DC for signals from the following:
Used as a power input for the AC cooling fan inside the inverter to combine AO1 Analog output 1
0: Detected speed (Speedometer, unipolar) [N-FB1+] 1: Detected Speed (Speedometer, bipolar)[F-FB1±]
with the high factor PWM converter with power regenerative function Used as a power input to the AC cooling fan in the inverter. 2: Speed setting 2 (Before acceleration/deceleration calculation) [N-REF2] 3: Speed setting 4 (ASR input) [N-REF4] 4: Detected speed [N-FB2±]
R1,T1 Auxiliary input for fan power
(on the models of 200V series 37kW or more, 400V series 75kW or more). Be sure to supply power to the fan.
5: Detected line speed [LINE-N±] 6: Torque current reference (Torque ammeter, bipolar) [IT-REF±]
Generally this is not necessary as long as the inverter is used individually. AO2 Analog output 2
Dimensions
Analog output 7: Torque current reference (Torque ammeter, unipolar) [IT-REF+] 8: Torque reference (Torque meter, bipolar) [T-REF±]
External
DCF1 Connects a microswitch to detect blow-out of the DC fuse and
DC fuse blow-out detection input Not available in the unit type 9: Torque reference (Torque meter, unipolar) [T-REF+] 10: Motor current rms value [V-AC] 11: Motor voltage rms value [V-AC]
DCF2 corresponds to the "b" contact output. DC24V 12 mA Typ
12: Input power (motor output) [PWR] 13: DC link circuit voltage [V-DC] 14: +10V output test [P10] 15: -10V output test [N10]30: Universal AO [U-AO]
AO3 Analog output 3
13 Potentiometer power supply Used for power supply for a speed setting POT (variable resistor: 1 to 5kΩ). DC10V 10mA Max 31-37: Custom AO1 to 7 [C-AO1 to 7] 38: Input power [PWR-IN] 39: Magnetic pole position signal [SMP]40: PID output value [PID-OUT]
Speed setting 12 Voltage input for speed setting Used for analog reference voltage input. • Reversible operation can be selected by ±signals: 0 to +10V DC /0 to max. speed.
Functions of Parts
M Analog output common Common terminal to input signals.
Names and
11 Analog input common Common terminal to input signals.
Outputs the selected signals from the following items:
The following functions can be selected and set according to the external analog input voltage.
0: Input signal off [OFF] 1: Auxiliary speed setting 1 [AUX-N1] 2: Auxiliary speed setting 2 [AUX-N2] 3: Torque limiter (level 1) [TL-REF1] Y1 Transistor output 1 0: Inverter running [RUN] 1: Speed existence [N-EX] 2: Speed agreement [N-AG1] 3: Speed equivalence [N-AR]
4: Torque limiter (level 2) [TL-REF2] 5: Torque bias reference [TB-REF] 6: Torque reference [T-REF] 7: Torque current reference [IT-REF] 4, 5, 6: Detected speed 1, 2, 3 [4: N-DT1, 5: N-DT2, 6: N-DT3] 7: Stopping on undervoltage [LU] 8: Detected torque polarity (braking/driving) [B/D]

Ai1 Analog input 1 8: Creep speed 1 in UP/DOWN setting [CRP-N1] 9: Creep speed 2 in UP/DOWN setting [CRP-N2] 10: Magnetic-flux reference [MF-REF] 9: Torque limiting [TL] 10, 11: Detected torque [10: T-DT1, 11: T-DT2] 12: KEYPAD operation mode [KP] 13: Inverter stopping [STOP]

Analog input 11: Detected speed [LINE-N] 12: Motor temperature [M-TMP] 13: Speed override [N-OR] 14: Universal Ai [U-AI] 14: Operation ready completion [RDY] 15: Magnetic-flux detection signal [MF-DT] 16: Motor M2 selection status [16: SW-M2]
15: PID feedback value [PID-FB1] 16: PID reference value [PID-REF] 17: PID correction gain [PID-G] 17: Motor M3 selection status [16: SW-M3] 18: Brake release signal [BRK] 19: Alarm indication1 [AL1] 20: Alarm indication 2 [AL2]
18-24: Custom Ai1 to 7 [C-AI 1 to 7] 25: Speed main setting [N-REFV] 26: Current input speed setting [N-REFC] Y2 Transistor output 2 21: Alarm indication 3 [AL4] 22: Alarm indication 4 [AL8] 23: Fan operation signal [FAN] 24: Auto-resetting [TRY] 25: Universal DO [U-DO]
Ai2 Analog input 2 Ai2 can be switched over between voltage input and current input by an internal switch. However, only a "Speed Setting" is available for the current input.
26: Heat sink overheat early warning [INV-OH] 27: Synchronization completion signal [SY-C] 28: Lifetime alarm [LIFE] 29: Under accelerating [U-ACC]
M Analog input common Common terminal to input signals. 30: Under decelerating [U-DEC] 31: Inverter overload early warning [INV-OL] 32: Motor temperature early warning [M-OH]
Transistor
output 33: Motor overload early warning [M-OL] 34: DB overload early warning [DB-OL] 35: Link transmission error [LK-ERR]
Digital input terminal Y3 Transistor output 3 36: Load adaptive control under limiting [ANL] 37: Load adaptive control under calculation [ANC] 38: Analog torque bias hold [TBH]
39-48: Custom DO 1 to 10 [C-DO 1 to 10]50: Z-phase detection signal [Z-RDY] 51: Multiple-winding selected status [MTS]
Item Unit Type Stack Type 52: Multiple-winding cancel response [MEC-AB] 53: Master selected status [MSS] 54: Parallel system self station alarm [AL-SF]
Wiring Diagram
55: Communications error stopping [LES] 56: Alarm relay [ALM] 57: Minor fault [L-ALM] 58: Maintenance early warning [MNT] 59: Braking transistor error [DBAL]
FWD Forward operation and stop command [FWD-CM] ON: The motor runs in the forward direction. [FWD-CM] OFF: The motor decelerates and stops.
60: DC fan lock signal [DCFL] 61: Speed agreement 2 [N-AG2] 62: Speed agreement 3 [N-AG3] 63: Axial fan operation stop signal [MFAN]
REV Reverse operation and stop command [REV - CM] ON: The motor runs in the reverse direction. [REV - CM] OFF: The motor decelerates and stops. Y4 Transistor output 4
66: Droop selection response [DSAB] 67: Torque command/torque current command cancel response [TCL-C] 68: Torque limit mode cancel response [F40-AB]
0, 1, 2, 3: Multistep speed selection (step 1 to 15) [0: SS1, 1: SS2, 2: SS4, 3: SS8] 71: 73 loading command [PRT-73] 72: Y-terminal test output ON [Y-ON] 73: Y-terminal test output OFF[Y-OFF] 75: Clock battery life
X1 Digital input 1
4, 5: ASR, ACC/DEC time selection (4 steps ) [4: RT1, 5: RT2] 6: Self maintenance selection [HLD] 7: Coast-to-stop command [BX]
8: Alarm reset [RST] 9: Trip command (External fault) [THR] 10: Jogging operation [JOG] 11: Speed setting N2/Speed setting N1 [N2/N1] CMY Transistor output common Common terminal to transistor output signals.
Options
X2 Digital input 2 12: Motor M2 selection [M-CH2] 13: Motor M3 selection [M-CH3] 14: DC brake command [DCBRK] 15: ACC/DEC cleared to zero command [CLR]
Y5A,Y5C Relay output Same functions as for Y1 to Y4 can be selected.
16: Creep speed switching in UP/DOWN setting [CRP-N2/N1] 17: UP command in UP/DOWN setting [UP]
18: DOWN command in UP/DOWN setting [DOWN] 19: Write enable for KYEPAD (data can be changed) [WE-KP] Relay output Outputs a potential-free contact signal (1C) when a protective function is activated to stop
X3 Digital input 3 30A,30B,30C Alarm relay output(for any fault)
20: PID control cancel [KP/PID] 21: Inverse mode change over [IVS] 22: Interlock signal for 52-2 [IL] the inverter. Can select alarm for active or non active conditions.
Digital input 23: Write enable through link [WE-LK] 24: Operation selection through link [LE] 25: Universal DI [U-DI] 26: Pick up start mode [STM]
Warranty
RS-485 communicationsinput Input/output terminals for RS-485 communications.
(Switching is X4 Digital input 4 27: Synchronization command [SYC] 28: Zero speed locking command [LOCK] 29: Pre-exciting command [EXITE] DX+,DX-
30: Speed reference cancel [N-LIM] 31: H41 (torque reference) cancel [H41-CCL] 32: H42 (torque current reference) cancel [H42-CCL] Communications /output Can connect up to 31 inverters through a multidrop (daisy chain) connection. Half-duplex method.
available
between Sink 33: H43 (magnetic-flux reference) cancel [H43-CCL] 34: F40 (Torque control mode 1) cancel [F40-CCL)
X5 Digital input 5 USB port USB port Front access, connector type: mini-B, USB 2.0 Full Speed
and Source.) 35: Torque limit (Selection of level 1 or level 2) [TL2/TL1] 36: Bypass [BPS] 37,38: Torque bias command 1 / 2 [37: TB1, 38: TB2]
39: Droop selection [DROOP] 40: Zero hold [ZH-AI1] 41: Ai2 zero hold [ZH-AI2] 42: Ai3 zero hold [ZH-AI3] 43: Ai4 zero hold [ZH-AI4] PA,PB Pulse generator 2-phase signal input Terminals for connecting 2-phase signal of pulse generator.
Delivery Period
and Code
X6 Digital input 6 44: Ai1 polarity change [REV-AI1] 45: Ai2 polarity change [REV-AI2] 46: Ai3 polarity change [REV-AI3] 47: Ai4 polarity change [REV-AI4]
PGP,PGM Pulse generator power supply +15V DC pulse generator power supply (can be switched to +12V).
48: PID output inverse changeover [PID-INV] 49: PG alarm cancel [PG-CCL] 50: Undervoltage cancel [LU-CCL]
Speed detection
51: Ai torque bias hold [H-TB] 52: STOP1 (The motor stops with standard deceleration time) [SOPT1] Outputs pulse encoder signal with a frequency that can be divided by configurable ratio (set by function code).
X7 Digital input 7 FA,FB Pulse generator output
53: STOP2 (The motor decelerates and stops with deceleration time 4) [STOP2] 54: STOP3 (The motor stops with torque limiter) [STOP3] Open collector and complimentary (same voltage as PGP terminal) can be switched.
55: DIA card enable [DIA] 56: DIB card enable [DIB] 57: Multi-winding motor control cancel [MT-CCL]
X8 Digital input 8 58-67: Custom Di 1 to 10 [C-DI 1 to 10] 68: Load adaptive parameter selection [AN-P2/1] 69: PID clear [PID-CCL] CM Pulse generator output common Common terminals to FA and FB.
Guidelines for
70: PIDFF term e ective [PID-FF] 71: Speed limit calculation completion reset signal [NL-RST]74: Simulated external minor fault [FTB] Temperature NTC Thermistor Motor temperature can be detected with the NTC and the PTC thermistors.
75:NTC thermistor alarm cancel [NTC-CCL] 76: Lifetime early warning cancel [LF-CCL] 78: PID Feedback change-over signal [PID-1/2] TH1,THC
X9 Digital input 9 detection PTC Thermistor connection The motor overheat protective level can be specified by the PTC thermistor function.
79: PID torque bias selection [TB-PID]
22 23
Terminal Functions
Main circuit and analog input terminal
Standard
Category Symbol Terminal name Unit Type Stack Type Item Unit Type Stack Type
L1/R,L2/S,L3/T Power input Connects a 3-phase power supply. Not available in the stack type PLC PLC signal power supply Connects to PLC output signal power supply. It can also be used as a power supply for loads connected to the transistor outputs.
Connects a 3-phase motor.As for the number of stacks CM Digital input common Common terminal to digital input signals.
U,V,W Inverter output Connects a 3-phase motor.
Common
per phase, 1 terminal is allotted per phase (stack).
Digital input EN１,EN２
Connects a DC REACTOR. Safety function When the circuit is open between EN1-PS or EN2-PS terminals, the switching elements of
The "P1" terminal for connecting a DC reactor (Safety
P (+),P1 For DC REACTOR connection A DC REACTOR is optional for 55kW or lower, input terminal the inverter main circuit is turned off and the output is shut off (Certification pending).
is not available with the stack type. function) PS
and must be always installed for 75kW or higher.
Connects a braking resistor via the braking unit.
Functions
Terminal
P (+),N (-) For BRAKING UNIT connection/For DC bus Used as a DC bus.
Used for a DC bus connection system.
Main circuit P (+),DB For EXTERNAL BRAKING RESISTOR connection Connects an external braking resistor (optional).
The "DB" terminal for connecting an external
braking resistor is not available with the stack type.
Analog output and transistor output terminal
G For inverter Ground terminal for inverter chassis. Item Unit type Stack type
Protective
Functions
R0,T0 Auxiliary control power supply Connects the same AC power supply as that of the main circuit to back up the control circuit power supply.
Provides the monitor signal of 0 to ±10V DC for signals from the following:
Used as a power input for the AC cooling fan inside the inverter to combine AO1 Analog output 1
0: Detected speed (Speedometer, unipolar) [N-FB1+] 1: Detected Speed (Speedometer, bipolar)[F-FB1±]
with the high factor PWM converter with power regenerative function Used as a power input to the AC cooling fan in the inverter. 2: Speed setting 2 (Before acceleration/deceleration calculation) [N-REF2] 3: Speed setting 4 (ASR input) [N-REF4] 4: Detected speed [N-FB2±]
R1,T1 Auxiliary input for fan power
(on the models of 200V series 37kW or more, 400V series 75kW or more). Be sure to supply power to the fan.
5: Detected line speed [LINE-N±] 6: Torque current reference (Torque ammeter, bipolar) [IT-REF±]
Generally this is not necessary as long as the inverter is used individually. AO2 Analog output 2
Dimensions
Analog output 7: Torque current reference (Torque ammeter, unipolar) [IT-REF+] 8: Torque reference (Torque meter, bipolar) [T-REF±]
External
DCF1 Connects a microswitch to detect blow-out of the DC fuse and
DC fuse blow-out detection input Not available in the unit type 9: Torque reference (Torque meter, unipolar) [T-REF+] 10: Motor current rms value [V-AC] 11: Motor voltage rms value [V-AC]
DCF2 corresponds to the "b" contact output. DC24V 12 mA Typ
12: Input power (motor output) [PWR] 13: DC link circuit voltage [V-DC] 14: +10V output test [P10] 15: -10V output test [N10]30: Universal AO [U-AO]
AO3 Analog output 3
13 Potentiometer power supply Used for power supply for a speed setting POT (variable resistor: 1 to 5kΩ). DC10V 10mA Max 31-37: Custom AO1 to 7 [C-AO1 to 7] 38: Input power [PWR-IN] 39: Magnetic pole position signal [SMP]40: PID output value [PID-OUT]
Speed setting 12 Voltage input for speed setting Used for analog reference voltage input. • Reversible operation can be selected by ±signals: 0 to +10V DC /0 to max. speed.
Functions of Parts
M Analog output common Common terminal to input signals.
Names and
11 Analog input common Common terminal to input signals.
Outputs the selected signals from the following items:
The following functions can be selected and set according to the external analog input voltage.
0: Input signal off [OFF] 1: Auxiliary speed setting 1 [AUX-N1] 2: Auxiliary speed setting 2 [AUX-N2] 3: Torque limiter (level 1) [TL-REF1] Y1 Transistor output 1 0: Inverter running [RUN] 1: Speed existence [N-EX] 2: Speed agreement [N-AG1] 3: Speed equivalence [N-AR]
4: Torque limiter (level 2) [TL-REF2] 5: Torque bias reference [TB-REF] 6: Torque reference [T-REF] 7: Torque current reference [IT-REF] 4, 5, 6: Detected speed 1, 2, 3 [4: N-DT1, 5: N-DT2, 6: N-DT3] 7: Stopping on undervoltage [LU] 8: Detected torque polarity (braking/driving) [B/D]

Ai1 Analog input 1 8: Creep speed 1 in UP/DOWN setting [CRP-N1] 9: Creep speed 2 in UP/DOWN setting [CRP-N2] 10: Magnetic-flux reference [MF-REF] 9: Torque limiting [TL] 10, 11: Detected torque [10: T-DT1, 11: T-DT2] 12: KEYPAD operation mode [KP] 13: Inverter stopping [STOP]

Analog input 11: Detected speed [LINE-N] 12: Motor temperature [M-TMP] 13: Speed override [N-OR] 14: Universal Ai [U-AI] 14: Operation ready completion [RDY] 15: Magnetic-flux detection signal [MF-DT] 16: Motor M2 selection status [16: SW-M2]
15: PID feedback value [PID-FB1] 16: PID reference value [PID-REF] 17: PID correction gain [PID-G] 17: Motor M3 selection status [16: SW-M3] 18: Brake release signal [BRK] 19: Alarm indication1 [AL1] 20: Alarm indication 2 [AL2]
18-24: Custom Ai1 to 7 [C-AI 1 to 7] 25: Speed main setting [N-REFV] 26: Current input speed setting [N-REFC] Y2 Transistor output 2 21: Alarm indication 3 [AL4] 22: Alarm indication 4 [AL8] 23: Fan operation signal [FAN] 24: Auto-resetting [TRY] 25: Universal DO [U-DO]
Ai2 Analog input 2 Ai2 can be switched over between voltage input and current input by an internal switch. However, only a "Speed Setting" is available for the current input.
26: Heat sink overheat early warning [INV-OH] 27: Synchronization completion signal [SY-C] 28: Lifetime alarm [LIFE] 29: Under accelerating [U-ACC]
M Analog input common Common terminal to input signals. 30: Under decelerating [U-DEC] 31: Inverter overload early warning [INV-OL] 32: Motor temperature early warning [M-OH]
Transistor
output 33: Motor overload early warning [M-OL] 34: DB overload early warning [DB-OL] 35: Link transmission error [LK-ERR]
Digital input terminal Y3 Transistor output 3 36: Load adaptive control under limiting [ANL] 37: Load adaptive control under calculation [ANC] 38: Analog torque bias hold [TBH]
39-48: Custom DO 1 to 10 [C-DO 1 to 10]50: Z-phase detection signal [Z-RDY] 51: Multiple-winding selected status [MTS]
Item Unit Type Stack Type 52: Multiple-winding cancel response [MEC-AB] 53: Master selected status [MSS] 54: Parallel system self station alarm [AL-SF]
Wiring Diagram
55: Communications error stopping [LES] 56: Alarm relay [ALM] 57: Minor fault [L-ALM] 58: Maintenance early warning [MNT] 59: Braking transistor error [DBAL]
FWD Forward operation and stop command [FWD-CM] ON: The motor runs in the forward direction. [FWD-CM] OFF: The motor decelerates and stops.
60: DC fan lock signal [DCFL] 61: Speed agreement 2 [N-AG2] 62: Speed agreement 3 [N-AG3] 63: Axial fan operation stop signal [MFAN]
REV Reverse operation and stop command [REV - CM] ON: The motor runs in the reverse direction. [REV - CM] OFF: The motor decelerates and stops. Y4 Transistor output 4
66: Droop selection response [DSAB] 67: Torque command/torque current command cancel response [TCL-C] 68: Torque limit mode cancel response [F40-AB]
0, 1, 2, 3: Multistep speed selection (step 1 to 15) [0: SS1, 1: SS2, 2: SS4, 3: SS8] 71: 73 loading command [PRT-73] 72: Y-terminal test output ON [Y-ON] 73: Y-terminal test output OFF[Y-OFF] 75: Clock battery life
X1 Digital input 1
4, 5: ASR, ACC/DEC time selection (4 steps ) [4: RT1, 5: RT2] 6: Self maintenance selection [HLD] 7: Coast-to-stop command [BX]
8: Alarm reset [RST] 9: Trip command (External fault) [THR] 10: Jogging operation [JOG] 11: Speed setting N2/Speed setting N1 [N2/N1] CMY Transistor output common Common terminal to transistor output signals.
Options
X2 Digital input 2 12: Motor M2 selection [M-CH2] 13: Motor M3 selection [M-CH3] 14: DC brake command [DCBRK] 15: ACC/DEC cleared to zero command [CLR]
Y5A,Y5C Relay output Same functions as for Y1 to Y4 can be selected.
16: Creep speed switching in UP/DOWN setting [CRP-N2/N1] 17: UP command in UP/DOWN setting [UP]
18: DOWN command in UP/DOWN setting [DOWN] 19: Write enable for KYEPAD (data can be changed) [WE-KP] Relay output Outputs a potential-free contact signal (1C) when a protective function is activated to stop
X3 Digital input 3 30A,30B,30C Alarm relay output(for any fault)
20: PID control cancel [KP/PID] 21: Inverse mode change over [IVS] 22: Interlock signal for 52-2 [IL] the inverter. Can select alarm for active or non active conditions.
Digital input 23: Write enable through link [WE-LK] 24: Operation selection through link [LE] 25: Universal DI [U-DI] 26: Pick up start mode [STM]
Warranty
RS-485 communicationsinput Input/output terminals for RS-485 communications.
(Switching is X4 Digital input 4 27: Synchronization command [SYC] 28: Zero speed locking command [LOCK] 29: Pre-exciting command [EXITE] DX+,DX-
30: Speed reference cancel [N-LIM] 31: H41 (torque reference) cancel [H41-CCL] 32: H42 (torque current reference) cancel [H42-CCL] Communications /output Can connect up to 31 inverters through a multidrop (daisy chain) connection. Half-duplex method.
available
between Sink 33: H43 (magnetic-flux reference) cancel [H43-CCL] 34: F40 (Torque control mode 1) cancel [F40-CCL)
X5 Digital input 5 USB port USB port Front access, connector type: mini-B, USB 2.0 Full Speed
and Source.) 35: Torque limit (Selection of level 1 or level 2) [TL2/TL1] 36: Bypass [BPS] 37,38: Torque bias command 1 / 2 [37: TB1, 38: TB2]
39: Droop selection [DROOP] 40: Zero hold [ZH-AI1] 41: Ai2 zero hold [ZH-AI2] 42: Ai3 zero hold [ZH-AI3] 43: Ai4 zero hold [ZH-AI4] PA,PB Pulse generator 2-phase signal input Terminals for connecting 2-phase signal of pulse generator.
Delivery Period
and Code
X6 Digital input 6 44: Ai1 polarity change [REV-AI1] 45: Ai2 polarity change [REV-AI2] 46: Ai3 polarity change [REV-AI3] 47: Ai4 polarity change [REV-AI4]
PGP,PGM Pulse generator power supply +15V DC pulse generator power supply (can be switched to +12V).
48: PID output inverse changeover [PID-INV] 49: PG alarm cancel [PG-CCL] 50: Undervoltage cancel [LU-CCL]
Speed detection
51: Ai torque bias hold [H-TB] 52: STOP1 (The motor stops with standard deceleration time) [SOPT1] Outputs pulse encoder signal with a frequency that can be divided by configurable ratio (set by function code).
X7 Digital input 7 FA,FB Pulse generator output
53: STOP2 (The motor decelerates and stops with deceleration time 4) [STOP2] 54: STOP3 (The motor stops with torque limiter) [STOP3] Open collector and complimentary (same voltage as PGP terminal) can be switched.
55: DIA card enable [DIA] 56: DIB card enable [DIB] 57: Multi-winding motor control cancel [MT-CCL]
X8 Digital input 8 58-67: Custom Di 1 to 10 [C-DI 1 to 10] 68: Load adaptive parameter selection [AN-P2/1] 69: PID clear [PID-CCL] CM Pulse generator output common Common terminals to FA and FB.
Guidelines for
70: PIDFF term e ective [PID-FF] 71: Speed limit calculation completion reset signal [NL-RST]74: Simulated external minor fault [FTB] Temperature NTC Thermistor Motor temperature can be detected with the NTC and the PTC thermistors.
75:NTC thermistor alarm cancel [NTC-CCL] 76: Lifetime early warning cancel [LF-CCL] 78: PID Feedback change-over signal [PID-1/2] TH1,THC
X9 Digital input 9 detection PTC Thermistor connection The motor overheat protective level can be specified by the PTC thermistor function.
79: PID torque bias selection [TB-PID]
22 23
Protective Functions
Protective function details
Standard
Category Item Specifications Displays Relevant function codes Category Item Specifications Displays Relevant function codes
Stops the inverter if it detects a braking transistor abnormality. Activated if the torque current reference value is equal or higher than the level set in function
Braking transistor abnormal (*) (Only for models that incorporate a braking circuit.) H103 code H140, and the detected speed value or estimated speed value is equal or lower than
Common
Stalled at start H108,H140,H141
Be sure to shut off the inverter primary power when this alarm is detected. the speed set in function code F37 "stop speed", for the period of time set in function code
H141. The detection level and detection time can be set using function codes.
Estimates the braking resistor temperature and stops the inverter if the allowable value is exceeded.
Braking resistor overheating (*) E35 to E37
Setting E35 to 37 is required depending on the used resistor. Activated if the DC link circuit voltage decreases to the undervoltage
level due to a reduction in the supply voltage.The alarm is not output when the DC
This is displayed if the fuse for the main circuit DC blows because of a short-circuit
Undervoltage link circuit voltage decreases and function code F14 is set to "3 to 5". F14
Functions
Terminal
in the IGBT circuit or other reason. This function is provided to prevent secondary
• Undervoltage detection level:
DC fuse blown accidents. Since inverter damage may have occurred, contact Fuji immediately.
200V series: 180V DC, 400V series: 360V DC.
Unit type: Not less than 200V and 75kW, Not less than 400V, 90kW
Stack type: Full capacity Activated if the thermistor circuit is disconnected when the use of NTC thermistors for
P30,A31,A131
Activated if the positional deviation between the command and the detected values exceeds NTC thermistor disconnection motors M1, 2, 3 is configured with the corresponding function codes P30, A31 and
Excessive position deviation o18 H106
Protective
Functions
ten times function code o18 "Excessive deviation value" in synchronized operation. A131. Also activated in extreme low temperatures (approx. -30°C or lower).
Activated if an encoder communications error is detected when using an Overcurrent Cuts the output if motor current exceeds the inverter overcurrent specified value.
Encoder communications error
ABS encoder of 17-bit high resolution (option card OPC-VG1-SPGT).
Activated if the temperature of the heat sink that cools the rectifier diodes
Activated by a ground fault in the inverter output circuit. When ground-fault current is large, Overheating of heat sink
and the IGBTs increases due to cooling fan stoppage.
Dimensions
the overcurrent protective function may be activated. This function is provided to protect
External
Ground fault H103
the inverter. Connect a separate earth-leakage protective relay or an earth-leakage circuit The inverter stops when the external alarm signal (THR) becomes active.
breaker if it is required to prevent accidents such as injury or fire. This alarm is activated via control terminals (assigned to THR) which are E01 to E14
External alarm input
connected to alarm terminals of external devices such as a braking unit or F106
Activated if a fault such as a "write error" occurs in the memory.
a braking resistor (in case these devices trip).
(The number of times to write into the memory (nonvolatile memory) is limited
Functions of Parts
Memory error
(100,000 to 1,000,000 times). If data is written frequently and needlessly with the save Inverter internal overheat Activated if the ambient temperature of the control PC board increases due to poor ventilation of the inverter.
Names and
all function, data changing and saving may be disabled, resulting in a memory error.)
Activated if the detected temperature of the built-in NTC thermistor for motor temperature
Activated if a communications error is detected between the inverter control circuit and the Motor overheat E30,H106
detection exceeds the data of function code E30 "Motor overheat protection."
keypad when the start/stop command from the keypad is valid (function code F02=0).
KEYPAD panel F02
NOTE: A keypad communications error does not display or output an alarm when the inverter is Motor 1 overload Activated if the motor 1 current (inverter output current) exceeds the behavior level set by the function code F11. F11,H106

communication error Protective

operated by external signal input or the link function. The inverter continues operating.
Functions Motor 2 overload Activated if the motor 2 current (inverter output current) exceeds the behavior level set by the function code F33. A33,H106
Protective
CPU error Activated if a CPU error occurs.
o30,o31,H107
Activated if a communications error occurs due to noise when the inverter Activated if the output current exceeds the overload characteristic of the inverse time characteristic. The inverter is stopped
Network error E01 to E14 Inverter overload F80
is operated through T- Link, SX bus or CC-Link. according to the temperatures of the inverter cooling unit and the switching element that is calculated from the output current.
E15 to E28
Activated if an RS-485 communications error occurs when function code H32 Output phase loss detection Stops the inverter if an open phase is detected in the output wiring during operation. H103
is set to 0 to 2 during inverter running via RS-485 communications and function H32,H33,H36
RS-485 error Activated if the motor speed (detected speed value or estimated speed value) exceeds 120%
code H38 is set between 0.1 and 60.0. This function is activated if the H38,H107 Overspeed H90
(can be changed by H90) of the setting of function code "maximum speed" (F03, A06, A106).
communications circuit is disconnected for longer than the time set in H38.
Wiring Diagram
This function is activated if multiple option cards (T-Link, SX bus, CC-Link, etc.) Activated if the DC link circuit voltage exceeds the overvoltage level due to an increase of
supply voltage or regenerative braking current from the motor. However, the inverter cannot
are installed. Activated if both switches for selecting the usage mode are set the
Overvoltage be protected from excessive voltage (high voltage, for example) supplied by mistake.
same setting, though multiple PG options can be installed. Activated if auto
Operation procedure error H01 • Overvoltage detection level
tuning for H01 is started with any of the digital inputs [BX], [STOP1], [STOP2],
200V series: 405V DC, 400V series: 820V DC
and [STP3] turned on. Activated if the FWD key on the keypad is not pressed for
20 seconds or more after selecting the operation of auto tuning for H01. Activated if the PA, PB or power supply circuits of the encoder interface are disconnected.
PG error H104
Options
However, a PG error is not activated when sensor-less control or V/f control is selected.
Output wiring error Activated if the wires are not connected in the inverter output circuit during auto tuning. H01
A/D converter error Activated if an error occurs in the A/D converter circuit. Activated if the bypass circuit of the DC link circuit (magnetic contactor for the charging circuit
Charge circuit error (*)
bypass) is not closed after power is supplied (200V 37kW or more, 400V 75kW or more).
Activated if the difference between the speed reference (speed setting) and the motor speed (detected speed, E43,E44,E45
Speed disagreement
predicted speed) becomes excessive. The detection level and detection time can be set using function codes. H108 DC fan lock Activated if the DC fan stops (200V 45kW or more, 400V 75kW or more). H108
Warranty
Inverter Activated if a transmission error occurs during communications between Hardware error Stops the inverter by detecting LSI errors on the PCB.
H107
communications error inverters using the high-speed serial communications terminal block (option).
E-SX bus tact out-of-sinc error Occurs if the E-SX tact cycle and inverter control cycle are out of synch. H108
A simulated alarm state can be generated by keypad operation or the
Simulated fault H108,H142 Occurs if the PLC monitors the 2-bit signal of toggle signal 1 [TGL1] and toggle signal 2 [TGL2],
Delivery Period
PC loader. Toggle error H107
and does not receive the specified change pattern after the time set in H144 elapses.
and Code
Activated if an encoder error or failure is detected when using an ABS
Encoder error *) Not available in the stack type
encoder of 17-bit high resolution (option card OPC-VG1-SPGT).
The inverter is protected against damage due to input open phase. An open phase may
Input open phase (*) E45
not be detected if the connected load is small or a DC reactor is connected.
Guidelines for
*) Not available in the stack type
24 25
Protective Functions
Protective function details
Standard
Category Item Specifications Displays Relevant function codes Category Item Specifications Displays Relevant function codes
Stops the inverter if it detects a braking transistor abnormality. Activated if the torque current reference value is equal or higher than the level set in function
Braking transistor abnormal (*) (Only for models that incorporate a braking circuit.) H103 code H140, and the detected speed value or estimated speed value is equal or lower than
Common
Stalled at start H108,H140,H141
Be sure to shut off the inverter primary power when this alarm is detected. the speed set in function code F37 "stop speed", for the period of time set in function code
H141. The detection level and detection time can be set using function codes.
Estimates the braking resistor temperature and stops the inverter if the allowable value is exceeded.
Braking resistor overheating (*) E35 to E37
Setting E35 to 37 is required depending on the used resistor. Activated if the DC link circuit voltage decreases to the undervoltage
level due to a reduction in the supply voltage.The alarm is not output when the DC
This is displayed if the fuse for the main circuit DC blows because of a short-circuit
Undervoltage link circuit voltage decreases and function code F14 is set to "3 to 5". F14
Functions
Terminal
in the IGBT circuit or other reason. This function is provided to prevent secondary
• Undervoltage detection level:
DC fuse blown accidents. Since inverter damage may have occurred, contact Fuji immediately.
200V series: 180V DC, 400V series: 360V DC.
Unit type: Not less than 200V and 75kW, Not less than 400V, 90kW
Stack type: Full capacity Activated if the thermistor circuit is disconnected when the use of NTC thermistors for
P30,A31,A131
Activated if the positional deviation between the command and the detected values exceeds NTC thermistor disconnection motors M1, 2, 3 is configured with the corresponding function codes P30, A31 and
Excessive position deviation o18 H106
Protective
Functions
ten times function code o18 "Excessive deviation value" in synchronized operation. A131. Also activated in extreme low temperatures (approx. -30°C or lower).
Activated if an encoder communications error is detected when using an Overcurrent Cuts the output if motor current exceeds the inverter overcurrent specified value.
Encoder communications error
ABS encoder of 17-bit high resolution (option card OPC-VG1-SPGT).
Activated if the temperature of the heat sink that cools the rectifier diodes
Activated by a ground fault in the inverter output circuit. When ground-fault current is large, Overheating of heat sink
and the IGBTs increases due to cooling fan stoppage.
Dimensions
the overcurrent protective function may be activated. This function is provided to protect
External
Ground fault H103
the inverter. Connect a separate earth-leakage protective relay or an earth-leakage circuit The inverter stops when the external alarm signal (THR) becomes active.
breaker if it is required to prevent accidents such as injury or fire. This alarm is activated via control terminals (assigned to THR) which are E01 to E14
External alarm input
connected to alarm terminals of external devices such as a braking unit or F106
Activated if a fault such as a "write error" occurs in the memory.
a braking resistor (in case these devices trip).
(The number of times to write into the memory (nonvolatile memory) is limited
Functions of Parts
Memory error
(100,000 to 1,000,000 times). If data is written frequently and needlessly with the save Inverter internal overheat Activated if the ambient temperature of the control PC board increases due to poor ventilation of the inverter.
Names and
all function, data changing and saving may be disabled, resulting in a memory error.)
Activated if the detected temperature of the built-in NTC thermistor for motor temperature
Activated if a communications error is detected between the inverter control circuit and the Motor overheat E30,H106
detection exceeds the data of function code E30 "Motor overheat protection."
keypad when the start/stop command from the keypad is valid (function code F02=0).
KEYPAD panel F02
NOTE: A keypad communications error does not display or output an alarm when the inverter is Motor 1 overload Activated if the motor 1 current (inverter output current) exceeds the behavior level set by the function code F11. F11,H106

communication error Protective

operated by external signal input or the link function. The inverter continues operating.
Protective
CPU error Activated if a CPU error occurs.
o30,o31,H107
Activated if a communications error occurs due to noise when the inverter Activated if the output current exceeds the overload characteristic of the inverse time characteristic. The inverter is stopped
Network error E01 to E14 Inverter overload F80
is operated through T- Link, SX bus or CC-Link. according to the temperatures of the inverter cooling unit and the switching element that is calculated from the output current.
E15 to E28
Activated if an RS-485 communications error occurs when function code H32 Output phase loss detection Stops the inverter if an open phase is detected in the output wiring during operation. H103
is set to 0 to 2 during inverter running via RS-485 communications and function H32,H33,H36
RS-485 error Activated if the motor speed (detected speed value or estimated speed value) exceeds 120%
code H38 is set between 0.1 and 60.0. This function is activated if the H38,H107 Overspeed H90
(can be changed by H90) of the setting of function code "maximum speed" (F03, A06, A106).
communications circuit is disconnected for longer than the time set in H38.
Wiring Diagram
This function is activated if multiple option cards (T-Link, SX bus, CC-Link, etc.) Activated if the DC link circuit voltage exceeds the overvoltage level due to an increase of
supply voltage or regenerative braking current from the motor. However, the inverter cannot
are installed. Activated if both switches for selecting the usage mode are set the
Overvoltage be protected from excessive voltage (high voltage, for example) supplied by mistake.
same setting, though multiple PG options can be installed. Activated if auto
Operation procedure error H01 • Overvoltage detection level
tuning for H01 is started with any of the digital inputs [BX], [STOP1], [STOP2],
200V series: 405V DC, 400V series: 820V DC
and [STP3] turned on. Activated if the FWD key on the keypad is not pressed for
20 seconds or more after selecting the operation of auto tuning for H01. Activated if the PA, PB or power supply circuits of the encoder interface are disconnected.
PG error H104
Options
However, a PG error is not activated when sensor-less control or V/f control is selected.
Output wiring error Activated if the wires are not connected in the inverter output circuit during auto tuning. H01
A/D converter error Activated if an error occurs in the A/D converter circuit. Activated if the bypass circuit of the DC link circuit (magnetic contactor for the charging circuit
Charge circuit error (*)
bypass) is not closed after power is supplied (200V 37kW or more, 400V 75kW or more).
Activated if the difference between the speed reference (speed setting) and the motor speed (detected speed, E43,E44,E45
Speed disagreement
predicted speed) becomes excessive. The detection level and detection time can be set using function codes. H108 DC fan lock Activated if the DC fan stops (200V 45kW or more, 400V 75kW or more). H108
Warranty
Inverter Activated if a transmission error occurs during communications between Hardware error Stops the inverter by detecting LSI errors on the PCB.
H107
communications error inverters using the high-speed serial communications terminal block (option).
E-SX bus tact out-of-sinc error Occurs if the E-SX tact cycle and inverter control cycle are out of synch. H108
A simulated alarm state can be generated by keypad operation or the
Simulated fault H108,H142 Occurs if the PLC monitors the 2-bit signal of toggle signal 1 [TGL1] and toggle signal 2 [TGL2],
Delivery Period
PC loader. Toggle error H107
and does not receive the specified change pattern after the time set in H144 elapses.
and Code
Activated if an encoder error or failure is detected when using an ABS
Encoder error *) Not available in the stack type
encoder of 17-bit high resolution (option card OPC-VG1-SPGT).
The inverter is protected against damage due to input open phase. An open phase may
Input open phase (*) E45
not be detected if the connected load is small or a DC reactor is connected.
Guidelines for
*) Not available in the stack type
24 25
Protective Functions / External Dimensions External Dimensions
Category Item Specifications Displays Relevant function codes KEYPAD
80
80 18.2 61 9.5
13.775
14.615
4.5 58
Standard
10.5
10.5
2×M3
9.5
If an alarm or warning registered as a minor fault occurs, the minor fault indication
[ ] is displayed on the keypad. For a minor fault, the minor fault output (Y
1
terminal) is output. However, alarm relay output (30ABC) is not output and the
15.08
Panel cut part
23
8.17
inverter continues operating.
Items to be set (Can be selected individually): H106 to H108
128.5
Common
104.6
128.5
Motor overheat ( ), motor overload ( - ), NTC thermistor disconnection ( ),
104.6
Minor fault (warning) H110
external alarm ( ), RS-485 communications ( ), option communications error ( ),
H111
inverter link error ( ), simulated fault ( ), DC fan lock detection ( ), speed
disagreement ( ), E-SX error ( ), Stalled st Start ( ), motor overheat early warning, 2× 4
motor overload early warning, battery life, lifetime alarm, fin overheat early warning,
Protective
overheating at heat sink, inverter overload early warning
Functions
Terminal
Functions
The cause of each minor fault can be checked on the keypad. Back 9.5 61 9.5 [Unit: mm]
Protects the inverter from surge voltage coming from the power supply using the
Surge protection surge absorber that is connected to the main circuit power supply terminal (unit
11.4
8.1
type only: L1/R, L2/S, L3/T) and the control power supply terminal (Ro, To) circuit.
Protective
Functions
16.98 11.68
53.8 15.24
Monitors the inverter AC input power to judge if the AC input power (main power) is
established or not. If not, whether the inverter is to be operated or not can be
Main power off detection (*) H76 [Unit: mm]
selected. (When the power is supplied via a PWM converter or DC bus connection,
Body external dimensions
do not change the setting of function code H76 as no AC input exists.)
Series Inverter type Fig
Dimensions
W W1 W2 W3 W4 W5 H H1 H2 D D1 D2 D3 M N
NOTES:
External
• All protective functions are reset automatically if the control power voltage decreases to where maintaining the operation of the inverter control circuit is impossible. FRN0.75VG1 -2J A
• The latest and last ten alarm codes and the latest and the last three alarm detailed data are stored.
FRN1.5VG1 -2J A
• Stoppage due to a protective function can be reset from the RST key of the keypad or turning the circuit between the X terminal (assigned to RST) and the CM OFF and then ON. This action is invalid if the cause of an alarm is
not found and resolved. If more than one alarm occurs at the same time, this action cannot be reset before resolving the causes of all alarms (the cause of an alarm that has not been cleared can be checked on the keypad). FRN2.2VG1 -2J A
205 300
• "30A/B/C" do not operate if interrupted by a minor fault. FRN3.7VG1 -2J A
Functions of Parts
*) Not available in the stack type FRN5.5VG1 -2J A
- - - - - - 245 155 90 -
Names and
FRN7.5VG1 -2J A
External Dimensions (Unit type) 3-phase

FRN11VG1
FRN15VG1
-2J
-2J
B
B 2X 10 10
250 - 400
200V FRN18.5VG1 -2J B
Inverter body
FRN22VG1 -2J B

Fig. A Fig. B

205(W) 245(D) 250(W) 245(D)
12 181 12 155(D1) 90(D2) 12 226 12 155(D1) 90(D2) FRN30VG1 -2J C 326.2 320 240 310.2 304 550 530 500 261.3 140 255
27 10 27 80 10
80
2- 10(M) 2- 10(M) FRN37VG1 -2J C 615 595 565
1.8
11
115
1.8
11
FRN45VG1 -2J C 361.2 355 275 345.2 339 276.3 155 270
740 690
128.5
FRN55VG1 -2J C 720

128.5
FRN75VG1 -2J C 535.8 530 430 506.4 500.6 750 688.7 291.3 145 140 285 2X 15
15
FRN90VG1 -2J C 686.4 680 - 290 656.4 650.6 880 850 819.5 366.3 180 180 360 3X 15
300(H)
400(H)
278
378
FRN3.7VG1 -4J A
FRN5.5VG1 -4J A 205 300
FRN7.5VG1 -4J A
FRN11VG1 -4J B - - - - - - 245 155 90 -
11
10(N) [Unit: mm] 10(N) [Unit: mm]

FRN15VG1 -4J B
11
Wiring Diagram
250 400
FRN18.5VG1 -4J B
2X 10 10
FRN22VG1 -4J B
FRN30VG1 -4J C
326.2 320 240 - 310.2 304 550 530 500 261.3 140 255
FRN37VG1 -4J C
FRN45VG1 -4J C 615 595 565 115
FRN11VG1 -2J to FRN22VG1 -2J 3-phase FRN55VG1 -4J C 361.2 355 275 345.2 339 675 655 625 276.3 155 270
FRN0.75VG1 -2J to FRN7.5VG1 -2J FRN11VG1 -4J to FRN22VG1 -4J
400V
Options
FRN75VG1 -4J C 720 690
FRN90VG1 -4J C 740
Fig. C MAX.W M MAX.D Fig. D MAX.W 710 678.7 321.3 135 315
W1 D3 W1 FRN110VG1 -4J C
W2 (6.3) D1 D2 W2 W2 536.4 530 430 506.4 500.6 2X 15
W3 W3 W3 W3 W3
FRN132VG1 -4J C
FRN160VG1 -4J C
1000 970 939.5 366.3 180 360
FRN200VG1 -4J C
Warranty
- 290 656.4 650.6 180
FRN220VG1 -4J C
686.4 680 3X 15 15
FRN280VG1 -4J D
290 - 659 653 445.5
H2
H1
FRN315VG1 -4J D
H
1400 1370 1330 260 440

FRN355VG1 -4J D
886.4 880 260 859.1 853 446.3
Delivery Period
FRN400VG1 -4J D
- 4X 15
and Code
FRN500VG1 -4J D
1006 1000 300 972 966 1550 1520 1480 505.9 313.2 186.8 500
N
[Unit: mm] [Unit: mm] FRN630VG1 -4J D
:S:Standard type
2-hole:FRN30VG1 -2J to FRN75VG1 -2J 3-hole:FRN280VG1 -4J to FRN315VG1 -4J
3-hole:FRN90VG1 -2J 4-hole:FRN355VG1 -4J to FRN630VG1 -4J
FRN200VG1 -4J
Guidelines for
MAX.W4 * For the fixed screw holes, see the Fuji's MAX.W4 * For the fixed screw holes, see the Fuji's
W5 website or contact us individually. W5 website or contact us individually.
For specific external diagrams, refer to Fuji Electric website. (http://www.fujielectric.co.jp/products/inverter/download/)
26 27
Protective Functions / External Dimensions External Dimensions
Category Item Specifications Displays Relevant function codes KEYPAD
80
80 18.2 61 9.5
13.775
14.615
4.5 58
Standard
10.5
10.5
2×M3
9.5
If an alarm or warning registered as a minor fault occurs, the minor fault indication
[ ] is displayed on the keypad. For a minor fault, the minor fault output (Y
1
terminal) is output. However, alarm relay output (30ABC) is not output and the
15.08
Panel cut part
23
8.17
inverter continues operating.
Items to be set (Can be selected individually): H106 to H108
128.5
Common
104.6
128.5
Motor overheat ( ), motor overload ( - ), NTC thermistor disconnection ( ),
104.6
Minor fault (warning) H110
external alarm ( ), RS-485 communications ( ), option communications error ( ),
H111
inverter link error ( ), simulated fault ( ), DC fan lock detection ( ), speed
disagreement ( ), E-SX error ( ), Stalled st Start ( ), motor overheat early warning, 2× 4
motor overload early warning, battery life, lifetime alarm, fin overheat early warning,
Protective
overheating at heat sink, inverter overload early warning
Functions
Terminal
Functions
The cause of each minor fault can be checked on the keypad. Back 9.5 61 9.5 [Unit: mm]
Protects the inverter from surge voltage coming from the power supply using the
Surge protection surge absorber that is connected to the main circuit power supply terminal (unit
11.4
8.1
type only: L1/R, L2/S, L3/T) and the control power supply terminal (Ro, To) circuit.
Protective
Functions
16.98 11.68
53.8 15.24
Monitors the inverter AC input power to judge if the AC input power (main power) is
established or not. If not, whether the inverter is to be operated or not can be
Main power off detection (*) H76 [Unit: mm]
selected. (When the power is supplied via a PWM converter or DC bus connection,
do not change the setting of function code H76 as no AC input exists.)
Dimensions
W W1 W2 W3 W4 W5 H H1 H2 D D1 D2 D3 M N
NOTES:
External
• All protective functions are reset automatically if the control power voltage decreases to where maintaining the operation of the inverter control circuit is impossible. FRN0.75VG1 -2J A
• The latest and last ten alarm codes and the latest and the last three alarm detailed data are stored.
FRN1.5VG1 -2J A
• Stoppage due to a protective function can be reset from the RST key of the keypad or turning the circuit between the X terminal (assigned to RST) and the CM OFF and then ON. This action is invalid if the cause of an alarm is
not found and resolved. If more than one alarm occurs at the same time, this action cannot be reset before resolving the causes of all alarms (the cause of an alarm that has not been cleared can be checked on the keypad). FRN2.2VG1 -2J A
205 300
• "30A/B/C" do not operate if interrupted by a minor fault. FRN3.7VG1 -2J A
Functions of Parts
*) Not available in the stack type FRN5.5VG1 -2J A
- - - - - - 245 155 90 -
Names and
FRN7.5VG1 -2J A
External Dimensions (Unit type) 3-phase

FRN11VG1
FRN15VG1
-2J
-2J
B
B 2X 10 10
250 - 400
200V FRN18.5VG1 -2J B
Inverter body
FRN22VG1 -2J B

Fig. A Fig. B

205(W) 245(D) 250(W) 245(D)
12 181 12 155(D1) 90(D2) 12 226 12 155(D1) 90(D2) FRN30VG1 -2J C 326.2 320 240 310.2 304 550 530 500 261.3 140 255
27 10 27 80 10
80
2- 10(M) 2- 10(M) FRN37VG1 -2J C 615 595 565
1.8
11
115
1.8
11
FRN45VG1 -2J C 361.2 355 275 345.2 339 276.3 155 270
740 690
128.5
FRN55VG1 -2J C 720

128.5
FRN75VG1 -2J C 535.8 530 430 506.4 500.6 750 688.7 291.3 145 140 285 2X 15
15
FRN90VG1 -2J C 686.4 680 - 290 656.4 650.6 880 850 819.5 366.3 180 180 360 3X 15
300(H)
400(H)
278
378
FRN3.7VG1 -4J A
FRN5.5VG1 -4J A 205 300
FRN7.5VG1 -4J A
FRN11VG1 -4J B - - - - - - 245 155 90 -
11
10(N) [Unit: mm] 10(N) [Unit: mm]

FRN15VG1 -4J B
11
Wiring Diagram
250 400
FRN18.5VG1 -4J B
2X 10 10
FRN22VG1 -4J B
FRN30VG1 -4J C
326.2 320 240 - 310.2 304 550 530 500 261.3 140 255
FRN37VG1 -4J C
FRN45VG1 -4J C 615 595 565 115
FRN11VG1 -2J to FRN22VG1 -2J 3-phase FRN55VG1 -4J C 361.2 355 275 345.2 339 675 655 625 276.3 155 270
FRN0.75VG1 -2J to FRN7.5VG1 -2J FRN11VG1 -4J to FRN22VG1 -4J
400V
Options
FRN75VG1 -4J C 720 690
FRN90VG1 -4J C 740
Fig. C MAX.W M MAX.D Fig. D MAX.W 710 678.7 321.3 135 315
W1 D3 W1 FRN110VG1 -4J C
W2 (6.3) D1 D2 W2 W2 536.4 530 430 506.4 500.6 2X 15
W3 W3 W3 W3 W3
FRN132VG1 -4J C
FRN160VG1 -4J C
1000 970 939.5 366.3 180 360
FRN200VG1 -4J C
Warranty
- 290 656.4 650.6 180
FRN220VG1 -4J C
686.4 680 3X 15 15
FRN280VG1 -4J D
290 - 659 653 445.5
H2
H1
FRN315VG1 -4J D
H
1400 1370 1330 260 440

FRN355VG1 -4J D
886.4 880 260 859.1 853 446.3
Delivery Period
FRN400VG1 -4J D
- 4X 15
and Code
FRN500VG1 -4J D
1006 1000 300 972 966 1550 1520 1480 505.9 313.2 186.8 500
N
[Unit: mm] [Unit: mm] FRN630VG1 -4J D
:S:Standard type
2-hole:FRN30VG1 -2J to FRN75VG1 -2J 3-hole:FRN280VG1 -4J to FRN315VG1 -4J
3-hole:FRN90VG1 -2J 4-hole:FRN355VG1 -4J to FRN630VG1 -4J
FRN200VG1 -4J
Guidelines for
MAX.W4 * For the fixed screw holes, see the Fuji's MAX.W4 * For the fixed screw holes, see the Fuji's
W5 website or contact us individually. W5 website or contact us individually.
For specific external diagrams, refer to Fuji Electric website. (http://www.fujielectric.co.jp/products/inverter/download/)
26 27
External Dimensions Names and Functions of the Keypad
External Dimensions (Stack type) Names and Functions of the Keypad
Standard
Fig. A MAX 226.2(W) MAX 406.3(D) Fig. B MAX 226.2(W) MAX 406.3(D) Up/Down keys Unit indication LED monitor
220 400 220 400
144.8 2.4 144.8 3.2 Operation mode: Displays the units for the information that appears on the LED monitor. Operation mode:
Increases or decreases the speed. Displays the setting frequency, output current,
Common
30 160 30 160
45 130 45 130
Program mode: output voltage, motor speed, and line speed.
Changes the function codes and specified data values. Trip mode:
Displays the cause of a trip.
Program key
Switches the display to the menu screen or the
LCD monitor
Functions
Displays different information ranging from operation
Terminal
initial screens for operation and alarm modes.
status to function data.
880(H)
740(H)
A real-time clock is installed as a standard feature.
841
711
Shift key (column shift)
724.5
605.6
Operation guidance is scrolled along the bottom.

555.5
Used to move the cursor horizontally in order to change data, and to jump to
572.5
other function blocks (when pressed together with the UP/DOWN keys).
Operation key
Protective
Functions
Starts motor operation.
Reset key
18
18
Program mode:
8 204 8 204 Cancels the current input data and changes the screen.
RUN LED
Trip mode: Lit during operation by the FWD/REV signal or
Releases a trip. by operation commands via communications.
[Unit: mm] [Unit: mm]
Dimensions
External
FRN30SVG1S-4 to FRN45SVG1S-4 FRN55SVG1S-4 to FRN110SVG1S-4
Function/Data select key HELP key
Used to switch the displayed value on the LED monitor, Stop key Displays guidance screens including the key operation
Fig. C MAX 226.2(W)
220
MAX 567.3(D)
550 11
Fig. D MAX 226.2(W)
220
MAX 567.3(D)
550 11
input the speed setting and store function code data. Stops motor operation. guidance for each LCD monitor display.
144.8 144.8
30 160 30 160
Functions of Parts
2.3
1.6
Names and
Features
1367.2
1027.8

1100(H)
1400(H)
- High visibility LCD with backlight

956.5
1190
- 5-digit display with large 7-segment LED

789.7
834.6
91.2
- Data of up to three inverters can be copied.

91.2
3.2
3.2
- Supported languages: Japanese, English, Chinese, Korean (Hangul characters), (German, French, Spanish, Italian)*1
14.5
14.5
*1 Available soon
70
55
70
55
70 75
70 75
63 94 63 94
191
191
56.2 455.3
[Unit: mm] 56.2 455.3
[Unit: mm]
<Display sample>
Japanese English
Wiring Diagram
[Unit: mm]
W H D
FRN30SVG1S-4 A 226.2 740 406.3
Options
FRN37SVG1S-4 A 226.2 740 406.3
FRN45SVG1S-4 A 226.2 740 406.3
FRN55SVG1S-4 B 226.2 880 406.3
FRN75SVG1S-4 B 226.2 880 406.3
FRN90SVG1S-4 B 226.2 880 406.3
Chinese Korean (Hangul characters)
Warranty
FRN110SVG1S-4 B 226.2 880 406.3
FRN132SVG1S-4 C 226.2 1100 567.3
3-phase
FRN160SVG1S-4 C 226.2 1100 567.3
400V
FRN200SVG1S-4 C 226.2 1100 567.3
FRN220SVG1S-4 D 226.2 1400 567.3
Delivery Period
FRN250SVG1S-4 D 226.2 1400 567.3
and Code
FRN280SVG1S-4 D 226.2 1400 567.3
FRN315SVG1S-4 D 226.2 1400 567.3
FRN630BVG1S-4 (*1) - - - -
FRN710BVG1S-4 (*1) - - - -
FRN800BVG1S-4 (*1) - - - -
Guidelines for
*1) One set of the inverter consists of three stacks. The touch panel is connected to the V phase only.
For the external dimensions information, contact the Fuji Electric Sales Department.
28 29
External Dimensions Names and Functions of the Keypad
External Dimensions (Stack type) Names and Functions of the Keypad
Standard
Fig. A MAX 226.2(W) MAX 406.3(D) Fig. B MAX 226.2(W) MAX 406.3(D) Up/Down keys Unit indication LED monitor
220 400 220 400
144.8 2.4 144.8 3.2 Operation mode: Displays the units for the information that appears on the LED monitor. Operation mode:
Increases or decreases the speed. Displays the setting frequency, output current,
Common
30 160 30 160
45 130 45 130
Program mode: output voltage, motor speed, and line speed.
Changes the function codes and specified data values. Trip mode:
Displays the cause of a trip.
Program key
Switches the display to the menu screen or the
LCD monitor
Functions
Displays different information ranging from operation
Terminal
initial screens for operation and alarm modes.
status to function data.
880(H)
740(H)
A real-time clock is installed as a standard feature.
841
711
Shift key (column shift)
724.5
605.6
Operation guidance is scrolled along the bottom.

555.5
Used to move the cursor horizontally in order to change data, and to jump to
572.5
other function blocks (when pressed together with the UP/DOWN keys).
Operation key
Protective
Functions
Starts motor operation.
Reset key
18
18
Program mode:
8 204 8 204 Cancels the current input data and changes the screen.
RUN LED
Trip mode: Lit during operation by the FWD/REV signal or
Releases a trip. by operation commands via communications.
Dimensions
External
Function/Data select key HELP key
Used to switch the displayed value on the LED monitor, Stop key Displays guidance screens including the key operation
Fig. C MAX 226.2(W)
220
MAX 567.3(D)
550 11
Fig. D MAX 226.2(W)
220
MAX 567.3(D)
550 11
input the speed setting and store function code data. Stops motor operation. guidance for each LCD monitor display.
144.8 144.8
30 160 30 160
Functions of Parts
2.3
1.6
Names and
Features
1367.2
1027.8

1100(H)
1400(H)
- High visibility LCD with backlight

956.5
1190
- 5-digit display with large 7-segment LED

789.7
834.6
91.2
- Data of up to three inverters can be copied.

91.2
3.2
3.2
- Supported languages: Japanese, English, Chinese, Korean (Hangul characters), (German, French, Spanish, Italian)*1
14.5
14.5
*1 Available soon
70
55
70
55
70 75
70 75
63 94 63 94
191
191
56.2 455.3
[Unit: mm] 56.2 455.3
[Unit: mm]
<Display sample>
Japanese English
Wiring Diagram
[Unit: mm]
W H D
FRN30SVG1S-4 A 226.2 740 406.3
Options
FRN37SVG1S-4 A 226.2 740 406.3
FRN45SVG1S-4 A 226.2 740 406.3
FRN55SVG1S-4 B 226.2 880 406.3
FRN75SVG1S-4 B 226.2 880 406.3
FRN90SVG1S-4 B 226.2 880 406.3
Chinese Korean (Hangul characters)
Warranty
FRN110SVG1S-4 B 226.2 880 406.3
FRN132SVG1S-4 C 226.2 1100 567.3
3-phase
FRN160SVG1S-4 C 226.2 1100 567.3
400V
FRN200SVG1S-4 C 226.2 1100 567.3
FRN220SVG1S-4 D 226.2 1400 567.3
Delivery Period
FRN250SVG1S-4 D 226.2 1400 567.3
and Code
FRN280SVG1S-4 D 226.2 1400 567.3
FRN315SVG1S-4 D 226.2 1400 567.3
FRN630BVG1S-4 (*1) - - - -
FRN710BVG1S-4 (*1) - - - -
FRN800BVG1S-4 (*1) - - - -
Guidelines for
*1) One set of the inverter consists of three stacks. The touch panel is connected to the V phase only.
For the external dimensions information, contact the Fuji Electric Sales Department.
28 29
Dedicated motor specifications (Synchronous motor with sensor) External dimensions of dedicated motors (Induction motor with sensor)
3-phase 200V series standard specifications MVK
Standard
Item Specifications Fig. A Fig. B
Shaft extension
Dedicated motor rated output [kW] 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 90 L
L
A R D D U
KL A R KL
Applicable motor type (MVK_) 8095A 8097A 8107A 8115A 8133A 8135A 8165A 8167A 8184A 8185A 8187A 8207A 8208A 9224A 9254A 9256A Aux. terminal box Main terminal box Aux. terminal box Main terminal box
Common
102 102 Q
Moment of inertia of rotor J [kg • m2] 0.009 0.009 0.009 0.016 0.030 0.037 0.085 0.11 0.21 0.23 0.34 0.41 0.47 0.53 0.88 1.03 Q
S
AIR AIR
Rotor GD [kgf • m2] 0.036 0.036 0.036 0.065 0.12 0.15 0.34 0.47 0.83 0.92 1.34 1.65 1.87 2.12 3.52 4.12
T
I
Base speed/Max. speed [r/min] 1500/3600 1500/3000 1500/2400 1500/2000 QR KD
C
QR
G
Vibration V10 or less V15 or less 2- 22
G
2- 22 (L&R) J Z 2- 22 J Z
K
Voltage [V], Frequency [Hz] - 200 to 210V/50Hz,200 to 230/60Hz 200V/50Hz, 200,220V/60Hz E E
2- 22 K
Functions
F F XB (L&R) E E
Terminal
F F XB
N M M
Number of phases/poles - Single phase, 4P 3-phase, 4P N
Cooling fan* Input power [W] - 40/50 90/120 150/210 80/120 270/390
0.49/ 0.76/
Current [A] - 0.29/0.27 to 0.31
0.44 to 0.48
0.75/0.77 to 0.8
0.8.0.8
1.9/2.0,2.0 Fig. C Fig. D Fig. E
Aux. terminal box
Approx.weight [kg] 28 29 32 46 63 73 111 133 190 197 235 280 296 380 510 570
Protective
(for fan) Main terminal box
Functions
Aux. terminal box Aux. terminal box
(for fan) (for PG) Main terminal box L D
* Only the MVK8095A (0.75 kW) is a self-cooled type. A R KL
27
L D
D A R KD
L AIR
A R KL
22
Aux. terminal box Main terminal box
102
Q
I
3-phase 400V series standard specifications
AIR Q
Q
Dimensions
I
AIR
External
KD
QR QR QR
C
C
C
G
G
2- 22 AIR
G
Item Specifications 2- 22 K
(L&R) J Z
K
J
E E
Z 22
K2 K1 J Z
E E F F XB Aux. terminal box
F F XB M F F XB E E
M
Dedicated motor rated output [kW] 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 90 110 132 160 200 220 N N (for PG) N M
Applicable motor type (MVK_) 8115A 8133A 8135A 8165A 8167A 8184A 8185A 8187A 8207A 8208A 9224A 9254A 9256A 9284A 9286A 528KA 528LA 531FA [Unit: mm]
Functions of Parts
Moment of inertia of rotor J [kg • m2] 0.016 0.030 0.037 0.085 0.11 0.21 0.23 0.34 0.41 0.47 0.53 0.88 1.03 1.54 1.77 1.72 1.83 2.33 Motor
Names and
Dimensions Shaft extension Approx.
rated
Type Fig weight
Rotor GD [kgf • m2] 0.065 0.12 0.15 0.34 0.47 0.83 0.92 1.34 1.65 1.87 2.12 3.52 4.12 6.16 7.08 6.88 7.32 9.32 output
[kg]
[kW] A C D E F G I J K K1 K2 KD KL L M N R XB Z Q QR S T U W
Base speed/Max. speed [r/min] 1500/3600 1500/3000 1500/2400 1500/2000
0.75 MVK8095A 201.5 204 370 28
Vibration V10 or less V15 or less 90 70 62.5 10 195 35.5 35.5 189 170 150 168.5 56 10 50 24j6
1.5 MVK8097A 277.5 446 29

Voltage [V], 200 to 210V/50Hz,

400 to 420V/50Hz,400 to 440V/60Hz 400V/50Hz,400,440V/60Hz A 203 27 7 4 8
Frequency [Hz] 200 to 230V/60Hz 2.2 MVK8107A 292 100 80 12.5 238 40 190 485 195 170 193 63 32
Single phase, 4P 3-phase, 4P 40 60 0.5 28j6
Number of phases/poles 3.7 MVK8115A 299 112 236 95 70 14 270 205 499 224 175 200 70 46
Cooling fan 80/ 12
Input power [W] 40/50 90/120 150/210 270/390 2200 3700 5.5 MVK8113A 309 50 548 180 239 63
120 B 132 273 108 17 311 45 34 223 250 89 80 38k6 10
7.5 MVK8135A 328 89 586 212 258 73
0.27/ 0.39/ 7.8/
Current [A] 0.29/0.27 to 0.31 0.38/0.39 to 0.4 1.0/1.0,1.0 4.6/4.3,4.1 8 5
0.24 to 0.25 0.4,0.4 7.1,7.6 11 MVK8165A 400 105 723 250 323 111
Approx.weight [kg] 160 321 127 18 376 50 63 272 300 108 1 42k6 12
46 63 73 111 133 190 197 235 280 296 380 510 570 710 760 1270 1310 1630 15 MVK8167A 422 127 767 300 345 133
48
18.5 MVK8184A A 14.5 110 190
435 120.5 - - 786.5 292 351.5 48k6 9 5.5 14
Wiring Diagram
22 MVK8185A 180 376 139.5 20 428 75 75 305 350 121 1.5 197
30 MVK8187A 454 139.5 60

3-phase 400V series standard specifications Common Specifications
824.5 330 370.5 55m6 10 6 16 235
37 MVK8207A 280
490 200 411 159 152.5 466 85 364 915.5 390 360 425.5 133 60m6
Item Specifications Item Specifications 45 MVK8208A C 25 80 18.5 11 7 18 296
Dedicated motor rated output [kW] 250 280 300 315 355 400 Insulation class/Number of poles Class F/4P 55 MVK9224A 723 225 445 178 143 515 95 391 1155 436 366 432 149 140 65m6 380
Options
Applicable motor type (MVK_) 531GA 531HA 535GA 535GA 535HA 535JA Main terminal box (lug type): 3 or 6 main circuit terminals, NTC thermister terminals 75 MVK9254A 693.5 155.5 80 1157 411 463.5 2 510
= 2 pcs (MVK 8 series), 3 pcs (MVK 9 series, MVK 5 series, 1PC is a spare). 250 545 203 30 743 106 506 168 75m6 12 7.5 20
Moment of inertia of rotor J [kg • m2] 2.52 2.76 5.99 5.99 6.53 7.18
Terminal design 90 MVK9256A 711.5 174.5 1194 449 483.5 570
Rotor GD [kgf • m2] 10.08 11.04 23.96 23.96 26.12 28.72 Auxiliary terminal box (terminal block): Pulse encoder (P6P, P6M,PA, PB, SS), D 100 120
110 MVK9284A 764 184 1308 468 544 710
Base speed/Max. speed [r/min] 1500/2000 Cooling fan (FU, FV, FW)
605 35 798 203 557 24
Vibration V15 or less Mounting method Legs mounted (IMB3) NOTE: Contact FUJI for other methods. 132 MVK9286A 789.5 209.5 1359 519 569.5 760
Warranty
280 228.5 190 85m6 22
Voltage [V], IP44, Totally enclosed forced-ventilation system with cooling fan motor. 160 MVK528JA 1230
400V/50Hz,400,440V/60Hz 1015.5 628 228.5 30 1234 125 120 210 1604 560 557 588.5 1
Frequency [Hz] Degree of protection, Cooling method A cooling fan blows air over the motor toward the drive-end.
200 MVK528LA 170 14 9 1350
Number of phases/poles 3-phase, 4P * Only the MVK8095A (0.75 kW) is a self-cooled type.
220 MVK531FA 1690
Cooling fan Installation location Indoor, altitude 1000m or less.
Delivery Period
Input power [W] 3700
Ambient temperature, humidity -10 to +40°C, 90%RH or less (no condensation) 250 MVK531GA 1073 315 689 254 254 1425 150 140 240 1713 630 648 640 216 95m6 25 1750
and Code
Color Munsell N5 280 MVK531HA E - 102 413 1820
Current [A] 7.8/7.1,7.6
MVK8 series: JEM1466 or JEC-2137-2000,
Standard conformity 300 36 28 2
Approx.weight [kg] 1685 1745 2230 2230 2310 2420 MVK9 and MVK5 series: JEC-2137-2000 MVK535GA 2230
315
Pulse encoder (1024P/R, DC+5V, A ,B ,Z, U, V, W line driver output),
Standard built-in part 1111 355 778 305 355 1510 160 180 330 1956 730 890 845 280 210 100m6 16 10 28
NTC thermistor 1 pc (2 pcs for 110kW or more), cooling fan 355 MVK535HA 2310
Guidelines for
Note 1) For motors applicable with 55 kW or more, the torque is accurate to ±5%.If you need more accuracy, contact Fuji. 400 MVK535JA 2420
Note 2) If you need a motor other than the dedicated motor with 4 poles and base speed of 1500 r/min, contact Fuji Electric.
Note 1) MVK8095A (0.75kW) is a natural cooling type motor (cooling system: IC410). Note 2) MVK8095A (0.75kW) has the cable lead-in hole of 22 (in 1 place).
Note 3) MVK9224A (55kW) has an aux. terminal box (for fan) as a supplement for Fig. C.
0 0
Note 4) Allowable tolerance of dimension: Height of rotary shaft C 250 mm −0.5mm, C > 250mm −1.0 mm
30 31
Dedicated motor specifications (Synchronous motor with sensor) External dimensions of dedicated motors (Induction motor with sensor)
3-phase 200V series standard specifications MVK
Standard
Item Specifications Fig. A Fig. B
Shaft extension
Dedicated motor rated output [kW] 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 90 L
L
A R D D U
KL A R KL
Applicable motor type (MVK_) 8095A 8097A 8107A 8115A 8133A 8135A 8165A 8167A 8184A 8185A 8187A 8207A 8208A 9224A 9254A 9256A Aux. terminal box Main terminal box Aux. terminal box Main terminal box
Common
102 102 Q
Moment of inertia of rotor J [kg • m2] 0.009 0.009 0.009 0.016 0.030 0.037 0.085 0.11 0.21 0.23 0.34 0.41 0.47 0.53 0.88 1.03 Q
S
AIR AIR
Rotor GD [kgf • m2] 0.036 0.036 0.036 0.065 0.12 0.15 0.34 0.47 0.83 0.92 1.34 1.65 1.87 2.12 3.52 4.12
T
I
Base speed/Max. speed [r/min] 1500/3600 1500/3000 1500/2400 1500/2000 QR KD
C
QR
G
Vibration V10 or less V15 or less 2- 22
G
2- 22 (L&R) J Z 2- 22 J Z
K
Voltage [V], Frequency [Hz] - 200 to 210V/50Hz,200 to 230/60Hz 200V/50Hz, 200,220V/60Hz E E
2- 22 K
Functions
F F XB (L&R) E E
Terminal
F F XB
N M M
Number of phases/poles - Single phase, 4P 3-phase, 4P N
Cooling fan* Input power [W] - 40/50 90/120 150/210 80/120 270/390
0.49/ 0.76/
Current [A] - 0.29/0.27 to 0.31
0.44 to 0.48
0.75/0.77 to 0.8
0.8.0.8
1.9/2.0,2.0 Fig. C Fig. D Fig. E
Aux. terminal box
Approx.weight [kg] 28 29 32 46 63 73 111 133 190 197 235 280 296 380 510 570
Protective
(for fan) Main terminal box
Functions
Aux. terminal box Aux. terminal box
(for fan) (for PG) Main terminal box L D
* Only the MVK8095A (0.75 kW) is a self-cooled type. A R KL
27
L D
D A R KD
L AIR
A R KL
22
Aux. terminal box Main terminal box
102
Q
I
3-phase 400V series standard specifications
AIR Q
Q
Dimensions
I
AIR
External
KD
QR QR QR
C
C
C
G
G
2- 22 AIR
G
Item Specifications 2- 22 K
(L&R) J Z
K
J
E E
Z 22
K2 K1 J Z
E E F F XB Aux. terminal box
F F XB M F F XB E E
M
Dedicated motor rated output [kW] 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 90 110 132 160 200 220 N N (for PG) N M
Applicable motor type (MVK_) 8115A 8133A 8135A 8165A 8167A 8184A 8185A 8187A 8207A 8208A 9224A 9254A 9256A 9284A 9286A 528KA 528LA 531FA [Unit: mm]
Functions of Parts
Moment of inertia of rotor J [kg • m2] 0.016 0.030 0.037 0.085 0.11 0.21 0.23 0.34 0.41 0.47 0.53 0.88 1.03 1.54 1.77 1.72 1.83 2.33 Motor
Names and
Dimensions Shaft extension Approx.
rated
Type Fig weight
Rotor GD [kgf • m2] 0.065 0.12 0.15 0.34 0.47 0.83 0.92 1.34 1.65 1.87 2.12 3.52 4.12 6.16 7.08 6.88 7.32 9.32 output
[kg]
[kW] A C D E F G I J K K1 K2 KD KL L M N R XB Z Q QR S T U W
Base speed/Max. speed [r/min] 1500/3600 1500/3000 1500/2400 1500/2000
0.75 MVK8095A 201.5 204 370 28
Vibration V10 or less V15 or less 90 70 62.5 10 195 35.5 35.5 189 170 150 168.5 56 10 50 24j6
1.5 MVK8097A 277.5 446 29

Voltage [V], 200 to 210V/50Hz,

400 to 420V/50Hz,400 to 440V/60Hz 400V/50Hz,400,440V/60Hz A 203 27 7 4 8
Frequency [Hz] 200 to 230V/60Hz 2.2 MVK8107A 292 100 80 12.5 238 40 190 485 195 170 193 63 32
Single phase, 4P 3-phase, 4P 40 60 0.5 28j6
Number of phases/poles 3.7 MVK8115A 299 112 236 95 70 14 270 205 499 224 175 200 70 46
Cooling fan 80/ 12
Input power [W] 40/50 90/120 150/210 270/390 2200 3700 5.5 MVK8113A 309 50 548 180 239 63
120 B 132 273 108 17 311 45 34 223 250 89 80 38k6 10
7.5 MVK8135A 328 89 586 212 258 73
0.27/ 0.39/ 7.8/
Current [A] 0.29/0.27 to 0.31 0.38/0.39 to 0.4 1.0/1.0,1.0 4.6/4.3,4.1 8 5
0.24 to 0.25 0.4,0.4 7.1,7.6 11 MVK8165A 400 105 723 250 323 111
Approx.weight [kg] 160 321 127 18 376 50 63 272 300 108 1 42k6 12
46 63 73 111 133 190 197 235 280 296 380 510 570 710 760 1270 1310 1630 15 MVK8167A 422 127 767 300 345 133
48
18.5 MVK8184A A 14.5 110 190
435 120.5 - - 786.5 292 351.5 48k6 9 5.5 14
Wiring Diagram
22 MVK8185A 180 376 139.5 20 428 75 75 305 350 121 1.5 197
30 MVK8187A 454 139.5 60

3-phase 400V series standard specifications Common Specifications
824.5 330 370.5 55m6 10 6 16 235
37 MVK8207A 280
490 200 411 159 152.5 466 85 364 915.5 390 360 425.5 133 60m6
Item Specifications Item Specifications 45 MVK8208A C 25 80 18.5 11 7 18 296
Dedicated motor rated output [kW] 250 280 300 315 355 400 Insulation class/Number of poles Class F/4P 55 MVK9224A 723 225 445 178 143 515 95 391 1155 436 366 432 149 140 65m6 380
Options
Applicable motor type (MVK_) 531GA 531HA 535GA 535GA 535HA 535JA Main terminal box (lug type): 3 or 6 main circuit terminals, NTC thermister terminals 75 MVK9254A 693.5 155.5 80 1157 411 463.5 2 510
= 2 pcs (MVK 8 series), 3 pcs (MVK 9 series, MVK 5 series, 1PC is a spare). 250 545 203 30 743 106 506 168 75m6 12 7.5 20
Moment of inertia of rotor J [kg • m2] 2.52 2.76 5.99 5.99 6.53 7.18
Terminal design 90 MVK9256A 711.5 174.5 1194 449 483.5 570
Rotor GD [kgf • m2] 10.08 11.04 23.96 23.96 26.12 28.72 Auxiliary terminal box (terminal block): Pulse encoder (P6P, P6M,PA, PB, SS), D 100 120
110 MVK9284A 764 184 1308 468 544 710
Base speed/Max. speed [r/min] 1500/2000 Cooling fan (FU, FV, FW)
605 35 798 203 557 24
Vibration V15 or less Mounting method Legs mounted (IMB3) NOTE: Contact FUJI for other methods. 132 MVK9286A 789.5 209.5 1359 519 569.5 760
Warranty
280 228.5 190 85m6 22
Voltage [V], IP44, Totally enclosed forced-ventilation system with cooling fan motor. 160 MVK528JA 1230
400V/50Hz,400,440V/60Hz 1015.5 628 228.5 30 1234 125 120 210 1604 560 557 588.5 1
Frequency [Hz] Degree of protection, Cooling method A cooling fan blows air over the motor toward the drive-end.
200 MVK528LA 170 14 9 1350
Number of phases/poles 3-phase, 4P * Only the MVK8095A (0.75 kW) is a self-cooled type.
220 MVK531FA 1690
Cooling fan Installation location Indoor, altitude 1000m or less.
Delivery Period
Input power [W] 3700
Ambient temperature, humidity -10 to +40°C, 90%RH or less (no condensation) 250 MVK531GA 1073 315 689 254 254 1425 150 140 240 1713 630 648 640 216 95m6 25 1750
and Code
Color Munsell N5 280 MVK531HA E - 102 413 1820
Current [A] 7.8/7.1,7.6
MVK8 series: JEM1466 or JEC-2137-2000,
Standard conformity 300 36 28 2
Approx.weight [kg] 1685 1745 2230 2230 2310 2420 MVK9 and MVK5 series: JEC-2137-2000 MVK535GA 2230
315
Pulse encoder (1024P/R, DC+5V, A ,B ,Z, U, V, W line driver output),
Standard built-in part 1111 355 778 305 355 1510 160 180 330 1956 730 890 845 280 210 100m6 16 10 28
NTC thermistor 1 pc (2 pcs for 110kW or more), cooling fan 355 MVK535HA 2310
Guidelines for
Note 1) For motors applicable with 55 kW or more, the torque is accurate to ±5%.If you need more accuracy, contact Fuji. 400 MVK535JA 2420
Note 2) If you need a motor other than the dedicated motor with 4 poles and base speed of 1500 r/min, contact Fuji Electric.
Note 1) MVK8095A (0.75kW) is a natural cooling type motor (cooling system: IC410). Note 2) MVK8095A (0.75kW) has the cable lead-in hole of 22 (in 1 place).
Note 3) MVK9224A (55kW) has an aux. terminal box (for fan) as a supplement for Fig. C.
0 0
Note 4) Allowable tolerance of dimension: Height of rotary shaft C 250 mm −0.5mm, C > 250mm −1.0 mm
30 31
Dedicated motor Specifications (Synchronous motor with sensor) External dimensions of dedicated motors (Synchronous motor with sensor)
3-phase 200V series standard specification GNF2
Standard
Item Specifications Shaft extension
Dedicated motor rated output [kW] 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 90
Dedicated motor type (GNF_) 2114A 2115A 2117A 2118A 2136A 2137A 2139A 2165A 2167A 2185A 2187A 2207A
Common
Moment of inertia of rotor [kg • m2] 0.018 0.021 0.027 0.036 0.065 0.070 0.090 0.153 0.191 0.350 0.467 0.805
Rotor GD2 [kgf • m2] 0.072 0.084 0.107 0.143 0.259 0.281 0.360 0.610 0.763 1.401 1.868 3.220
Base speed/Max. speed [r/min] 1500/2000 Fig. A Fig. B Fig. C
Rated current [A] 20/20 29/29 42/42 57/57 71/70 82/81 113/108 144/144 165/165 200/200 270/270 316/316 Encoder connector Encoder connector Encoder connector
L D L D L D
Vibration V10 or less A R A R A R KL
Functions
KL KL
Terminal
Aux. terminal box Main terminal box Aux. terminal box Main terminal box Aux. terminal box Main terminal box Q
Q
Voltage [V], frequency [Hz] 200 to 240,50/60 200 to 210/50,200 to 230/60 AIR
Q AIR AIR
Number of phases/poles 3-phase, 2P 3-phase, 4P
I
Cooling fan
I
S
S
KD
S
KD KD
QR QR
Input power [W] 38 to 44/56 to 58 54 to 58/70 to 78 90/120 150/210
C
QR
C
2- 22 2- 22
G
K J Z 22 K J Z 2- 22
22 (L&R) 22 K J Z
Current [A] 0.13 to 0.16/0.18 to 0.16 0.18 to 0.18/0.22 to 0.21 0.49/0.44 to 0.48 0.75/0.77 to 0.8 (L&R)
G
F F XB E E F F XB E E F F XB (L&R)
E E
N M N M N M
Approx.weight [kg] 51 55 69 78 100 106 127 170 192 247 325 420
Protective
Functions
Fig. D Fig. E L D Fig. F L D
A R KL A R KL
L
Aux. terminal box (for fan) Main terminal box Aux. terminal box (for fan) Main terminal box
A R D
KD 22 KD 22
Aux. terminal box KD KL 2- 22 Encoder connector Encoder connector
22 (L&R) 22 22
Main terminal box
3-phase 400V series standard specification

Encoder connector
Dimensions
Q
AIR
External
Q Q
I
AIR AIR
S
Item Specifications QR
S
C
QR QR
G
C
C
K J Z AIR AIR
G
Dedicated motor rated output [kW] 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 90 F
N
F XB
E E K J Z K J Z
M F F XB E E F F XB E E
N N
Dedicated motor type (GNF_) 2114A 2115A 2117A 2118A 2136A 2137A 2139A 2165A 2167A 2185A 2187A 2207A M M
Functions of Parts
Names and
[Unit: mm]
Rotor GD2 [kgf • m2] 0.072 0.084 0.107 0.143 0.259 0.281 0.360 0.610 0.763 1.401 1.868 3.220 Motor Dimensions Shaft extension Approx.
rated Frame
output Type Fig weight
no. A C D E F G I J K KD KL L M N R XB Z Q QR S T U W Y
Base speed/Max. speed [r/min] 1500/2000 [kW] [kg]
Rated current [A] 10/10 15/15 21/21 29/29 36/35 41/41 57/54 72/72 83/83 100/100 135/135 158/158 5.5 GNF2114A 335.5 112 235 95 70 14 270 40 50 34 200 555.5 224 175 220 70 12 80 0.5 38k6 8 5 10 M10X20 51
112Mh
7.5 GNF2115A 335.5 112 235 95 70 14 270 40 50 34 200 555.5 224 175 220 70 12 80 0.5 38k6 8 5 10 M10X20 55
Vibration

V10 or less

11 GNF2117A 380.5 112 235 95 100 18 270 55 50 48 235 698.5 228 238 318 108 14.5 110 1 42k6 8 5 12 M10X20 69
Voltage [V], frequency [Hz] 200 to 240,50/60 400 to 420/50,400 to 440/60 112Jh
15 GNF2118A A 380.5 112 235 95 100 18 270 55 50 48 235 698.5 228 238 318 108 14.5 110 1 42k6 8 5 12 M10X20 78
Number of phases/poles 3-phase, 2P 3-phase, 4P 108 101.5 20 311 45 50 48 247 705.5 250 14.5 110 1.5
Cooling fan 18.5 GNF2136A 386 132 272 238 319.5 108 48k6 9 5.5 14 M10X20 100
Input power [W] 38 to 44/56 to 58 54 to 58/70 to 78 90/120 150/210 132Lh
22 GNF2137A 386 132 272 108 101.5 20 311 45 50 48 247 705.5 250 238 319.5 108 14.5 110 1.5 48k6 9 5.5 14 M10X20 106
Current [A] 0.13 to 0.16/0.18 to 0.16 0.18 to 0.18/0.22 to 0.21 0.27/0.24 to 0.25 0.38/0.39 to 0.4 30 GNF2139A 132Hh 424.5 132 272 108 140 20 311 45 50 60 247 782.5 250 313 358 108 14.5 110 1.5 55m6 10 6 16 M10X20 127
Approx.weight [kg] 51 55 69 78 100 106 127 170 192 247 325 420 37 GNF2165A 160Lg 470.5 160 319 139.5 127 20 376 75 75 80 320 845.5 350 300 375 108 18.5 140 2 60m6 11 7 18 M12X25 170
45 GNF2167A 160Jg B 501 160 319 139.5 157.5 20 376 75 75 80 320 906.5 350 370 405.5 108 18.5 140 2 60m6 11 7 18 M12X25 192
55 GNF2185A 180Lg 510 180 375 159 139.5 25 428 80 85 80 356 910.5 390 330 400.5 121 18.5 140 2 65m6 11 7 18 M12X25 247
75 GNF2187A 180Jg C 576 180 375 159 177.5 25 428 100 100 80 356 1061.5 420 450 485.5 168 24 140 2 75m6 12 7.5 20 M12X25 325
90 GNF2207A 200Jg 618.5 200 410 178 200 25 549 100 100 80 107 1126.5 450 479 508 168 24 140 2 75m6 12 7.5 20 M12X25 420
3-phase 400V series standard specification Common Specifications 110 GNF2224B 225Kg D 711 225 446 203 200 28 628 100 120 80 142 1249 506 526 538 168 24 170 1 85m6 14 9 22 M20×35 520
Wiring Diagram
132 GNF2226B 225Hg 761 225 446 203 250 28 628 100 120 80 142 1349 506 626 588 168 24 170 1 85m6 14 9 22 M20×35 580
160 GNF2254B 829 250 508 228.5 280 32 763 100 120 80 203 1469 557 677 640 190 24 170 1 95m6 14 9 25 M20×35 760
Item Specifications Item Specifications 250Hg E
200 GNF2256B 829 250 505 228.5 280 32 763 100 120 80 203 1469 557 677 640 190 24 170 1 95m6 14 9 25 M20×35 810
Dedicated motor rated output [kW] 110 132 160 200 220 250 280 300 Insulation class/Number of poles Class F/6P 220 GNF2284B 881 280 570 254 280 35 878 120 120 102 303 1521 628 680 640 190 28 170 1 95m6 14 9 25 M20×35 1020
Main terminal box (lug type): 3 or 6 main circuit terminals 250 GNF2284B 881 280 570 254 280 35 878 120 120 102 303 1521 628 680 640 190 28 170 1 95m6 14 9 25 M20×35 1020
Dedicated motor type (GNF_) 2224B 2226B 2254B 2256B 2284B 2284B 2286B 2286B 280Jf F
280 GNF2286B 881 280 570 254 280 35 878 120 120 102 303 1521 628 680 640 190 28 170 1 95m6 14 9 25 M20×35 1080
Moment of inertia of rotor [kg • m2] 0.882 0.994 1.96 2.22 2.89 3.24 NTC thermister terminals = 2 pcs(1 pc is a spare), 110kW or more
Terminal design
Options
300 GNF2286B 881 280 570 254 280 35 878 120 120 102 303 1521 628 680 640 190 28 170 1 95m6 14 9 25 M20×35 1080
Rotor GD2 [kgf • m2] 3.53 3.98 7.84 8.88 11.6 13.0 Auxiliary terminal box (terminal block): cooling fan (FU, FV, FW)
Note 1) The models of 110kW or higher are designed to be coupled directly to the load. Contact Fuji in case of coupled to belt.
Base speed/Max. speed [r/min] 1500/2000 Pulse encoder (connector type), cooling fan (FU, FV, FW) Note 2) Allowable tolerance of dimension: Height of rotary shaft C 250mm 0 0
−0.5 mm, C > 250mm −1.0 mm
Rated current [A] 198 232 273 340 369 420 480 520 Rotation direction CCW direction when viewed from operator
Connector specifications for encoder connection [Manufacturer: Japan Aviation Electronics] Terminal arrangement diagram
Vibration V10 or less Mounting method Legs mounted (IMB3) (NOTE): Contact FUJI for other methods. Connector NO. arrangement diagram on plug side Connector NO. Symbols on plate Encoder signal
Items prepared by customer
Voltage [V] 380,400,415/400,415,440,460 Overload resistance 150% 1min (*1) Motor Receptacle installed to motor 1 +5V DC+5V
Warranty
Type Straight plug Angle plug 2 0V 0V
Number of phases/poles 3-phase, 4P Time rating S1 Type Type Type 3 A A
4 A Anot
Cooling fan Power frequency 50/60 IP44, Totally enclosed forced-ventilation system with cooling fan motor. JN2AW15PL1 JN2DW15SL1 JN2FW15SL1 5 B B
Degree of protection, Cooling method 6 B Bnot
A cooling fan blows air over the motor toward the drive-end. (15P receptacle) (15P straight plug) (15P angle plug)
Input power [W] 80/120 270/390 7 Z Z
8 Z Znot
0.36,0.38,0.41/ 0.95,0.95,1/1,1,1,1 Installation location Indoor, altitude 1000m or less. GNF2 Terminal of receptacle installed to motor Recommended terminal (solder connection)
Delivery Period
9 U U
Current [A] type Type Terminal type (Note 2) Max applicable cable size 10 Unot
U
0.4,0.4,0.4,0.4 Ambient temperature and humidity -10 to +40°C, 90% RH or less (no condensation)
and Code
11 V V
JN1-22-26P AWG20
Approx.weight [kg] 520 580 760 810 1020 1080 Noise 5.5kW to 90kW:80 dB(A) or less at 1m,110kW to 300kW:90 dB (A) or less at 1m JN1-22-22F-PKG100 12 V Vnot
(Crimp type pin) (Jacketed OD: 1.5mm or less) 13 W W
Vibration resistance 6.86m/s2 (0.7G) 14 W Wnot
15 − −
Painting color Munsell N1.2
Note1) The Following PG shield cable is recommended.
Standard conformity JEM 1487: 2005
Kind Braided shielded cable (twisted pair cable, cable OD: approx. 10)
Pulse encoder (1024 P/R, DC + 5 V, A ,B ,Z, U, V, W line driver output), No. of cores 14 cores or more
Guidelines for
Standard built-in part Diameter 0.2mm2 to 0.3mm2
NTC thermistor 1 pc (2 pcs for 110 kW or more), cooling fan Jacketed OD 1.5 or less
*1) When using the HD Specification, 150% for 1 min due to motor restriction. Note2) The PKG of contact terminal type is in bulk by 100 pieces.
Note3) Connect the contact terminal by soldering.
Note4) Contact Fuji if preparing the item mentioned above is difficult.
They are available as options. (Specify the plug type and cable length.)
32 33
Dedicated motor Specifications (Synchronous motor with sensor) External dimensions of dedicated motors (Synchronous motor with sensor)
3-phase 200V series standard specification GNF2
Standard
Item Specifications Shaft extension
Dedicated motor rated output [kW] 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 90
Dedicated motor type (GNF_) 2114A 2115A 2117A 2118A 2136A 2137A 2139A 2165A 2167A 2185A 2187A 2207A
Common
Rotor GD2 [kgf • m2] 0.072 0.084 0.107 0.143 0.259 0.281 0.360 0.610 0.763 1.401 1.868 3.220
Base speed/Max. speed [r/min] 1500/2000 Fig. A Fig. B Fig. C
Rated current [A] 20/20 29/29 42/42 57/57 71/70 82/81 113/108 144/144 165/165 200/200 270/270 316/316 Encoder connector Encoder connector Encoder connector
L D L D L D
Vibration V10 or less A R A R A R KL
Functions
KL KL
Terminal
Aux. terminal box Main terminal box Aux. terminal box Main terminal box Aux. terminal box Main terminal box Q
Q
Voltage [V], frequency [Hz] 200 to 240,50/60 200 to 210/50,200 to 230/60 AIR
Q AIR AIR
Number of phases/poles 3-phase, 2P 3-phase, 4P
I
Cooling fan
I
S
S
KD
S
KD KD
QR QR
Input power [W] 38 to 44/56 to 58 54 to 58/70 to 78 90/120 150/210
C
QR
C
2- 22 2- 22
G
K J Z 22 K J Z 2- 22
22 (L&R) 22 K J Z
Current [A] 0.13 to 0.16/0.18 to 0.16 0.18 to 0.18/0.22 to 0.21 0.49/0.44 to 0.48 0.75/0.77 to 0.8 (L&R)
G
F F XB E E F F XB E E F F XB (L&R)
E E
N M N M N M
Approx.weight [kg] 51 55 69 78 100 106 127 170 192 247 325 420
Protective
Functions
Fig. D Fig. E L D Fig. F L D
A R KL A R KL
L
Aux. terminal box (for fan) Main terminal box Aux. terminal box (for fan) Main terminal box
A R D
KD 22 KD 22
Aux. terminal box KD KL 2- 22 Encoder connector Encoder connector
22 (L&R) 22 22
Main terminal box
3-phase 400V series standard specification

Encoder connector
Dimensions
Q
AIR
External
Q Q
I
AIR AIR
S
Item Specifications QR
S
C
QR QR
G
C
C
K J Z AIR AIR
G
Dedicated motor rated output [kW] 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 90 F
N
F XB
E E K J Z K J Z
M F F XB E E F F XB E E
N N
Dedicated motor type (GNF_) 2114A 2115A 2117A 2118A 2136A 2137A 2139A 2165A 2167A 2185A 2187A 2207A M M
Functions of Parts
Names and
[Unit: mm]
Rotor GD2 [kgf • m2] 0.072 0.084 0.107 0.143 0.259 0.281 0.360 0.610 0.763 1.401 1.868 3.220 Motor Dimensions Shaft extension Approx.
rated Frame
output Type Fig weight
no. A C D E F G I J K KD KL L M N R XB Z Q QR S T U W Y
Base speed/Max. speed [r/min] 1500/2000 [kW] [kg]
Rated current [A] 10/10 15/15 21/21 29/29 36/35 41/41 57/54 72/72 83/83 100/100 135/135 158/158 5.5 GNF2114A 335.5 112 235 95 70 14 270 40 50 34 200 555.5 224 175 220 70 12 80 0.5 38k6 8 5 10 M10X20 51
112Mh
7.5 GNF2115A 335.5 112 235 95 70 14 270 40 50 34 200 555.5 224 175 220 70 12 80 0.5 38k6 8 5 10 M10X20 55
Vibration

V10 or less

11 GNF2117A 380.5 112 235 95 100 18 270 55 50 48 235 698.5 228 238 318 108 14.5 110 1 42k6 8 5 12 M10X20 69
Voltage [V], frequency [Hz] 200 to 240,50/60 400 to 420/50,400 to 440/60 112Jh
15 GNF2118A A 380.5 112 235 95 100 18 270 55 50 48 235 698.5 228 238 318 108 14.5 110 1 42k6 8 5 12 M10X20 78
Number of phases/poles 3-phase, 2P 3-phase, 4P 108 101.5 20 311 45 50 48 247 705.5 250 14.5 110 1.5
Cooling fan 18.5 GNF2136A 386 132 272 238 319.5 108 48k6 9 5.5 14 M10X20 100
Input power [W] 38 to 44/56 to 58 54 to 58/70 to 78 90/120 150/210 132Lh
22 GNF2137A 386 132 272 108 101.5 20 311 45 50 48 247 705.5 250 238 319.5 108 14.5 110 1.5 48k6 9 5.5 14 M10X20 106
Current [A] 0.13 to 0.16/0.18 to 0.16 0.18 to 0.18/0.22 to 0.21 0.27/0.24 to 0.25 0.38/0.39 to 0.4 30 GNF2139A 132Hh 424.5 132 272 108 140 20 311 45 50 60 247 782.5 250 313 358 108 14.5 110 1.5 55m6 10 6 16 M10X20 127
Approx.weight [kg] 51 55 69 78 100 106 127 170 192 247 325 420 37 GNF2165A 160Lg 470.5 160 319 139.5 127 20 376 75 75 80 320 845.5 350 300 375 108 18.5 140 2 60m6 11 7 18 M12X25 170
45 GNF2167A 160Jg B 501 160 319 139.5 157.5 20 376 75 75 80 320 906.5 350 370 405.5 108 18.5 140 2 60m6 11 7 18 M12X25 192
55 GNF2185A 180Lg 510 180 375 159 139.5 25 428 80 85 80 356 910.5 390 330 400.5 121 18.5 140 2 65m6 11 7 18 M12X25 247
75 GNF2187A 180Jg C 576 180 375 159 177.5 25 428 100 100 80 356 1061.5 420 450 485.5 168 24 140 2 75m6 12 7.5 20 M12X25 325
90 GNF2207A 200Jg 618.5 200 410 178 200 25 549 100 100 80 107 1126.5 450 479 508 168 24 140 2 75m6 12 7.5 20 M12X25 420
3-phase 400V series standard specification Common Specifications 110 GNF2224B 225Kg D 711 225 446 203 200 28 628 100 120 80 142 1249 506 526 538 168 24 170 1 85m6 14 9 22 M20×35 520
Wiring Diagram
132 GNF2226B 225Hg 761 225 446 203 250 28 628 100 120 80 142 1349 506 626 588 168 24 170 1 85m6 14 9 22 M20×35 580
160 GNF2254B 829 250 508 228.5 280 32 763 100 120 80 203 1469 557 677 640 190 24 170 1 95m6 14 9 25 M20×35 760
Item Specifications Item Specifications 250Hg E
200 GNF2256B 829 250 505 228.5 280 32 763 100 120 80 203 1469 557 677 640 190 24 170 1 95m6 14 9 25 M20×35 810
Dedicated motor rated output [kW] 110 132 160 200 220 250 280 300 Insulation class/Number of poles Class F/6P 220 GNF2284B 881 280 570 254 280 35 878 120 120 102 303 1521 628 680 640 190 28 170 1 95m6 14 9 25 M20×35 1020
Main terminal box (lug type): 3 or 6 main circuit terminals 250 GNF2284B 881 280 570 254 280 35 878 120 120 102 303 1521 628 680 640 190 28 170 1 95m6 14 9 25 M20×35 1020
Dedicated motor type (GNF_) 2224B 2226B 2254B 2256B 2284B 2284B 2286B 2286B 280Jf F
280 GNF2286B 881 280 570 254 280 35 878 120 120 102 303 1521 628 680 640 190 28 170 1 95m6 14 9 25 M20×35 1080
Moment of inertia of rotor [kg • m2] 0.882 0.994 1.96 2.22 2.89 3.24 NTC thermister terminals = 2 pcs(1 pc is a spare), 110kW or more
Terminal design
Options
300 GNF2286B 881 280 570 254 280 35 878 120 120 102 303 1521 628 680 640 190 28 170 1 95m6 14 9 25 M20×35 1080
Rotor GD2 [kgf • m2] 3.53 3.98 7.84 8.88 11.6 13.0 Auxiliary terminal box (terminal block): cooling fan (FU, FV, FW)
Note 1) The models of 110kW or higher are designed to be coupled directly to the load. Contact Fuji in case of coupled to belt.
Base speed/Max. speed [r/min] 1500/2000 Pulse encoder (connector type), cooling fan (FU, FV, FW) Note 2) Allowable tolerance of dimension: Height of rotary shaft C 250mm 0 0
−0.5 mm, C > 250mm −1.0 mm
Rated current [A] 198 232 273 340 369 420 480 520 Rotation direction CCW direction when viewed from operator
Connector specifications for encoder connection [Manufacturer: Japan Aviation Electronics] Terminal arrangement diagram
Vibration V10 or less Mounting method Legs mounted (IMB3) (NOTE): Contact FUJI for other methods. Connector NO. arrangement diagram on plug side Connector NO. Symbols on plate Encoder signal
Items prepared by customer
Voltage [V] 380,400,415/400,415,440,460 Overload resistance 150% 1min (*1) Motor Receptacle installed to motor 1 +5V DC+5V
Warranty
Type Straight plug Angle plug 2 0V 0V
Number of phases/poles 3-phase, 4P Time rating S1 Type Type Type 3 A A
4 A Anot
Cooling fan Power frequency 50/60 IP44, Totally enclosed forced-ventilation system with cooling fan motor. JN2AW15PL1 JN2DW15SL1 JN2FW15SL1 5 B B
Degree of protection, Cooling method 6 B Bnot
A cooling fan blows air over the motor toward the drive-end. (15P receptacle) (15P straight plug) (15P angle plug)
Input power [W] 80/120 270/390 7 Z Z
8 Z Znot
0.36,0.38,0.41/ 0.95,0.95,1/1,1,1,1 Installation location Indoor, altitude 1000m or less. GNF2 Terminal of receptacle installed to motor Recommended terminal (solder connection)
Delivery Period
9 U U
Current [A] type Type Terminal type (Note 2) Max applicable cable size 10 Unot
U
0.4,0.4,0.4,0.4 Ambient temperature and humidity -10 to +40°C, 90% RH or less (no condensation)
and Code
11 V V
JN1-22-26P AWG20
Approx.weight [kg] 520 580 760 810 1020 1080 Noise 5.5kW to 90kW:80 dB(A) or less at 1m,110kW to 300kW:90 dB (A) or less at 1m JN1-22-22F-PKG100 12 V Vnot
(Crimp type pin) (Jacketed OD: 1.5mm or less) 13 W W
Vibration resistance 6.86m/s2 (0.7G) 14 W Wnot
15 − −
Painting color Munsell N1.2
Note1) The Following PG shield cable is recommended.
Standard conformity JEM 1487: 2005
Kind Braided shielded cable (twisted pair cable, cable OD: approx. 10)
Pulse encoder (1024 P/R, DC + 5 V, A ,B ,Z, U, V, W line driver output), No. of cores 14 cores or more
Guidelines for
Standard built-in part Diameter 0.2mm2 to 0.3mm2
NTC thermistor 1 pc (2 pcs for 110 kW or more), cooling fan Jacketed OD 1.5 or less
*1) When using the HD Specification, 150% for 1 min due to motor restriction. Note2) The PKG of contact terminal type is in bulk by 100 pieces.
Note3) Connect the contact terminal by soldering.
Note4) Contact Fuji if preparing the item mentioned above is difficult.
They are available as options. (Specify the plug type and cable length.)
32 33
Wiring Diagram
Basic Wiring Diagram Basic Wiring Diagram
Standard
(Note 9) Thermal relay
(Note 13) Thermal relay Dedicated motor Transformer (Note 11) Dedicated motor
Transformer (Note 15)
(Note 13)
Common
(Note 7) Braking resistor (option) (Note 1)
MCCB (Note 2) PWM converter (Note 5)
or Inverter stack
Magnetic contactor (Note 13) (Note 13) (Note 13) Ground
ELCB (MC) Filtering circuit Charge circuit FRENIC-VG
terminal
Power supply
400V Series
(Note 6) 380V to 480V
Braking resistor (option) 50 / 60 Hz
Sequence circuit
Functions
Terminal
Braking unit BU (Note 13)
(Note 5) (option)
DC REACTOR
(option) Fan power AUX input (Note 4) NTC
Ground terminal (Note 6)
Base Current Voltage thermistor
(Note 2) (Note 8) driver detection detection
Inverter unit Control power AUX input (Note 3)
Power supply MCCB or ELCB Magnetic contactor FRENIC-VG Ground Link circuit
200V series (Note 1) (MC) terminal
(Note 6) voltage detection
Charge
200 to 220V lamp
Protective
Functions
50/60Hz Speed setting input Speed magnetic-flux (Note 8)
calculator
400V series
Power voltage switching connector (Note 8)
380V to 480V (Note 6)
50/60Hz "CN UX" (Note 11)
Fan power connector Analog input 1 Speed/
Analog input magnetic-flux
Control power AUX input "CN R" / "CN W" [OFF] Input signal off Voltage input
(Note 3) (Note 11) (Note 9) NTC (Note 8) position detector
Thermistor (0 to ± 10VDC)
Base Current Voltage (Note 6)
driver detection detection Current input
Dimensions
Fan power AUX input (4 to 20mADC)
Voltage
External
(Note 4) Analog input 2
(Note 9) detection [OFF] Input signal off
Charge lamp Open collector output
Complimentary output
Processing
Speed setting input Speed magnetic-flux (Note 12) controller (Note 8)
calculator
(Note 9)
Signal input section

(Note 9) Alarm relay output (for any fault)
Functions of Parts
Analog input 1 Speed/ Safety signal (Note 12) (30A, 30B, 30C)
Names and
[OFF] Input signal off Voltage input Contact
(Note 12) (0 to ±10VDC) position detector (Note 8)
point output
(Note 9)
Current input Relay output
(4 to 20mADC) (Note 7)
Analog input 2 [RDY] Operation ready completion
(Note 13)
Signal output section

[OFF] Input signal off Open collector output (Note 6)
Forward operation and Transistor output 4
Complimentary output stopping command [N-DT1] Speed detection 1
Reverse operation and

Processing controller
Transistor output 3

(Note 12) stopping command
[N-AR] Speed equivalent
Digital input 1 Transistor
[SS1] Multistep speed selection
Transistor output 2 output
[N-AG1] Speed agreement 1
Digital input 2
(Note 16) Alarm relay output (for any fault) [SS2] Multistep speed selection
Transistor output 1
Safety signal (30A, 30B, 30C) Digital input 3
[N-EX] Speed existence
[SS4] Multistep speed selection (Note 7)
Digital input Digital input 4
Contact point output Transistor output common
(Note 12) [SS8] Multistep speed selection
(Note 10)
Digital input 5
Relay output [RT1] ASR acceleration/deceleration Analog output 1
[RDY] Operation ready completion Digital input 6 KEYPAD [N-FB1±] Speed detection 1
[RT2] ASR acceleration/deceleration Analog output 2 Analog
Digital input 7 [IT-REF±] Torque current command

(Note 9)
[BX] Coast-to-stop command output
Transistor output 4 Analog output 3
Digital input 8
Forward operation and stopping command [N-DT1] Speed detection 1 [RST] Error reset USB connector [N-REF4]Speed setting 4
Digital input 9 Analog output common
Reverse operation and stopping command Transistor output 3 [THR] External alarm
[N-AR] Speed equivalent (Note 7) Digital input common Data send/receive
(RS-485)
Wiring Diagram
Transistor output
Transistor output 2 (Note 6)
Digital input 1 [N-AG1] Speed agreement 1 (Note 10)
Digital input 2 Transistor output 1 (Note 8)
[SS2] Multistep speed selection [N-EX] Speed existence
Digital input 3
Digital input Digital input 4 Transistor output common
Digital input 5 Analog output 1
[RT1] ASR acceleration/deceleration Keypad [N-FB1±] Speed detection 1
Digital input 6
[RT2] ASR acceleration/deceleration Analog output 2
Options
[IT-REF±] Torque current command Analog output (Note 1) For line protection, the input (primary) side of each converter should be equipped with a recommended (Note 9) The power to the motor cooling fan is 400 to 420 V / 50 Hz or 400 to 440 / 60 Hz. If you use other voltages, it
Digital input 7
[BX] Coast-to-stop command Analog output 3 line circuit breaker (MCCB) or earth leakage circuit breaker (ELCB) with an intercurrence protector. Do must be adjusted by using a transformer.
[N-REF4] Speed setting 4 not use a circuit breaker whose capacity exceeds the recommended capacity. (Note 10) ([M], [11], [THC]) and ([CM]) are insulated in the inverter.
Digital input 8 USB connector
[RST] Error reset (Note 2) Provide an electromagnetic contactor (MC) recommended for each converter to shut off the converter from (Note 11) Confirm that auxiliary contact (manual recovery) of thermal relay can trip the line circuit breaker (MCCB)
Digital input 9 Analog output common the power supply (in addition to the MCCB or ELCB). When the MC, solenoid, or other coil is installed near or electromagnetic contactor (MC)
[THR] External alarm the converter, a surge absorber should be connected in parallel with it. (Note 12) The safety function terminals [EN1][EN2] and [PS] are initially short-connected with conductors.Remove these
(Note 3) Connect this terminal to the power supply when you want to retain all alarm signals when the protection short-connecting terminals when using the safety function.
Digital input common Data send/receive works although you shut off the main power supply of the inverter or to display always the Keypad. You (Note 13) PWM converters of 280kW or larger are connected differently. For connection of the PWM converter
(Note 10) (RS-485)
can run the inverter without supplying power to this terminal. and the charging circuit, see the PWM converter instruction manual.
(Note 4) Connect this when the inverter capacity is 90kW or more.
Warranty
(Note 5) This is a motor grounding terminal.
(Note 12) (Note 6) The wires indicated by should be twisted or shielded wires.Basically the shield of the shielded wire is
connected to the ground, but can be connected to ([M], [11], [THC]) or ([CM] to suppress noises.
This wire should be separated as far as possible (10cm or more preferentially) from the main circuit wires
and should not be laid in a conduit together with them. When crossing the main circuit wires, the
shielded wire should be approximately perpendicular to them.
(Note 7) The functions of Terminals [X1] to [X9] (digital inputs), Terminals [Y1] to [Y4] (transistor outputs),and terminal [Y5A/C]
(Note1) Install a recommended molded-case circuit-breaker (MCCB) or an earth-leakage circuit-breaker (ELCB) (Note8) This is a terminal for grounding the motor. To suppress inverter noise, it is recommended to use this are assigned in the factory.
(with an overcurrent protection function) in the primary circuit of the inverter to protect wiring. At this time, terminal for motor grounding.
Delivery Period
(Note 8) Changeover switch on the control printed circuit board
ensure that the circuit breaker capacity is equivalent to or lower than the recommended capacity. (Note9) Use twisted or shielded cables for the control signals. The shield conductor normally should be grounded, however, if
and Code
(Note2) Install a magnetic contactor (MC) for each inverter to separate the inverter from the power supply, apart from the noise is significantly induced from external devices, it may be suppressed by connecting it to ([M], [11], [THC]) and
MCCB or ELCB, when necessary. Connect a surge absorber in parallel when installing a coil such as the MC or ([CM]). Set apart from the main circuit wiring as far as possible, and avoid installing in the same duct. (It is recommended
solenoid near the inverter. to separate more than 10cm.) If crossed, arrange so that it becomes almost perpendicular to the main circuit wiring.
(Note3) Connect this terminal to the power supply to retain relay alarm signals when the protection function is activated, or to keep the Keypad (Note10) The functions indicated on terminals [X1] to [X9] (digital input), terminals [Y1] to [Y4] (transistor output),
on even when the inverter main power supply is cut. The inverter can be operated without inputting the power to this terminal. and terminals [Y5A/C] (contact output) are those allocated in the factory.
(Note4) Normally this is not necessary to connect. Used when combining the unit such as high power factor PWM (Note11) This is a switching connector of the main circuit (fan power).
converter with power regenerative function. (RHC series) (Note12) This is a switch on the control PCB.
(Note5) When connecting a DC reactor (DCR option), remove the jumper bar from across the inverter main circuit (Note13) The cooling fan power supply of the motor with 7.5kW or less is single-phase. Connect the terminal FU
terminals [P1] and [P(+)]. The DCR must be connected to the units of 55kW (in case of LD) and 75kW or and FV. The cooling fan of the 400V series motor with 7.5kW or less is 200V / 50Hz and 200 to 230V /
larger capacities. Use the DC reactor (option) under the following conditions: the capacity of the power 60Hz. The cooling fan of the 400V series motor with 11kW or more is 400 to 420V / 50Hz and 400 to
transformer is 500kVA or more; or is ten times or more than the inverter rated capacity; or a load from a 440V / 60Hz. When using the cooling fan with a voltage other than these, use a transformer.
Guidelines for
thyristor exists on the same power supply system. (Note14) The ([M], [11], [THC]) and ([CM]) are insulated inside the inverter.
(Note6) A braking transistor is built in the inverters with 55kW or less (200V series) and160kW or less (400V series). (Note15) Confirm by using thermal relay manual recovery that auxiliary contact of thermal relay can trip the line
It can be directly connected across P(+)-DB. circuit breaker (MCCB) or electromagnetic contactor (MC)
(Note7) When connecting a braking resistor to the inverter with the capacity 75kW or more (200V series) and 200kW (Note16) A short-circuit conductor is connected between the safety function terminals [EN1] [EN2] and [PS] as the
or more (400V series), be sure to use a braking unit (option). Connect the braking unit (option) across P (+) factory default. To use this function, remove the short-circuit conductor before connection.
and N (-). The auxiliary terminals [1] and [2] have polarity. Connect them according to the diagram above.
34 35
Wiring Diagram
Basic Wiring Diagram Basic Wiring Diagram
Standard
(Note 9) Thermal relay
(Note 13) Thermal relay Dedicated motor Transformer (Note 11) Dedicated motor
Transformer (Note 15)
(Note 13)
Common
(Note 7) Braking resistor (option) (Note 1)
MCCB (Note 2) PWM converter (Note 5)
or Inverter stack
Magnetic contactor (Note 13) (Note 13) (Note 13) Ground
ELCB (MC) Filtering circuit Charge circuit FRENIC-VG
terminal
Power supply
400V Series
(Note 6) 380V to 480V
Braking resistor (option) 50 / 60 Hz
Sequence circuit
Functions
Terminal
Braking unit BU (Note 13)
(Note 5) (option)
DC REACTOR
(option) Fan power AUX input (Note 4) NTC
Ground terminal (Note 6)
Base Current Voltage thermistor
(Note 2) (Note 8) driver detection detection
Inverter unit Control power AUX input (Note 3)
Power supply MCCB or ELCB Magnetic contactor FRENIC-VG Ground Link circuit
200V series (Note 1) (MC) terminal
(Note 6) voltage detection
Charge
200 to 220V lamp
Protective
Functions
50/60Hz Speed setting input Speed magnetic-flux (Note 8)
calculator
400V series
Power voltage switching connector (Note 8)
380V to 480V (Note 6)
50/60Hz "CN UX" (Note 11)
Fan power connector Analog input 1 Speed/
Control power AUX input "CN R" / "CN W" [OFF] Input signal off Voltage input
(Note 3) (Note 11) (Note 9) NTC (Note 8) position detector
Thermistor (0 to ± 10VDC)
Base Current Voltage (Note 6)
driver detection detection Current input
Dimensions
Fan power AUX input (4 to 20mADC)
Voltage
External
(Note 4) Analog input 2
(Note 9) detection [OFF] Input signal off
Charge lamp Open collector output
Complimentary output
Processing
Speed setting input Speed magnetic-flux (Note 12) controller (Note 8)
calculator
(Note 9)

(Note 9) Alarm relay output (for any fault)
Functions of Parts
Analog input 1 Speed/ Safety signal (Note 12) (30A, 30B, 30C)
Names and
[OFF] Input signal off Voltage input Contact
(Note 12) (0 to ±10VDC) position detector (Note 8)
point output
(Note 9)
Current input Relay output
(4 to 20mADC) (Note 7)
Analog input 2 [RDY] Operation ready completion
(Note 13)

[OFF] Input signal off Open collector output (Note 6)
Forward operation and Transistor output 4
Complimentary output stopping command [N-DT1] Speed detection 1
Reverse operation and

Processing controller
Transistor output 3

(Note 12) stopping command
[N-AR] Speed equivalent
Digital input 1 Transistor
Transistor output 2 output
[N-AG1] Speed agreement 1
Digital input 2
(Note 16) Alarm relay output (for any fault) [SS2] Multistep speed selection
Transistor output 1
Safety signal (30A, 30B, 30C) Digital input 3
[N-EX] Speed existence
[SS4] Multistep speed selection (Note 7)
Digital input Digital input 4
Contact point output Transistor output common
(Note 12) [SS8] Multistep speed selection
(Note 10)
Digital input 5
Relay output [RT1] ASR acceleration/deceleration Analog output 1
[RDY] Operation ready completion Digital input 6 KEYPAD [N-FB1±] Speed detection 1
[RT2] ASR acceleration/deceleration Analog output 2 Analog
Digital input 7 [IT-REF±] Torque current command

(Note 9)
[BX] Coast-to-stop command output
Transistor output 4 Analog output 3
Digital input 8
Forward operation and stopping command [N-DT1] Speed detection 1 [RST] Error reset USB connector [N-REF4]Speed setting 4
Digital input 9 Analog output common
Reverse operation and stopping command Transistor output 3 [THR] External alarm
[N-AR] Speed equivalent (Note 7) Digital input common Data send/receive
(RS-485)
Wiring Diagram
Transistor output
Transistor output 2 (Note 6)
Digital input 1 [N-AG1] Speed agreement 1 (Note 10)
Digital input 2 Transistor output 1 (Note 8)
[SS2] Multistep speed selection [N-EX] Speed existence
Digital input 3
Digital input Digital input 4 Transistor output common
Digital input 5 Analog output 1
[RT1] ASR acceleration/deceleration Keypad [N-FB1±] Speed detection 1
Digital input 6
[RT2] ASR acceleration/deceleration Analog output 2
Options
[IT-REF±] Torque current command Analog output (Note 1) For line protection, the input (primary) side of each converter should be equipped with a recommended (Note 9) The power to the motor cooling fan is 400 to 420 V / 50 Hz or 400 to 440 / 60 Hz. If you use other voltages, it
Digital input 7
[BX] Coast-to-stop command Analog output 3 line circuit breaker (MCCB) or earth leakage circuit breaker (ELCB) with an intercurrence protector. Do must be adjusted by using a transformer.
[N-REF4] Speed setting 4 not use a circuit breaker whose capacity exceeds the recommended capacity. (Note 10) ([M], [11], [THC]) and ([CM]) are insulated in the inverter.
Digital input 8 USB connector
[RST] Error reset (Note 2) Provide an electromagnetic contactor (MC) recommended for each converter to shut off the converter from (Note 11) Confirm that auxiliary contact (manual recovery) of thermal relay can trip the line circuit breaker (MCCB)
Digital input 9 Analog output common the power supply (in addition to the MCCB or ELCB). When the MC, solenoid, or other coil is installed near or electromagnetic contactor (MC)
[THR] External alarm the converter, a surge absorber should be connected in parallel with it. (Note 12) The safety function terminals [EN1][EN2] and [PS] are initially short-connected with conductors.Remove these
(Note 3) Connect this terminal to the power supply when you want to retain all alarm signals when the protection short-connecting terminals when using the safety function.
Digital input common Data send/receive works although you shut off the main power supply of the inverter or to display always the Keypad. You (Note 13) PWM converters of 280kW or larger are connected differently. For connection of the PWM converter
(Note 10) (RS-485)
can run the inverter without supplying power to this terminal. and the charging circuit, see the PWM converter instruction manual.
(Note 4) Connect this when the inverter capacity is 90kW or more.
Warranty
(Note 5) This is a motor grounding terminal.
(Note 12) (Note 6) The wires indicated by should be twisted or shielded wires.Basically the shield of the shielded wire is
connected to the ground, but can be connected to ([M], [11], [THC]) or ([CM] to suppress noises.
This wire should be separated as far as possible (10cm or more preferentially) from the main circuit wires
and should not be laid in a conduit together with them. When crossing the main circuit wires, the
shielded wire should be approximately perpendicular to them.
(Note 7) The functions of Terminals [X1] to [X9] (digital inputs), Terminals [Y1] to [Y4] (transistor outputs),and terminal [Y5A/C]
(Note1) Install a recommended molded-case circuit-breaker (MCCB) or an earth-leakage circuit-breaker (ELCB) (Note8) This is a terminal for grounding the motor. To suppress inverter noise, it is recommended to use this are assigned in the factory.
(with an overcurrent protection function) in the primary circuit of the inverter to protect wiring. At this time, terminal for motor grounding.
Delivery Period
(Note 8) Changeover switch on the control printed circuit board
ensure that the circuit breaker capacity is equivalent to or lower than the recommended capacity. (Note9) Use twisted or shielded cables for the control signals. The shield conductor normally should be grounded, however, if
and Code
(Note2) Install a magnetic contactor (MC) for each inverter to separate the inverter from the power supply, apart from the noise is significantly induced from external devices, it may be suppressed by connecting it to ([M], [11], [THC]) and
MCCB or ELCB, when necessary. Connect a surge absorber in parallel when installing a coil such as the MC or ([CM]). Set apart from the main circuit wiring as far as possible, and avoid installing in the same duct. (It is recommended
solenoid near the inverter. to separate more than 10cm.) If crossed, arrange so that it becomes almost perpendicular to the main circuit wiring.
(Note3) Connect this terminal to the power supply to retain relay alarm signals when the protection function is activated, or to keep the Keypad (Note10) The functions indicated on terminals [X1] to [X9] (digital input), terminals [Y1] to [Y4] (transistor output),
on even when the inverter main power supply is cut. The inverter can be operated without inputting the power to this terminal. and terminals [Y5A/C] (contact output) are those allocated in the factory.
(Note4) Normally this is not necessary to connect. Used when combining the unit such as high power factor PWM (Note11) This is a switching connector of the main circuit (fan power).
converter with power regenerative function. (RHC series) (Note12) This is a switch on the control PCB.
(Note5) When connecting a DC reactor (DCR option), remove the jumper bar from across the inverter main circuit (Note13) The cooling fan power supply of the motor with 7.5kW or less is single-phase. Connect the terminal FU
terminals [P1] and [P(+)]. The DCR must be connected to the units of 55kW (in case of LD) and 75kW or and FV. The cooling fan of the 400V series motor with 7.5kW or less is 200V / 50Hz and 200 to 230V /
larger capacities. Use the DC reactor (option) under the following conditions: the capacity of the power 60Hz. The cooling fan of the 400V series motor with 11kW or more is 400 to 420V / 50Hz and 400 to
transformer is 500kVA or more; or is ten times or more than the inverter rated capacity; or a load from a 440V / 60Hz. When using the cooling fan with a voltage other than these, use a transformer.
Guidelines for
thyristor exists on the same power supply system. (Note14) The ([M], [11], [THC]) and ([CM]) are insulated inside the inverter.
(Note6) A braking transistor is built in the inverters with 55kW or less (200V series) and160kW or less (400V series). (Note15) Confirm by using thermal relay manual recovery that auxiliary contact of thermal relay can trip the line
It can be directly connected across P(+)-DB. circuit breaker (MCCB) or electromagnetic contactor (MC)
(Note7) When connecting a braking resistor to the inverter with the capacity 75kW or more (200V series) and 200kW (Note16) A short-circuit conductor is connected between the safety function terminals [EN1] [EN2] and [PS] as the
or more (400V series), be sure to use a braking unit (option). Connect the braking unit (option) across P (+) factory default. To use this function, remove the short-circuit conductor before connection.
and N (-). The auxiliary terminals [1] and [2] have polarity. Connect them according to the diagram above.
34 35
Options
Option guides (Example of unit type) Option guides (Example of stack type)
Standard
For main power input and inverter output For main power input and inverter output
3 Power Arrester Technica PC loader for Windows
Common
[CN5 ] Inverter support software
Suppresses induced lightning surges from
(FRENIC-VG loader) Power 3
This software is used to set the function codes
the power source to protect entire equipment Fuse
R S T MCCB connected to the power source. of the inverter from a PC, to manage the data.
or Use a DC common fuse to
EMC compliance filter (coming soon) U V W ELCB [Dealt by Fuji Electric Technica] ("WPS-VG1-STR" is available as free download prevent secondary damage
Functions
[EFL- , FS , FN ] from our website.) MCCB
Terminal
like a broken stack inverter.
or *) It can be set on the N side
Dedicated filter to comply with the European EMC R S T
ELCB to detect blow-out fuse.

Directive (Emission). Install the filter while referring PC loader for Windows
Extension cable for remote control
Inverter support software
U V W
to the details in the installation manual.
[CB- S]
(FRENIC-VG loader)
Power filter for input circuit Technica Cable used for remote control
Protective
Functions
Arrester Technica
[RNF C - ] of the inverter from a PC, to manage the data.
[CN5 ] ("WPS-VG1-STR" is available as free download
This filter can be used for the same purpose as the
Suppresses induced lightning surges from the power from our website.)
EMC compliance filter, but is not an EMC compliance.
Battery for memory backup, source to protect entire equipment connected to the
USB
(miniB) Optional board storing trace back memory and power source.
Filter capacitor for reducing radio noise Technica
Dimensions
calendar function [Dealt by Fuji Electric Technica]
[NFM M315KPD ]
External
RJ-45
for KEYPAD [OPK-BP]
connection
Used to reduce radio noise. This is effective for L1 L2 L3
22kW: optional, 30kW or more:standard equipment P N P N
the AM radio frequency band. Control circuit terminal block
L1' L2' L3'
*Do not use it on the inverter output side.
[Made by Nippon Chemi-con, dealt by Fuji Electric Technica]
Speed setting potentiometer Extension cable for remote control
Functions of Parts
USB [CB- S]
Ferrite ring for reducing radio noise
Names and
R0 T0 R S T (miniB)
Tachometer
[ACL-40B, ACL-74B, F200160] Contactor Cable used for remote control
Contactor
Main circuit terminal block
U V W PWM converter Inverter
Used to reduce radio noise. Suppressive effect to the frequency band is G L1/R L2/S L3/T DB P1 P(+) N(-) U V W G (Stack type) (Stack type)
available by approximately 1MHz or more. This is appropriate as a R S T
simple measure against noise since it affects broad range in the

Braking unit

U V W

frequency band.It is recommended to insert it on the power supply side
if the cable length between a motor and an inverter is short (roughly 20m [BU - C] RJ-45
for KEYPAD
connection
or less) or on the output side if the cable length exceeds 20m.
To be used together with a braking resistor to Battery for memory backup,
increase the inverter braking performance. Peripheral device storing trace back memory and
Power filter for output circuit Technica of ACL / PWM Optional board
calendar function
[RNF S - ] Power regenerative PMW converter, RHC series [OPK-BP]
converter
[RHC - C] Total capacity: Standard equipment
This will become more effective in noise reduction if
used together with the power filter for input circuit. Used for suppressing power source harmonics of Control circuit terminal block
inverters. It is also equipped with a power supply

1 2 3
regenerative function to drastically increase braking Speed setting potentiometer
Output circuit filter [OFL- -4A] Ferrite ring for reducing radio noise
capability and reduce energy consumption.
4 5 6
[ACL-40B, ACL-74B, F200160] Tachometer
Wiring Diagram
Connected to the output of an inverter to: * Use in combination with dedicated reactors for the RHC series.
• Suppress fluctuations of motor terminal voltage. R S T U V W G

Used to reduce radio noise. Suppressive effect to the frequency
• Prevent damages to the motor insulation due to surge Dedicated filter for the RHC series
band is available by approximately 1MHz or more. This is
voltage in 400V series inverter.
Dedicated filter for the RHC series is used if appropriate as a simple measure against noise since it affects
*This filter is not limited by carrier frequency. Also, motor
other electronic equipment is connected to broad range in the frequency band. It is recommended to insert
can be tuned while this option is installed.
X1 Y1 Z1
the same power source. it on the power supply side if the cable length between a motor
and an inverter is short (roughly 20m or less) or on the output
*Use in combination with dedicated filter reactors, filter
X2 Y2 Z2
Options
capacitors and filter resistors. side if the cable length exceeds 20m.
Surge supperession unit
[SSU TA-NS]
Output circuit filter [OFL- -4A]
Surge voltage is generated if the cable between an inverter and
a motor is several ten meters long. This product suppresses the DC REACTOR [DCR - ] Connected to the output of an inverter to:
surge voltage, preventing the motor from being damaged. R S T G
- Suppress fluctuations of motor terminal voltage.
[For power supply normalization]
Warranty
M
Motor
- Prevent damages to the motor insulation due to X1 Y1 Z1
3 1) Use if the power transformer capacity is 500kVA or more and exceeds

Surge killer surge voltage in 400V series inverter.
the inverter rated capacity by 10 times. X2 Y2 Z2
*This filter is not limited by carrier frequency. Also,
Absorbs surge voltage coming from L-load of magnetic 2) Use if the inverter and a thyristor converter are connected to the same
motor can be tuned while this option is installed.
contactor and solenoid valve to protect electronic transformer.
*Check if the thyristor converter uses a commutation reactor. If not,an AC reactor must be connected
devices from malfunctioning. to the power supply side.
Delivery Period
Braking resistor [DB V- ] 3) Connect to prevent trips when trip occurs due to opening/closing of the
and Code
Surge absorber Technica R S T G
phase-advancing capacitor for the power supply lines.
(Connect in parallel to the coil that is a generation source of surge.) Increases braking capability for highly frequent
[S2-A-O (for magnetic contactor and solenoid valve)] stopping and large moment of inertia. When
4) Use if the voltage unbalance exceeds 2%.
Motor M
[For improving the input power-factor and reducing harmonics] 3
[S1-B-O (for mini control relay and timer)] used together with a braking unit, connect this Used to reduce the input harmonic current (correcting power-factor)
to the connection terminal of the braking unit. * For the drop effect, refer to the guideline appendix.
Surge killer for L-load
(Connect to the power circuit that is a generation source of surge.)
Guidelines for
[FSL-323 (for 3-phase)]
Peripheral and structure options
[FSL-123 (for single -phase)]
Attachment for external cooling
* The items indicated with Technica are dealt by Fuji Electric Technica. The attachment to install the heat sink part of the inverter outside the panel. [PBVG7-7.5 (for up to 7.5kW)] [PB-F1-30 (for 11 to 22kW)] * The items indicated with Technica are dealt by Fuji Electric Technica.
36 37
Options
Option guides (Example of unit type) Option guides (Example of stack type)
Standard
For main power input and inverter output For main power input and inverter output
3 Power Arrester Technica PC loader for Windows
Common
[CN5 ] Inverter support software
Suppresses induced lightning surges from
(FRENIC-VG loader) Power 3
the power source to protect entire equipment Fuse
R S T MCCB connected to the power source. of the inverter from a PC, to manage the data.
or Use a DC common fuse to
EMC compliance filter (coming soon) U V W ELCB [Dealt by Fuji Electric Technica] ("WPS-VG1-STR" is available as free download prevent secondary damage
Functions
[EFL- , FS , FN ] from our website.) MCCB
Terminal
like a broken stack inverter.
or *) It can be set on the N side
Dedicated filter to comply with the European EMC R S T
ELCB to detect blow-out fuse.

Directive (Emission). Install the filter while referring PC loader for Windows
Extension cable for remote control
Inverter support software
U V W
to the details in the installation manual.
[CB- S]
(FRENIC-VG loader)
Power filter for input circuit Technica Cable used for remote control
Protective
Functions
Arrester Technica
[RNF C - ] of the inverter from a PC, to manage the data.
[CN5 ] ("WPS-VG1-STR" is available as free download
This filter can be used for the same purpose as the
Suppresses induced lightning surges from the power from our website.)
EMC compliance filter, but is not an EMC compliance.
Battery for memory backup, source to protect entire equipment connected to the
USB
(miniB) Optional board storing trace back memory and power source.
Filter capacitor for reducing radio noise Technica
Dimensions
calendar function [Dealt by Fuji Electric Technica]
[NFM M315KPD ]
External
RJ-45
for KEYPAD [OPK-BP]
connection
Used to reduce radio noise. This is effective for L1 L2 L3
22kW: optional, 30kW or more:standard equipment P N P N
the AM radio frequency band. Control circuit terminal block
L1' L2' L3'
*Do not use it on the inverter output side.
[Made by Nippon Chemi-con, dealt by Fuji Electric Technica]
Speed setting potentiometer Extension cable for remote control
Functions of Parts
USB [CB- S]
Ferrite ring for reducing radio noise
Names and
R0 T0 R S T (miniB)
Tachometer
[ACL-40B, ACL-74B, F200160] Contactor Cable used for remote control
Contactor
Main circuit terminal block
U V W PWM converter Inverter
Used to reduce radio noise. Suppressive effect to the frequency band is G L1/R L2/S L3/T DB P1 P(+) N(-) U V W G (Stack type) (Stack type)
available by approximately 1MHz or more. This is appropriate as a R S T
simple measure against noise since it affects broad range in the

Braking unit

U V W

frequency band.It is recommended to insert it on the power supply side
if the cable length between a motor and an inverter is short (roughly 20m [BU - C] RJ-45
for KEYPAD
connection
or less) or on the output side if the cable length exceeds 20m.
To be used together with a braking resistor to Battery for memory backup,
increase the inverter braking performance. Peripheral device storing trace back memory and
Power filter for output circuit Technica of ACL / PWM Optional board
calendar function
[RNF S - ] Power regenerative PMW converter, RHC series [OPK-BP]
converter
[RHC - C] Total capacity: Standard equipment
This will become more effective in noise reduction if
used together with the power filter for input circuit. Used for suppressing power source harmonics of Control circuit terminal block
inverters. It is also equipped with a power supply

1 2 3
regenerative function to drastically increase braking Speed setting potentiometer
Output circuit filter [OFL- -4A] Ferrite ring for reducing radio noise
capability and reduce energy consumption.
4 5 6
[ACL-40B, ACL-74B, F200160] Tachometer
Wiring Diagram
Connected to the output of an inverter to: * Use in combination with dedicated reactors for the RHC series.
• Suppress fluctuations of motor terminal voltage. R S T U V W G

Used to reduce radio noise. Suppressive effect to the frequency
• Prevent damages to the motor insulation due to surge Dedicated filter for the RHC series
band is available by approximately 1MHz or more. This is
voltage in 400V series inverter.
Dedicated filter for the RHC series is used if appropriate as a simple measure against noise since it affects
*This filter is not limited by carrier frequency. Also, motor
other electronic equipment is connected to broad range in the frequency band. It is recommended to insert
can be tuned while this option is installed.
X1 Y1 Z1
the same power source. it on the power supply side if the cable length between a motor
and an inverter is short (roughly 20m or less) or on the output
*Use in combination with dedicated filter reactors, filter
X2 Y2 Z2
Options
capacitors and filter resistors. side if the cable length exceeds 20m.
Surge supperession unit
[SSU TA-NS]
Output circuit filter [OFL- -4A]
Surge voltage is generated if the cable between an inverter and
a motor is several ten meters long. This product suppresses the DC REACTOR [DCR - ] Connected to the output of an inverter to:
surge voltage, preventing the motor from being damaged. R S T G
- Suppress fluctuations of motor terminal voltage.
[For power supply normalization]
Warranty
M
Motor
- Prevent damages to the motor insulation due to X1 Y1 Z1
3 1) Use if the power transformer capacity is 500kVA or more and exceeds

Surge killer surge voltage in 400V series inverter.
the inverter rated capacity by 10 times. X2 Y2 Z2
*This filter is not limited by carrier frequency. Also,
Absorbs surge voltage coming from L-load of magnetic 2) Use if the inverter and a thyristor converter are connected to the same
motor can be tuned while this option is installed.
contactor and solenoid valve to protect electronic transformer.
*Check if the thyristor converter uses a commutation reactor. If not,an AC reactor must be connected
devices from malfunctioning. to the power supply side.
Delivery Period
Braking resistor [DB V- ] 3) Connect to prevent trips when trip occurs due to opening/closing of the
and Code
Surge absorber Technica R S T G
phase-advancing capacitor for the power supply lines.
(Connect in parallel to the coil that is a generation source of surge.) Increases braking capability for highly frequent
[S2-A-O (for magnetic contactor and solenoid valve)] stopping and large moment of inertia. When
4) Use if the voltage unbalance exceeds 2%.
Motor M
[For improving the input power-factor and reducing harmonics] 3
[S1-B-O (for mini control relay and timer)] used together with a braking unit, connect this Used to reduce the input harmonic current (correcting power-factor)
to the connection terminal of the braking unit. * For the drop effect, refer to the guideline appendix.
Surge killer for L-load
(Connect to the power circuit that is a generation source of surge.)
Guidelines for
[FSL-323 (for 3-phase)]
Peripheral and structure options
[FSL-123 (for single -phase)]
Attachment for external cooling
* The items indicated with Technica are dealt by Fuji Electric Technica. The attachment to install the heat sink part of the inverter outside the panel. [PBVG7-7.5 (for up to 7.5kW)] [PB-F1-30 (for 11 to 22kW)] * The items indicated with Technica are dealt by Fuji Electric Technica.
36 37
Options
Optional card Braking resistor, braking unit (max. 150% torque, 10% ED)
Standard
Category Name Type Switch with SW on the Pt board Specifications Remarks Braking unit Continuous braking Repetitive braking
Power Nominal Inverter type Braking resistor
Analog card Synchronized interface*1 OPC-VG1-SN Synchronizing interface circuits for dancer control coming soon For unit type (150% torque conversion value) (100s or less cycle)
supply applied motor
F/V converter OPC-VG1-FV F/V converter coming soon Unit type * Ohmic Max. braking Braking Discharging Duty cycle Average
voltage [kW] Type Q'ty Type Q'ty
Aio extension card OPC-VG1-AIO Extension card of Ai 2 points + Ao 2 points (HD spec) value torque [%] time [s] capability [kWs] [%ED] loss [kW]
Common
Digital card Di interface card OPC-VG1-DI OPC-VG1-DI (A) 16 bit Di of binary or 4-digit BCD + sign
(for 8 bit bus) OPC-VG1-DI (B) For setting the speed, torque and the torque current reference. 0.75 FRN0.75VG1S-2
Dio extension card OPC-VG1-DIO OPC-VG1-DIO (A) Extension of Di (4bits) and Do (8bits) for function selection. 1.5 FRN1.5VG1S-2 DB2.2V-21B 30Ω 1 16.5 0.165
Dio option card for direct landing control. Di × 16 bit + Do ×10 bit
2.2 FRN2.2VG1S-2
OPC-VG1-DIO (B) UPAC exclusive use coming soon
PG interface expansion card OPC-VG1-PG OPC-VG1-PG (SD) + 5V line driver type, voltage output PGs 3.7 FRN3.7VG1S-2 DB3.7V-21B 24Ω 1 27.75 0.2775
Functions
Terminal
OPC-VG1-PG (LD) (A,B and Z-phase signals). 5.5 FRN5.5VG1S-2 DB5.5V-21B 16Ω 1 41.25 0.4125
OPC-VG1-PG (PR) Used for detecting motor speed, line speed, position
7.5 FRN7.5VG1S-2 DB7.5V-21B 12Ω 1 56.25 0.5625
OPC-VG1-PG (PD) reference and position detection.
OPC-VG1-PGo OPC-VG1-PGo (SD) Open collector type voltage output PGs 11 FRN11VG1S-2 DB11V-21B 8Ω 1 82.5 0.825
Built-in unit
OPC-VG1-PGo (LD) (A,B and Z-phase signals). 3-phase 15 FRN15VG1S-2 DB15V-21B 6Ω 1 112.5 1.125
OPC-VG1-PGo (PR) Used for detecting motor speed, line speed, position 150% 10s 10%ED
200V 18.5 FRN18.5VG1S-2 DB18.5V-21B 4.5Ω 1 138.75 1.3875
OPC-VG1-PGo (PD) reference and position detection.
Protective
Functions
OPC-VG1-SPGT ABS encoder with 17 bit high resolution 22 FRN22VG1S-2 DB22V-21B 4Ω 1 165 1.65
PG card for synchronous motor drive OPC-VG1-PMPG +5V line driver type A, B + magnetic pole position 30 FRN30VG1S-2 DB30V-21B 2.5Ω 1 225 2.25
OPC-VG1-PMPGo Open collector type (Max. 4bit)
37 FRN37VG1S-2 DB37V-21B 2.25Ω 1 277.5 2.775
T-Link interface card OPC-VG1-TL T-Link interface card
CC-Link interface card OPC-VG1-CCL CC-Link compliant card (Ver2.00) 45 FRN45VG1S-2 DB45V-21B 2Ω 1 337.5 3.375
High-speed serial connections for UPAC OPC-VG1-SIU Use for UPAC communication system coming soon 55 FRN55VG1S-2 DB55V-21C 1.6Ω 1 412.5 4.125
Dimensions
External
Digital card SX bus communication card OPC-VG1-SX SX bus communication card
75 FRN75VG1S-2 BU55-2C 2 DB75V-21C 2.4/2Ω 1 562.5 5.625
(for 16 bit bus) E-SX bus communication card OPC-VG1-ESX E-SX bus communication card
PROFINET-IRT OPC-VG1-PNET PROFINET-IRT communication card coming soon 90 FRN90VG1S-2 BU90-2C 2 DB90V-21C 2/2Ω 1 675 6.75
User Programmable Application Card OPC-VG1-UPAC Technology card coming soon 3.7 FRN3.7VG1S-4 DB3.7V-41B 96Ω 1 27.75 0.2775
Fieldbus PROFIBUS-DP OPC-VG1-PDP PROFIBUS-DP interface card coming soon
5.5 FRN5.5VG1S-4 DB5.5V-41B 64Ω 1 41.25 0.4125
interface card DeviceNet OPC-VG1-DEV DeviceNet interface card coming soon
Functions of Parts
Safety card Functional safety card OPC-VG1-SAFE Safety standard compliant card 7.5 FRN7.5VG1S-4 DB7.5V-41B 48Ω 1 56.25 0.5625
Names and
Control circuit terminal Terminal block for high-speed serial communications OPC-VG1-TBSI Used for multiple-winding motor drive system, reactor connection system 11 FRN11VG1S-4 DB11V-41B 32Ω 1 82.5 0.825
Loader Inverter support loader WPS-VG1-STR For Windows. (Free version)
15 FRN15VG1S-4 DB15V-41B 24Ω 1 112.5 1.125
WPS-VG1-PCL For Windows. (Paid version)
Package software Tension control software WPS-VG1-TEN For Windows. coming soon 18.5 FRN18.5VG1S-4 DB18.5V-41B 18Ω 1 138.75 1.3875
Dancer control software WPS-VG1-DAN Supplied with inverter support loader (Paid) CD-ROM. coming soon 22 FRN22VG1S-4 DB22V-41B 16Ω 1 165 1.65

Position control software WPS-VG1-POS coming soon

30 FRN30VG1S-4 DB30V-41B 10Ω 1 225 2.25
Built-in unit
37 FRN37VG1S-4 DB37V-41B 9Ω 1 277.5 2.775
Cable 45 FRN45VG1S-4 DB45V-41B 8Ω 1 337.5 3.375
55 FRN55VG1S-4 DB55V-41C 6.5Ω 1 412.5 4.125
Category Name Type Length (m) Specifications 75 FRN75VG1S-4 DB75V-41C 4.7Ω 1 562.5 5.625
Cable Extension cable for remote control CB-5S 5m Connection cable between an inverter and the KEYPAD panel 90 FRN90VG1S-4 DB90V-41C 3.9Ω 1 150% 10s 675 10%ED 6.75
3-phase
CB-3S 3m 110 FRN110VG1S-4 DB110V-41C 3.2Ω 1 825 8.25
CB-1S 1m 400V
Encoder cable for GNF2 CB-VG1-PMPG-05S 5m Straight plug 132 FRN132VG1S-4 DB132V-41C 2.6Ω 1 990 9.9
CB-VG1-PMPG-15S 15m 160 FRN160VG1S-4 DB160V-41C 2.2Ω 1 1200 12.0
CB-VG1-PMPG-30S 30m 200 FRN200VG1S-4 DB200V-41C 3.5/2Ω 1 1500 15.0
Wiring Diagram
CB-VG1-PMPG-50S 50m BU220-4C 2
CB-VG1-PMPG-05A 5m Angle plug 220 FRN220VG1S-4 DB220V-41C 3.2/2Ω 1 1650 16.5
CB-VG1-PMPG-15A 15m 250 − − −
CB-VG1-PMPG-30A 30m 280 FRN280VG1S-4 DB160V-41C 2.2/2Ω 2 2100 21.0
CB-VG1-PMPG-50A 50m BU220-4C 2
315 FRN315VG1S-4 DB160V-41C 2.2/2Ω 2 2363 23.6
355 FRN355VG1S-4 DB132V-41C 2.6/3Ω 3 2663 26.6
Combination with built-in control option 3
Options
400 FRN400VG1S-4 DB132V-41C 2.6/3Ω 3 3000 30.0
BU220-4C
500 FRN500VG1S-4 DB132V-41C 2.6/4Ω 4 3750 37.5
Maximum installable number 4
Category 630 FRN630VG1S-4 DB160V-41C 2.2/4Ω 4 4725 47.3
Pattern 1 Pattern 2 Pattern 3 Pattern 4 Pattern 5 Pattern 6
Analog card 1 0 1 0 1 0 710 − − −
Digital card (for 8 bit bus) OPC-VG1-TL,CCL 0 0 800 − − −
1 2 0 1
Other 1 2
Warranty
Digital card (for 16 bit bus) OPC-VG1-SX,E-SX 1 1 0 0 0 0 * For the unit type (MD / LD) specification and stack type (LD) specification, refer to the User Manual.
OPC-VG1-UPAC 0 0 1 1 1 1 (Note 1) The duty cycle [%ED] are calculated as the 150% torque braking used for deceleration as described below.
Field bus interface card 0 0 0 0 1 1 (Note 2) Two braking resistors are required for each of DB160V-41C, DB200V-41C, or DB220V-41C.
Safety card 1 (Note 3) When connecting three braking units or more in parallel, refer to the supplement document of the DB Unit instruction manual (notes in connecting multiple units) INR-HF51614.
Control circuit terminal 1 T1
Delivery Period
150% • Duty cycle %ED = T0 ×100 [%] 150%
(1) When you use OPC-VG1-PG for detecting motor speed, the input from the terminals (PA, PB) on the control PC board of the main unit is disabled.
and Code
(2) When you install OPC-VG1-PMPG, you should select terminals according to the control method.
The terminals (PA, PB) on the control PC board of the main unit are enabled if vector control for induction motor with speed sensor is selected. Braking Braking
power power
The OPC-VG1-PMPG is enabled if vector control for synchronous motor with speed sensor is selected.
(3) More than one optional communication card (i.e., OPC-VG1-TL and OPC-VG1-CCL) installation at a time is not available. If these cards are installed at the same time, an operation
0 Time 0 Braking time Braking time Time
procedure error (Er6) is indicated. However, only the combination of OPC-VG1-TL and OPC-VG1-SX can be used at the same time. Braking time Braking time T1 T1
(4) The usage of the OPC-VG1-DI, DIO, PG and PGo can be selected by setting the SW on the PCB. 2 cards of each of the types OPC-VG1-DI, DIO, PG and PGo can be installed, but if the T1 T1 2 2
SWs for selecting the usage mode are set to the same setting, an operation procedure error (Er6) is indicated. Repeat cycle Repeat cycle
Guidelines for
T0 T0
(5) The OPC-VG1-AIO (analog) and OPC-VG1-SPGT (digital 8-bit) cannot be installed at the same time.
(6) The PG interface card (OPC-VG1-PG/PGo) has the restrictions shown in the table below. VG1-PG/PGo (SD) VG1-PG/PGo (LD) VG1-PG/PGo (PR) VG1-PG/PGo (PD) [Selection procedure] All three conditions listed below must be satisfied simultaneously.
VG1-PG/PGo (SD) NG OK OK OK
VG1-PG/PGo (LD) OK NG OK OK 1 "The maximum braking torque" does not exceed the value shown on the table.
VG1-PG/PGo (PR) OK NG NG OK
VG1-PG/PGo (PD) OK NG NG NG
2 The energy discharged in the resistor for each braking (the area of the triangle shown in the above figure) does not exceed "the discharging capability [kWs]" on the table.
3 The average loss (energy discharged in the resistor divided by the braking interval) does not exceed "the average loss [kW]" shown on the table.
38 39
Options
Optional card Braking resistor, braking unit (max. 150% torque, 10% ED)
Standard
Category Name Type Switch with SW on the Pt board Specifications Remarks Braking unit Continuous braking Repetitive braking
Power Nominal Inverter type Braking resistor
Analog card Synchronized interface*1 OPC-VG1-SN Synchronizing interface circuits for dancer control coming soon For unit type (150% torque conversion value) (100s or less cycle)
supply applied motor
F/V converter OPC-VG1-FV F/V converter coming soon Unit type * Ohmic Max. braking Braking Discharging Duty cycle Average
voltage [kW] Type Q'ty Type Q'ty
Aio extension card OPC-VG1-AIO Extension card of Ai 2 points + Ao 2 points (HD spec) value torque [%] time [s] capability [kWs] [%ED] loss [kW]
Common
Digital card Di interface card OPC-VG1-DI OPC-VG1-DI (A) 16 bit Di of binary or 4-digit BCD + sign
(for 8 bit bus) OPC-VG1-DI (B) For setting the speed, torque and the torque current reference. 0.75 FRN0.75VG1S-2
Dio extension card OPC-VG1-DIO OPC-VG1-DIO (A) Extension of Di (4bits) and Do (8bits) for function selection. 1.5 FRN1.5VG1S-2 DB2.2V-21B 30Ω 1 16.5 0.165
Dio option card for direct landing control. Di × 16 bit + Do ×10 bit
2.2 FRN2.2VG1S-2
OPC-VG1-DIO (B) UPAC exclusive use coming soon
PG interface expansion card OPC-VG1-PG OPC-VG1-PG (SD) + 5V line driver type, voltage output PGs 3.7 FRN3.7VG1S-2 DB3.7V-21B 24Ω 1 27.75 0.2775
Functions
Terminal
OPC-VG1-PG (LD) (A,B and Z-phase signals). 5.5 FRN5.5VG1S-2 DB5.5V-21B 16Ω 1 41.25 0.4125
OPC-VG1-PG (PR) Used for detecting motor speed, line speed, position
7.5 FRN7.5VG1S-2 DB7.5V-21B 12Ω 1 56.25 0.5625
OPC-VG1-PG (PD) reference and position detection.
OPC-VG1-PGo OPC-VG1-PGo (SD) Open collector type voltage output PGs 11 FRN11VG1S-2 DB11V-21B 8Ω 1 82.5 0.825
Built-in unit
OPC-VG1-PGo (LD) (A,B and Z-phase signals). 3-phase 15 FRN15VG1S-2 DB15V-21B 6Ω 1 112.5 1.125
OPC-VG1-PGo (PR) Used for detecting motor speed, line speed, position 150% 10s 10%ED
200V 18.5 FRN18.5VG1S-2 DB18.5V-21B 4.5Ω 1 138.75 1.3875
OPC-VG1-PGo (PD) reference and position detection.
Protective
Functions
OPC-VG1-SPGT ABS encoder with 17 bit high resolution 22 FRN22VG1S-2 DB22V-21B 4Ω 1 165 1.65
PG card for synchronous motor drive OPC-VG1-PMPG +5V line driver type A, B + magnetic pole position 30 FRN30VG1S-2 DB30V-21B 2.5Ω 1 225 2.25
OPC-VG1-PMPGo Open collector type (Max. 4bit)
37 FRN37VG1S-2 DB37V-21B 2.25Ω 1 277.5 2.775
T-Link interface card OPC-VG1-TL T-Link interface card
CC-Link interface card OPC-VG1-CCL CC-Link compliant card (Ver2.00) 45 FRN45VG1S-2 DB45V-21B 2Ω 1 337.5 3.375
High-speed serial connections for UPAC OPC-VG1-SIU Use for UPAC communication system coming soon 55 FRN55VG1S-2 DB55V-21C 1.6Ω 1 412.5 4.125
Dimensions
External
Digital card SX bus communication card OPC-VG1-SX SX bus communication card
75 FRN75VG1S-2 BU55-2C 2 DB75V-21C 2.4/2Ω 1 562.5 5.625
(for 16 bit bus) E-SX bus communication card OPC-VG1-ESX E-SX bus communication card
PROFINET-IRT OPC-VG1-PNET PROFINET-IRT communication card coming soon 90 FRN90VG1S-2 BU90-2C 2 DB90V-21C 2/2Ω 1 675 6.75
User Programmable Application Card OPC-VG1-UPAC Technology card coming soon 3.7 FRN3.7VG1S-4 DB3.7V-41B 96Ω 1 27.75 0.2775
Fieldbus PROFIBUS-DP OPC-VG1-PDP PROFIBUS-DP interface card coming soon
5.5 FRN5.5VG1S-4 DB5.5V-41B 64Ω 1 41.25 0.4125
interface card DeviceNet OPC-VG1-DEV DeviceNet interface card coming soon
Functions of Parts
Safety card Functional safety card OPC-VG1-SAFE Safety standard compliant card 7.5 FRN7.5VG1S-4 DB7.5V-41B 48Ω 1 56.25 0.5625
Names and
Control circuit terminal Terminal block for high-speed serial communications OPC-VG1-TBSI Used for multiple-winding motor drive system, reactor connection system 11 FRN11VG1S-4 DB11V-41B 32Ω 1 82.5 0.825
Loader Inverter support loader WPS-VG1-STR For Windows. (Free version)
15 FRN15VG1S-4 DB15V-41B 24Ω 1 112.5 1.125
WPS-VG1-PCL For Windows. (Paid version)
Package software Tension control software WPS-VG1-TEN For Windows. coming soon 18.5 FRN18.5VG1S-4 DB18.5V-41B 18Ω 1 138.75 1.3875
Dancer control software WPS-VG1-DAN Supplied with inverter support loader (Paid) CD-ROM. coming soon 22 FRN22VG1S-4 DB22V-41B 16Ω 1 165 1.65

Position control software WPS-VG1-POS coming soon

30 FRN30VG1S-4 DB30V-41B 10Ω 1 225 2.25
Built-in unit
37 FRN37VG1S-4 DB37V-41B 9Ω 1 277.5 2.775
Cable 45 FRN45VG1S-4 DB45V-41B 8Ω 1 337.5 3.375
55 FRN55VG1S-4 DB55V-41C 6.5Ω 1 412.5 4.125
Category Name Type Length (m) Specifications 75 FRN75VG1S-4 DB75V-41C 4.7Ω 1 562.5 5.625
Cable Extension cable for remote control CB-5S 5m Connection cable between an inverter and the KEYPAD panel 90 FRN90VG1S-4 DB90V-41C 3.9Ω 1 150% 10s 675 10%ED 6.75
3-phase
CB-3S 3m 110 FRN110VG1S-4 DB110V-41C 3.2Ω 1 825 8.25
CB-1S 1m 400V
Encoder cable for GNF2 CB-VG1-PMPG-05S 5m Straight plug 132 FRN132VG1S-4 DB132V-41C 2.6Ω 1 990 9.9
CB-VG1-PMPG-15S 15m 160 FRN160VG1S-4 DB160V-41C 2.2Ω 1 1200 12.0
CB-VG1-PMPG-30S 30m 200 FRN200VG1S-4 DB200V-41C 3.5/2Ω 1 1500 15.0
Wiring Diagram
CB-VG1-PMPG-50S 50m BU220-4C 2
CB-VG1-PMPG-05A 5m Angle plug 220 FRN220VG1S-4 DB220V-41C 3.2/2Ω 1 1650 16.5
CB-VG1-PMPG-15A 15m 250 − − −
CB-VG1-PMPG-30A 30m 280 FRN280VG1S-4 DB160V-41C 2.2/2Ω 2 2100 21.0
CB-VG1-PMPG-50A 50m BU220-4C 2
315 FRN315VG1S-4 DB160V-41C 2.2/2Ω 2 2363 23.6
355 FRN355VG1S-4 DB132V-41C 2.6/3Ω 3 2663 26.6
Combination with built-in control option 3
Options
400 FRN400VG1S-4 DB132V-41C 2.6/3Ω 3 3000 30.0
BU220-4C
500 FRN500VG1S-4 DB132V-41C 2.6/4Ω 4 3750 37.5
Maximum installable number 4
Category 630 FRN630VG1S-4 DB160V-41C 2.2/4Ω 4 4725 47.3
Pattern 1 Pattern 2 Pattern 3 Pattern 4 Pattern 5 Pattern 6
Analog card 1 0 1 0 1 0 710 − − −
Digital card (for 8 bit bus) OPC-VG1-TL,CCL 0 0 800 − − −
1 2 0 1
Other 1 2
Warranty
Digital card (for 16 bit bus) OPC-VG1-SX,E-SX 1 1 0 0 0 0 * For the unit type (MD / LD) specification and stack type (LD) specification, refer to the User Manual.
OPC-VG1-UPAC 0 0 1 1 1 1 (Note 1) The duty cycle [%ED] are calculated as the 150% torque braking used for deceleration as described below.
Field bus interface card 0 0 0 0 1 1 (Note 2) Two braking resistors are required for each of DB160V-41C, DB200V-41C, or DB220V-41C.
Safety card 1 (Note 3) When connecting three braking units or more in parallel, refer to the supplement document of the DB Unit instruction manual (notes in connecting multiple units) INR-HF51614.
Control circuit terminal 1 T1
Delivery Period
150% • Duty cycle %ED = T0 ×100 [%] 150%
(1) When you use OPC-VG1-PG for detecting motor speed, the input from the terminals (PA, PB) on the control PC board of the main unit is disabled.
and Code
(2) When you install OPC-VG1-PMPG, you should select terminals according to the control method.
The terminals (PA, PB) on the control PC board of the main unit are enabled if vector control for induction motor with speed sensor is selected. Braking Braking
power power
The OPC-VG1-PMPG is enabled if vector control for synchronous motor with speed sensor is selected.
(3) More than one optional communication card (i.e., OPC-VG1-TL and OPC-VG1-CCL) installation at a time is not available. If these cards are installed at the same time, an operation
0 Time 0 Braking time Braking time Time
procedure error (Er6) is indicated. However, only the combination of OPC-VG1-TL and OPC-VG1-SX can be used at the same time. Braking time Braking time T1 T1
(4) The usage of the OPC-VG1-DI, DIO, PG and PGo can be selected by setting the SW on the PCB. 2 cards of each of the types OPC-VG1-DI, DIO, PG and PGo can be installed, but if the T1 T1 2 2
SWs for selecting the usage mode are set to the same setting, an operation procedure error (Er6) is indicated. Repeat cycle Repeat cycle
Guidelines for
T0 T0
(5) The OPC-VG1-AIO (analog) and OPC-VG1-SPGT (digital 8-bit) cannot be installed at the same time.
(6) The PG interface card (OPC-VG1-PG/PGo) has the restrictions shown in the table below. VG1-PG/PGo (SD) VG1-PG/PGo (LD) VG1-PG/PGo (PR) VG1-PG/PGo (PD) [Selection procedure] All three conditions listed below must be satisfied simultaneously.
VG1-PG/PGo (SD) NG OK OK OK
VG1-PG/PGo (LD) OK NG OK OK 1 "The maximum braking torque" does not exceed the value shown on the table.
VG1-PG/PGo (PR) OK NG NG OK
VG1-PG/PGo (PD) OK NG NG NG
2 The energy discharged in the resistor for each braking (the area of the triangle shown in the above figure) does not exceed "the discharging capability [kWs]" on the table.
3 The average loss (energy discharged in the resistor divided by the braking interval) does not exceed "the average loss [kW]" shown on the table.
38 39
Options
The DC reactor is mainly used for the unit type. With the stack type, the DC reactor is built into the diode converter and is used if necessary.
* For details, refer to the Stack Type User Manual.
Braking resistor (max.150% torque, 10%ED Spec.) DC Reactor (DCR - )
Standard
200V Series 400V Series Fig. A Terminal block
Fig. B Fig. C
2-terminal holes MAX.D2 MAX. D2
Dimensions [mm] Approx. Dimensions [mm] Approx. (for screw J) 4-mounting holes
Type Fig Type Fig (for screw J) (for screw G)
W W1 H H1 H2 D D1 C weight [kg] W W1 H H1 H2 D D1 C weight [kg]
H
D1
H1
D
DB2.2V-21B 330 298 242 210 165 140 1.6 8 4 DB3.7V-41B 420 388 280 248 203 140 1.6 8 5
Common
H
H
DB3.7V-21B 400 368 280 248 203 140 1.6 8 5 DB5.5V-41B 420 388 480 448 377 140 1.6 10 7 2-terminal
DB5.5V-21B 400 368 280 248 203 140 1.6 8 5 DB7.5V-41B 420 388 480 448 377 140 1.6 10 7 W1 D1 (for screw J)
W1 4-mounting
4-mounting holes MAX.D2 W1 D1 W holes D 2-terminal
W 4-mounting holes
DB7.5V-21B 400 368 480 448 377 140 1.6 10 6 DB11V-41B 420 388 480 448 377 140 1.6 10 8 (for screw G) W D (for screw G) (for screw J)
(for screw G) MAX.D2
DB11V-21B 400 368 480 448 377 140 1.6 10 7 DB15V-41B 420 388 660 628 557 140 1.6 10 11
A Fig. D Fig. E Fig. F
DB15V-21B A 400 368 660 628 557 140 1.6 10 10 DB18.5V-41B 420 388 660 628 557 140 1.6 10 11 2-terminal holes MAX. D2 MAX.D2
Fig.A (for screw J) 2-terminal
Functions
DB18.5V-21B 400 368 660 628 557 140 1.6 10 10 DB22V-41B 420 388 660 628 557 240 1.6 10 14
Terminal
(for screw J)
H
DB22V-21B 400 368 660 628 557 240 1.6 10 13 DB30V-41B 420 388 660 628 557 240 1.6 10 19
40
H
H2
H1
H1
H
DB30V-21B 400 368 660 628 557 240 1.6 10 18 DB37V-41B 425 388 750 718 647 240 1.6 10 21
H
4- C
NP
DB37V-21B 405 368 750 718 647 240 1.6 10 22 DB45V-41B 425 388 750 718 647 340 1.6 10 26
W1 D1 D1 W1
W1 DB45V-21B 405 368 750 718 647 340 1.6 10 26 DB55V-41C 550 520 440 430 250 283 − 12 26 *For models with a standard motor of 75kW W 4-mounting D D W
W1 4-mounting holes D1
W holes
DB55V-21C 450 420 440 430 250 283 − 12 35 DB75V-41C 550 520 440 430 250 283 − 12 30 or more, it is included as a standard. W (for screw G) D (for screw G)
Protective
Functions
DB75V-21C B 600 570 440 430 250 283 − 12 33 DB90V-41C 650 620 440 430 250 283 − 12 41
D
DB90V-21C 700 670 440 430 250 283 − 12 43 DB110V-41C 750 720 440 430 250 283 − 12 57
D1
B Nominal Inverter Type REACTOR Dimensions [mm] Approx.

DB132V-41C 750 720 440 430 250 283 − 12 43 Voltage applied Fig
43
H
Fig.B *DB160V-41C 600 570 440 430 250 283 − 12 37(×2) motor [kW] HD Specification MD Specification LD Specification Type W W1 D D1 D2 G H H1 J weight [kg]
*DB200V-41C 725 695 440 430 250 283 − 12 50(×2) 0.75 FRN0.75VG1S-2 – – DCR2-0.75 66 56 90 72 20 M4(5.2×8) 94 – M4 1.4
240
D
NP
Dimensions
W1 H2 2.2 FRN2.2VG1S-2 – – DCR2-2.2 86 71 100 80 10 M5(6×9) 110 – M4 1.8
External
W 4- C H1
* For DB160V-41C, DB200V-41C, and DB220V-41C, a pair of resistors of the same type is used. 3.7 FRN3.7VG1S-2 – – DCR2-3.7 86 71 100 80 20 M5(6×9) 110 – M4 2.6
Be sure to secure the space for installation. A pair of resistors is shipped for the order of one unit. 5.5 FRN5.5VG1S-2 – – DCR2-5.5 111 95 100 80 20 M6(7×11) 130 – M5 3.6
A
7.5 FRN7.5VG1S-2 – – DCR2-7.5 111 95 100 80 23 M6(7×11) 130 – M5 3.8
11 FRN11VG1S-2 – – DCR2-11 111 95 100 80 24 M6(7×11) 137 – M6 4.3
15 FRN15VG1S-2 – – DCR2-15 146 124 120 96 15 M6(7×11) 180 – M8 5.9
Functions of Parts
Braking unit (BU - ) 18.5 FRN18.5VG1S-2 – – DCR2-18.5 146 124 120 96 25 M6(7×11) 180 – M8 7.4
Names and
22 FRN22VG1S-2 – – DCR2-22A 146 124 120 96 25 M6(7×11) 180 – M8 7.5
3-phase
30 FRN30VG1S-2 – – DCR2-30B 152 90 156 116 115 M6( 8) 130 190 M10 12
200V B
– DCR2-37B 171 110 151 110 115 M6( 8) 150 200 M10 14
– DCR2-37C C 210 185 101 81 125 M6(7×13) 125 – M10 7.4
– DCR2-45B B 171 110 166 125 120 M6( 8) 150 200 M10 16

Approx. – DCR2-45C C 210 185 106 86 135 M6(7×13) 125 – M12 8.4
Fig. A Voltage Type Fig
Dimensions [mm]
weight
W W1 H H1 H2 D [kg] – DCR2-55B D 190 160 131 90 100 M6( 8) 210 250 M12 16
3-phase BU55-2C A 230 130 240 225 210 6 – DCR2-55C C 255 225 96 76 140 M6(7×13) 145 – M12 11
160 75 FRN75VG1S-2 – FRN55VG1S-2 DCR2-75C 255 225 106 86 145 M6(7×13) 145 – M12 12
200V BU90-2C A 250 150 370 355 340 9
H2
H1
H
90 FRN90VG1S-2 – FRN75VG1S-2 DCR2-90C C 255 225 116 96 155 M6(7×13) 145 – M12 14
BU37-4C A 150 100 280 265 250 4
110 – – FRN90VG1S-2 DCR2-110C 300 265 116 90 185 M8(10×18) 160 – M12 17
BU55-4C A 230 130 280 265 250 5.5
3-phase 3.7 FRN3.7VG1S-4 – – DCR4-3.7 86 71 100 80 20 M5(6×9) 110 – M4 2.6
BU90-4C A 230 130 280 265 250 160 5.5
400V 5.5 FRN5.5VG1S-4 – – DCR4-5.5 86 71 100 80 20 M5(6×9) 110 – M4 2.6
1.2 BU132-4C A 250 150 370 355 340 9
W1 6 7.5 FRN7.5VG1S-4 – – DCR4-7.5 111 95 100 80 24 M6(7×11) 130 – M5 4.2
W D BU220-4C A 250 150 450 435 420 13
7.5
15
11 FRN11VG1S-4 – – DCR4-11 A 111 95 100 80 24 M6(7×11) 130 – M5 4.3

15 FRN15VG1S-4 – – DCR4-15 146 124 120 96 15 M6(7×11) 168 – M5 5.9
18.5 FRN18.5VG1S-4 – – DCR4-18.5 146 124 120 96 25 M6(7×11) 171 – M6 7.2
Wiring Diagram
22 FRN22VG1S-4 – – DCR4-22A 146 124 120 96 25 M6(7×11) 171 – M6 7.2
30 FRN30VG1S-4 – – DCR4-30B B 152 90 157 115 100 M6( 8) 130 190 M8 13
– DCR4-37B B 171 110 150 110 100 M6( 8) 150 200 M8 15
– DCR4-37C C 210 185 101 81 105 M6(7×13) 125 – M8 7.4
Fan unit for braking unit (BU-F) – DCR4-45B B 171 110 165 125 110 M6( 8) 150 210 M8 18
– DCR4-45C C 210 185 106 86 120 M6(7×13) 125 – M8 8.4
– DCR4-55B B 171 110 170 130 110 M6( 8) 150 210 M8 20
Braking unit + Fan unit The duty cycle [%ED] of the model with an external 55 FRN55VG1S-4 FRN45VG1S-4
Options
– DCR4-55C C 255 225 96 76 120 M6(7×13) 145 – M10 11
W2 D2
braking unit is increased from 10% ED to 30% ED by 75 FRN75VG1S-4 – FRN55VG1S-4 DCR4-75C 255 225 106 86 125 M6(7×13) 145 – M10 13
W4 W3 D4 D3
using this option. 3-phase 90 FRN90VG1S-4 – FRN75VG1S-4 DCR4-90C 255 225 116 96 140 M6(7×13) 145 – M12 15
H3
110 FRN110VG1S-4 FRN90VG1S-4 FRN90VG1S-4 DCR4-110C 300 265 116 90 175 M8(10×18) 155 – M12 19
400V
[Fan unit] C
Warranty
H4
Dimensions [mm] 220

H2
FRN220VG1S-4 FRN200VG1S-4 FRN200VG1S-4 DCR4-220C 350 310 146 118 200 M10(12×22) 190 – M12 33
DBUnit Type
WARNING 危険
W1 H1 D1 (Fan power supply cable) 250 – FRN220VG1S-4 – DCR4-250C 350 310 161 133 210 M10(12×22) 190 – M12 35
BU-F 149 44 76 320 280 FRN280VG1S-4 – FRN220VG1S-4 DCR4-280C 350 310 161 133 210 M10(12×22) 190 – M16 37
Fan unit 315 FRN315VG1S-4 FRN280VG1S-4 – DCR4-315C 400 345 146 118 200 M10(12×22) 225 – M16 40
Delivery Period
[Braking unit + Fan unit] 355 FRN355VG1S-4 FRN315VG1S-4 FRN280VG1S-4 DCR4-355C 400 345 156 128 200 M10(12×22) 225 – 4×M12 49
and Code
Dimensions [mm] 400 FRN400VG1S-4 FRN355VG1S-4 FRN315VG1S-4 DCR4-400C 445 385 145 117 213 M10(12×22) 245 – 4×M12 52
Voltage Type E
W2 W3 W4 H2 H3 H4 D2 D3 D4 450 – FRN400VG1S-4 FRN355VG1S-4 DCR4-450C 440 385 150 122 215 M10(12×22) 245 – 4×M12 62
3-phase BU55-2C+BU-F 230 47.5 240 270 500 FRN500VG1S-4 – FRN400VG1S-4 DCR4-500C 445 390 165 137 220 M10(12×22) 245 – 4×M12 72
135 30 160 1.2 64 630 FRN630VG1S-4 – FRN500VG1S-4 DCR4-630C 285 145 203 170 195 M12(14×20) 480 – 2×M12 75
200V BU90-2C+BU-F 250 57.5 370 400 F
710 – – FRN630VG1S-4 DCR4-710C 340 160 295 255 225 M12( 15) 480 – 4×M12 95
H1
BU37-4C+BU-F 150 7.5 280 310
W1 D1
BU55-4C+BU-F 230 47.5 280 310 •The DC Reactor (DCR) in thick-frame are provided as standard (supplied
3-phase DC Reactor Type Remarks
Guidelines for
BU90-4C+BU-F 230 135 47.5 280 30 310 160 1.2 64 adding to the unit). The DC Reactor (DCR) is provided as standard for
400V The symbol at the end of the type code
BU132-4C+BU-F 250 57.5 370 400 FRN55VG1S-2 and FRN55VG1S-4 of the LD specification, but not Input power factor of DCR2/4- / A/ B: approx. 90 to 95%
varies depending on the capacity.
BU220-4C+BU-F 250 57.5 450 480 provided as standard for those units of HD specification.
*The DCR2/4- B type is also prepared for motors with 75kW or larger, Input power factor of the DCR2/4- C: about 86 to 90% This can be selected with the inverter of 37kW or more.
which are applicable as standard. Contact us for ordering product
separately.
40 41
Options
The DC reactor is mainly used for the unit type. With the stack type, the DC reactor is built into the diode converter and is used if necessary.
* For details, refer to the Stack Type User Manual.
Braking resistor (max.150% torque, 10%ED Spec.) DC Reactor (DCR - )
Standard
200V Series 400V Series Fig. A Terminal block
Fig. B Fig. C
2-terminal holes MAX.D2 MAX. D2
Dimensions [mm] Approx. Dimensions [mm] Approx. (for screw J) 4-mounting holes
Type Fig Type Fig (for screw J) (for screw G)
W W1 H H1 H2 D D1 C weight [kg] W W1 H H1 H2 D D1 C weight [kg]
H
D1
H1
D
DB2.2V-21B 330 298 242 210 165 140 1.6 8 4 DB3.7V-41B 420 388 280 248 203 140 1.6 8 5
Common
H
H
DB3.7V-21B 400 368 280 248 203 140 1.6 8 5 DB5.5V-41B 420 388 480 448 377 140 1.6 10 7 2-terminal
DB5.5V-21B 400 368 280 248 203 140 1.6 8 5 DB7.5V-41B 420 388 480 448 377 140 1.6 10 7 W1 D1 (for screw J)
W1 4-mounting
4-mounting holes MAX.D2 W1 D1 W holes D 2-terminal
W 4-mounting holes
DB7.5V-21B 400 368 480 448 377 140 1.6 10 6 DB11V-41B 420 388 480 448 377 140 1.6 10 8 (for screw G) W D (for screw G) (for screw J)
(for screw G) MAX.D2
DB11V-21B 400 368 480 448 377 140 1.6 10 7 DB15V-41B 420 388 660 628 557 140 1.6 10 11
A Fig. D Fig. E Fig. F
DB15V-21B A 400 368 660 628 557 140 1.6 10 10 DB18.5V-41B 420 388 660 628 557 140 1.6 10 11 2-terminal holes MAX. D2 MAX.D2
Fig.A (for screw J) 2-terminal
Functions
DB18.5V-21B 400 368 660 628 557 140 1.6 10 10 DB22V-41B 420 388 660 628 557 240 1.6 10 14
Terminal
(for screw J)
H
DB22V-21B 400 368 660 628 557 240 1.6 10 13 DB30V-41B 420 388 660 628 557 240 1.6 10 19
40
H
H2
H1
H1
H
DB30V-21B 400 368 660 628 557 240 1.6 10 18 DB37V-41B 425 388 750 718 647 240 1.6 10 21
H
4- C
NP
DB37V-21B 405 368 750 718 647 240 1.6 10 22 DB45V-41B 425 388 750 718 647 340 1.6 10 26
W1 D1 D1 W1
W1 DB45V-21B 405 368 750 718 647 340 1.6 10 26 DB55V-41C 550 520 440 430 250 283 − 12 26 *For models with a standard motor of 75kW W 4-mounting D D W
W1 4-mounting holes D1
W holes
DB55V-21C 450 420 440 430 250 283 − 12 35 DB75V-41C 550 520 440 430 250 283 − 12 30 or more, it is included as a standard. W (for screw G) D (for screw G)
Protective
Functions
DB75V-21C B 600 570 440 430 250 283 − 12 33 DB90V-41C 650 620 440 430 250 283 − 12 41
D
DB90V-21C 700 670 440 430 250 283 − 12 43 DB110V-41C 750 720 440 430 250 283 − 12 57
D1
B Nominal Inverter Type REACTOR Dimensions [mm] Approx.

DB132V-41C 750 720 440 430 250 283 − 12 43 Voltage applied Fig
43
H
Fig.B *DB160V-41C 600 570 440 430 250 283 − 12 37(×2) motor [kW] HD Specification MD Specification LD Specification Type W W1 D D1 D2 G H H1 J weight [kg]
240
D
NP
Dimensions
W1 H2 2.2 FRN2.2VG1S-2 – – DCR2-2.2 86 71 100 80 10 M5(6×9) 110 – M4 1.8
External
W 4- C H1
* For DB160V-41C, DB200V-41C, and DB220V-41C, a pair of resistors of the same type is used. 3.7 FRN3.7VG1S-2 – – DCR2-3.7 86 71 100 80 20 M5(6×9) 110 – M4 2.6
Be sure to secure the space for installation. A pair of resistors is shipped for the order of one unit. 5.5 FRN5.5VG1S-2 – – DCR2-5.5 111 95 100 80 20 M6(7×11) 130 – M5 3.6
A
7.5 FRN7.5VG1S-2 – – DCR2-7.5 111 95 100 80 23 M6(7×11) 130 – M5 3.8
11 FRN11VG1S-2 – – DCR2-11 111 95 100 80 24 M6(7×11) 137 – M6 4.3
15 FRN15VG1S-2 – – DCR2-15 146 124 120 96 15 M6(7×11) 180 – M8 5.9
Functions of Parts
Braking unit (BU - ) 18.5 FRN18.5VG1S-2 – – DCR2-18.5 146 124 120 96 25 M6(7×11) 180 – M8 7.4
Names and
22 FRN22VG1S-2 – – DCR2-22A 146 124 120 96 25 M6(7×11) 180 – M8 7.5
3-phase
30 FRN30VG1S-2 – – DCR2-30B 152 90 156 116 115 M6( 8) 130 190 M10 12
200V B
– DCR2-37B 171 110 151 110 115 M6( 8) 150 200 M10 14
– DCR2-37C C 210 185 101 81 125 M6(7×13) 125 – M10 7.4
– DCR2-45B B 171 110 166 125 120 M6( 8) 150 200 M10 16

Approx. – DCR2-45C C 210 185 106 86 135 M6(7×13) 125 – M12 8.4
Fig. A Voltage Type Fig
Dimensions [mm]
weight
W W1 H H1 H2 D [kg] – DCR2-55B D 190 160 131 90 100 M6( 8) 210 250 M12 16
3-phase BU55-2C A 230 130 240 225 210 6 – DCR2-55C C 255 225 96 76 140 M6(7×13) 145 – M12 11
160 75 FRN75VG1S-2 – FRN55VG1S-2 DCR2-75C 255 225 106 86 145 M6(7×13) 145 – M12 12
200V BU90-2C A 250 150 370 355 340 9
H2
H1
H
90 FRN90VG1S-2 – FRN75VG1S-2 DCR2-90C C 255 225 116 96 155 M6(7×13) 145 – M12 14
BU37-4C A 150 100 280 265 250 4
110 – – FRN90VG1S-2 DCR2-110C 300 265 116 90 185 M8(10×18) 160 – M12 17
BU55-4C A 230 130 280 265 250 5.5
3-phase 3.7 FRN3.7VG1S-4 – – DCR4-3.7 86 71 100 80 20 M5(6×9) 110 – M4 2.6
BU90-4C A 230 130 280 265 250 160 5.5
400V 5.5 FRN5.5VG1S-4 – – DCR4-5.5 86 71 100 80 20 M5(6×9) 110 – M4 2.6
1.2 BU132-4C A 250 150 370 355 340 9
W1 6 7.5 FRN7.5VG1S-4 – – DCR4-7.5 111 95 100 80 24 M6(7×11) 130 – M5 4.2
W D BU220-4C A 250 150 450 435 420 13
7.5
15
11 FRN11VG1S-4 – – DCR4-11 A 111 95 100 80 24 M6(7×11) 130 – M5 4.3

15 FRN15VG1S-4 – – DCR4-15 146 124 120 96 15 M6(7×11) 168 – M5 5.9
18.5 FRN18.5VG1S-4 – – DCR4-18.5 146 124 120 96 25 M6(7×11) 171 – M6 7.2
Wiring Diagram
22 FRN22VG1S-4 – – DCR4-22A 146 124 120 96 25 M6(7×11) 171 – M6 7.2
30 FRN30VG1S-4 – – DCR4-30B B 152 90 157 115 100 M6( 8) 130 190 M8 13
– DCR4-37B B 171 110 150 110 100 M6( 8) 150 200 M8 15
– DCR4-37C C 210 185 101 81 105 M6(7×13) 125 – M8 7.4
Fan unit for braking unit (BU-F) – DCR4-45B B 171 110 165 125 110 M6( 8) 150 210 M8 18
– DCR4-45C C 210 185 106 86 120 M6(7×13) 125 – M8 8.4
– DCR4-55B B 171 110 170 130 110 M6( 8) 150 210 M8 20
Braking unit + Fan unit The duty cycle [%ED] of the model with an external 55 FRN55VG1S-4 FRN45VG1S-4
Options
– DCR4-55C C 255 225 96 76 120 M6(7×13) 145 – M10 11
W2 D2
braking unit is increased from 10% ED to 30% ED by 75 FRN75VG1S-4 – FRN55VG1S-4 DCR4-75C 255 225 106 86 125 M6(7×13) 145 – M10 13
W4 W3 D4 D3
using this option. 3-phase 90 FRN90VG1S-4 – FRN75VG1S-4 DCR4-90C 255 225 116 96 140 M6(7×13) 145 – M12 15
H3
400V
[Fan unit] C
Warranty
H4
Dimensions [mm] 220

H2
FRN220VG1S-4 FRN200VG1S-4 FRN200VG1S-4 DCR4-220C 350 310 146 118 200 M10(12×22) 190 – M12 33
DBUnit Type
WARNING 危険
W1 H1 D1 (Fan power supply cable) 250 – FRN220VG1S-4 – DCR4-250C 350 310 161 133 210 M10(12×22) 190 – M12 35
BU-F 149 44 76 320 280 FRN280VG1S-4 – FRN220VG1S-4 DCR4-280C 350 310 161 133 210 M10(12×22) 190 – M16 37
Fan unit 315 FRN315VG1S-4 FRN280VG1S-4 – DCR4-315C 400 345 146 118 200 M10(12×22) 225 – M16 40
Delivery Period
[Braking unit + Fan unit] 355 FRN355VG1S-4 FRN315VG1S-4 FRN280VG1S-4 DCR4-355C 400 345 156 128 200 M10(12×22) 225 – 4×M12 49
and Code
Dimensions [mm] 400 FRN400VG1S-4 FRN355VG1S-4 FRN315VG1S-4 DCR4-400C 445 385 145 117 213 M10(12×22) 245 – 4×M12 52
Voltage Type E
W2 W3 W4 H2 H3 H4 D2 D3 D4 450 – FRN400VG1S-4 FRN355VG1S-4 DCR4-450C 440 385 150 122 215 M10(12×22) 245 – 4×M12 62
3-phase BU55-2C+BU-F 230 47.5 240 270 500 FRN500VG1S-4 – FRN400VG1S-4 DCR4-500C 445 390 165 137 220 M10(12×22) 245 – 4×M12 72
135 30 160 1.2 64 630 FRN630VG1S-4 – FRN500VG1S-4 DCR4-630C 285 145 203 170 195 M12(14×20) 480 – 2×M12 75
200V BU90-2C+BU-F 250 57.5 370 400 F
710 – – FRN630VG1S-4 DCR4-710C 340 160 295 255 225 M12( 15) 480 – 4×M12 95
H1
BU37-4C+BU-F 150 7.5 280 310
W1 D1
BU55-4C+BU-F 230 47.5 280 310 •The DC Reactor (DCR) in thick-frame are provided as standard (supplied
3-phase DC Reactor Type Remarks
Guidelines for
BU90-4C+BU-F 230 135 47.5 280 30 310 160 1.2 64 adding to the unit). The DC Reactor (DCR) is provided as standard for
400V The symbol at the end of the type code
BU132-4C+BU-F 250 57.5 370 400 FRN55VG1S-2 and FRN55VG1S-4 of the LD specification, but not Input power factor of DCR2/4- / A/ B: approx. 90 to 95%
varies depending on the capacity.
BU220-4C+BU-F 250 57.5 450 480 provided as standard for those units of HD specification.
*The DCR2/4- B type is also prepared for motors with 75kW or larger, Input power factor of the DCR2/4- C: about 86 to 90% This can be selected with the inverter of 37kW or more.
which are applicable as standard. Contact us for ordering product
separately.
40 41
Options
AC Reactor (ACR - ) Zero-phase reactor for reducing radiated noise (ACL-40B, ACL-74B, F200160)
Standard
Fig. A Terminal block (for screw J) Fig. B MAX.D2 Fig. C MAX.D2
155 MIN
217 MAX
131 MAX
39.5 MIN
74 MIN
78 MAX
204±1.0
156±1.0
35
61
Common
H
NP
H
NP
6-terminal 6-terminal
H
holes holes
20
(for screw J) (for screw J) 181 MAX 2-7
±2
95 MAX 4-R3.5
2- 5.5 4×R4
42 MAX
26 MAX
26 MAX
8
13±0.3
35±1.0
W1
13±0.3
D1 W1 D1 W1 D1
W D W D W D 12 220
80 150 241 MAX
4-mounting holes MAX.D2 4-mounting holes 4-mounting holes
Functions
ACL-40B ACL-74B
Terminal
(for screw G) (for screw G) (for screw G) F200160 F200160PB
Fig. D MAX.D2
Fig. E W MCCB
(Without Mounting legs) (With Mounting legs)
or Ferrite ring Inverter
ELCB Contactor
L1/R U
Power L2/S V M
6-terminal L3/T W
(for screw J) supply
D
H
Motor
Protective
Functions
W1 4-mounting holes D1 6-terminal
W (for screw G) D
(for screw J) Applied wire size list
H
Ferrite ring types for reducing radio noise Q'ty No. of turns Recommended wire size [mm2] Note)
1 4 2.0, 3.5, 5.5
Dimensions
W1 4-mounting holes D1 ACL-40B
15
External
(for screw G) 2 2 8, 14
1 4 8, 14
Reactor Dimensions [mm] Approx. ACL-74B 2 2 22, 38, 60, 5.5×2, 8×2, 14×2, 22×2
Voltage Fig. No. weight [kg]
Type W W1 D D1 D2 G H J 4 1 100, 150, 200, 250, 325, 38×2, 60×2, 100×2, 150×2
Functions of Parts
ACR4-110 250 100 136 105 202 M8(9.5×18) 245 M12 24 F200160 4 1 200×2, 250×2, 325×2, 325×3
Names and
ACR4-132 250 100 146 115 207 M8(10×16) 250 M12 32 F200160PB 4 1 200×2, 250×2, 325×2, 325×3
ACR4-220 C 320 120 150 110 240 M10(12×20) 300 M12 40 NOTE) Use a 600V HIV insulation cable (Allowable temp. 75°C).
3-phase ACR4-280 380 130 150 110 260 M10(12×20) 300 M12 52
400V ACR4-355 380 130 150 110 260 M10(12×20) 300 M12 52

ACR4-450 D 460 155 290 230 200 M12( 15) 490 4×M12 95
ACR4-530 480 155 420 370 − M12(15×25) 380 4×M12 100
E
ACR4-630 510 170 420 370 − M12(15×25) 390 4×M12 110
Note) It is not necessary to use the reactor unless a particularly stable power supply is required, i.e., DC bus connection operation (PN connection operation).
Use the DC reactor (DCR) as a measure against harmonics.
Wiring Diagram
Options
Warranty
Delivery Period
Suppressing Harmonics and Code
Guidelines for
42 43
Options
AC Reactor (ACR - ) Zero-phase reactor for reducing radiated noise (ACL-40B, ACL-74B, F200160)
Standard
Fig. A Terminal block (for screw J) Fig. B MAX.D2 Fig. C MAX.D2
155 MIN
217 MAX
131 MAX
39.5 MIN
74 MIN
78 MAX
204±1.0
156±1.0
35
61
Common
H
NP
H
NP
6-terminal 6-terminal
H
holes holes
20
(for screw J) (for screw J) 181 MAX 2-7
±2
95 MAX 4-R3.5
2- 5.5 4×R4
42 MAX
26 MAX
26 MAX
8
13±0.3
35±1.0
W1
13±0.3
D1 W1 D1 W1 D1
W D W D W D 12 220
80 150 241 MAX
4-mounting holes MAX.D2 4-mounting holes 4-mounting holes
Functions
ACL-40B ACL-74B
Terminal
(for screw G) (for screw G) (for screw G) F200160 F200160PB
Fig. D MAX.D2
Fig. E W MCCB
(Without Mounting legs) (With Mounting legs)
or Ferrite ring Inverter
ELCB Contactor
L1/R U
Power L2/S V M
6-terminal L3/T W
(for screw J) supply
D
H
Motor
Protective
Functions
W1 4-mounting holes D1 6-terminal
W (for screw G) D
(for screw J) Applied wire size list
H
Ferrite ring types for reducing radio noise Q'ty No. of turns Recommended wire size [mm2] Note)
1 4 2.0, 3.5, 5.5
Dimensions
W1 4-mounting holes D1 ACL-40B
15
External
(for screw G) 2 2 8, 14
1 4 8, 14
Reactor Dimensions [mm] Approx. ACL-74B 2 2 22, 38, 60, 5.5×2, 8×2, 14×2, 22×2
Voltage Fig. No. weight [kg]
Type W W1 D D1 D2 G H J 4 1 100, 150, 200, 250, 325, 38×2, 60×2, 100×2, 150×2
Functions of Parts
ACR4-110 250 100 136 105 202 M8(9.5×18) 245 M12 24 F200160 4 1 200×2, 250×2, 325×2, 325×3
Names and
ACR4-132 250 100 146 115 207 M8(10×16) 250 M12 32 F200160PB 4 1 200×2, 250×2, 325×2, 325×3
ACR4-220 C 320 120 150 110 240 M10(12×20) 300 M12 40 NOTE) Use a 600V HIV insulation cable (Allowable temp. 75°C).
3-phase ACR4-280 380 130 150 110 260 M10(12×20) 300 M12 52
400V ACR4-355 380 130 150 110 260 M10(12×20) 300 M12 52

ACR4-450 D 460 155 290 230 200 M12( 15) 490 4×M12 95
ACR4-530 480 155 420 370 − M12(15×25) 380 4×M12 100
E
ACR4-630 510 170 420 370 − M12(15×25) 390 4×M12 110
Note) It is not necessary to use the reactor unless a particularly stable power supply is required, i.e., DC bus connection operation (PN connection operation).
Use the DC reactor (DCR) as a measure against harmonics.
Wiring Diagram
Options
Warranty
Delivery Period
Suppressing Harmonics and Code
Guidelines for
42 43
Options
Output circuit filter (OFL- 4A)[400V series] Power regenerative PWM converter (RHC series)
Standard
Filter dimensions (22kW or less) Filter dimensions (30kW or more):reactor Filter dimensions (30kW or more):resistor/capacitor
Features
Fig.A Fig. C 6-terminal holes MAX.F Fig. F G
Applied Guideline for Suppressing Harmonics
(for screw J)
Grounding screw H
PWM control reduces harmonics current significantly, due to
30
D±2
Common
40
100
4-mounting holes
(for screw K) X1 X2 Y1 Y2 Z1 Z2
sinusoidal wave at power supply side.
MAX.C
Z Y X W V U
E±3
417
385
Terminal screw J
According to "Guideline for Suppressing Harmonics by the Users
NP
注意
4- 10
D 4-mounting holes E Who Receive High Voltage or Special High Voltage" issued by the
34
A (for screw K) B 430
Ministry of Economy, Trade and Industry, the converter factor (Ki)
Functions
460
Terminal
The reactor, capacitor and resistor for
can be set to "0" (meaning harmonics occurrence is 0) when
C
Fig. D 6-terminal holes MAX.F
filter OFL-30-4A or larger have to be
(for screw J)
A B
installed separately.
(Those items are not included in the mass indicated in the table
combining with the inverter.
below. They are shipped as a set by ordering the filter.)
MAX.C
X1 Y1 Z1
Possible to reduce power supply facility capacity

X2 Y2 Z2
Fig. B Fig. G
Protective
Functions
D±2 Grounding screw H
4-mounting holes
D 4-mounting holes E Output terminal Its power-factor control realizes the same phase current as the
(for screw K) A (for screw K) B
power-supply phase-voltage. The equipment, thus, can be
Z Y X W V U
E±3
Terminal screw J
Fig. E 6-terminal holes
550
NP
operated with the power-factor of almost "1."

注意
(for screw J) MAX.F

4- 13
NP
This makes it possible to reduce the power transformer capacity
30
35
450 620
Dimensions
X1 Y1 Z1
MAX.C
500 650
and downsize the other devices, compared with those required
External
X2 Y2 Z2
without the converter.

C
D 4-mounting holes E
A B A (for screw K) B
Upgraded braking performance
Comparison of input current waveform
Functions of Parts
Regenerated energy occurring at highly frequent accelerating and
Names and
<Without PWM converter> <With PWM converter>
decelerating operation and elevating machine operation is entirely
Nominal Inverter Type Dimensions [mm] Approx.
Filter returned to power supply side. Thus, energy saving during
Voltage applied Unit Type Stack Type Fig Terminal Mounting weight
motor [kW] HD Specification Type A B C D E F G Grounding
MD Specification LD Specification MD Specification LD Specification screw H screw J screw K [kg]
regenerative operation is possible. As the current waveform is
3.7 FRN3.7VG1S-4 – – – – OFL-3.7-4A 220 225 220 200 115 – – M4 M4 M5 14
sinusoidal during regenerative operation, no troubles are caused to

5.5 FRN5.5VG1S-4 – – – – A

OFL-7.5-4A 290 290 230 260 160 – – M5 M5 M6 22
7.5 FRN7.5VG1S-4 – – – – the power supply system.
11 FRN11VG1S-4 – – – –
OFL-15-4A 330 275 310 300 145 – – M6 M6 M8 35
15 FRN15VG1S-4 – – – –
B Rated continuous regeneration : 100%
18.5 FRN18.5VG1S-4 – – – –
OFL-22-4A 330 300 330 300 170 – – M6 M6 M8 45 Rated regeneration for 1 min 150% MD (CT) spec.
22 FRN22VG1S-4 – – –
30 FRN30VG1S-4 – – FRN30SVG1S-4 – OFL-30-4A 210 175 210 70 140 90 160 – M5 M6 12 120% LD (VT) spec.
C/F
37 FRN37VG1S-4 – FRN30VG1S-4 FRN37SVG1S-4 FRN30SVG1S-4 OFL-37-4A 220 190 220 75 150 95 160 – M5 M6 15
*Stack type: 110% Allowable characteristics of the RHC unit
55 FRN55VG1S-4 – FRN45VG1S-4 FRN55SVG1S-4 FRN45SVG1S-4 OFL-55-4A 260 200 275 85 160 150 160 – M6 M8 22 180
75 FRN75VG1S-4 – FRN55VG1S-4 FRN75SVG1S-4 FRN55SVG1S-4 OFL-75-4A 260 210 290 85 170 150 233 – M8 M10 25 (%)
Enhanced maintenance/protective functions 170
Max. allowable regenerative power (150%, 1 min.)
Wiring Diagram
3-phase 160
110 FRN110VG1S-4 FRN90VG1S-4 FRN90VG1S-4 FRN110SVG1S-4 FRN90SVG1S-4 OFL-110-4A 300 230 330 100 190 170 233 – M8 M10 38 Failure can be easily analyzed with the trace back (option). 150
400V 132 FRN132VG1S-4 FRN110VG1S-4 FRN110VG1S-4 FRN132SVG1S-4 FRN110SVG1S-4 OFL-132-4A D/F 300 240 340 100 200 170 233 – M10 M10 42 The past 10 alarms can be displayed with the keypad LED display. 140
160 FRN160VG1S-4 FRN132VG1S-4 FRN132VG1S-4 FRN160SVG1S-4 FRN132SVG1S-4 OFL-160-4A 300 240 340 100 200 180 233 – M10 M10 48
200 FRN200VG1S-4 FRN160VG1S-4 FRN160VG1S-4 FRN200SVG1S-4 FRN160SVG1S-4 OFL-200-4A 320 270 350 105 220 190 333 – M10 M12 60 This helps you analyze the alarm causes and take countermeasures. 130
120
220 FRN220VG1S-4 FRN200VG1S-4 FRN200VG1S-4 FRN220SVG1S-4 FRN200SVG1S-4 OFL-220-4A 340 300 390 115 250 190 333 – M10 M12 70 When momentary power failure occurs, the converter turns off the Continuous allowable regenerative power (100%, continuous)
250 – FRN220VG1S-4 – FRN250SVG1S-4 FRN220SVG1S-4 110
OFL-280-4A 350 300 430 115 250 200 333 – M10 M12 78 gates to enable continuous operation after recovery.
280 FRN280VG1S-4 – FRN220VG1S-4 FRN280SVG1S-4 FRN250SVG1S-4
Options
100
Allowable
315 FRN315VG1S-4 FRN280VG1S-4 – FRN315SVG1S-4 FRN280SVG1S-4 OFL-315-4A 440 275 450 150 230 170 – – M12 M12 90 The converter can issue warning signals like overload, heat sink regenerative 90
power
355 FRN355VG1S-4 FRN315VG1S-4 FRN280VG1S-4 – FRN315SVG1S-4 OFL-355-4A 440 290 480 150 245 175 – – M12 M12 100 overheating, or the end of service life prior to converter tripping. 80
400 FRN400VG1S-4 FRN355VG1S-4 FRN315VG1S-4 – – OFL-400-4A 440 295 510 150 240 175 – – M12 M12 110 70
450 – FRN400VG1S-4 FRN355VG1S-4 – – OFL-450-4A 440 325 470 150 270 195 – – M12 M12 125 60
500 FRN500VG1S-4 – FRN400VG1S-4 – – OFL-500-4A E/G 440 335 500 150 280 210 – – M12 M12 145 Enhanced network support
50
Warranty
630 FRN630VG1S-4 – FRN500VG1S-4 FRN630BVG1S-4 – OFL-630-4A 480 355 560 150 280 245 – – M12 M12 170 •The converter can be connected to MICREX-SX, F series and 40
710 – – FRN630VG1S-4 FRN710BVG1S-4 FRN630BVG1S-4 –
800 –
CC-Link master devices (using option). The RS-485 interface is 30
– – FRN800BVG1S-4 FRN710BVG1S-4 – – – – – – – – – – – –
1000 – – – – FRN800BVG1S-4 – provided as standard. 20
10
* Carrier frequency is not limited with OFL-*** -4A.
Delivery Period
0
and Code
170 200 250
340 400 500
Power supply voltage (V)
Guidelines for
44 45
Options
Output circuit filter (OFL- 4A)[400V series] Power regenerative PWM converter (RHC series)
Standard
Filter dimensions (22kW or less) Filter dimensions (30kW or more):reactor Filter dimensions (30kW or more):resistor/capacitor
Features
Fig.A Fig. C 6-terminal holes MAX.F Fig. F G
Applied Guideline for Suppressing Harmonics
(for screw J)
Grounding screw H
PWM control reduces harmonics current significantly, due to
30
D±2
Common
40
100
4-mounting holes
(for screw K) X1 X2 Y1 Y2 Z1 Z2
sinusoidal wave at power supply side.
MAX.C
Z Y X W V U
E±3
417
385
Terminal screw J
According to "Guideline for Suppressing Harmonics by the Users
NP
注意
4- 10
D 4-mounting holes E Who Receive High Voltage or Special High Voltage" issued by the
34
A (for screw K) B 430
Ministry of Economy, Trade and Industry, the converter factor (Ki)
Functions
460
Terminal
The reactor, capacitor and resistor for
can be set to "0" (meaning harmonics occurrence is 0) when
C
Fig. D 6-terminal holes MAX.F
filter OFL-30-4A or larger have to be
(for screw J)
A B
installed separately.
(Those items are not included in the mass indicated in the table
combining with the inverter.
below. They are shipped as a set by ordering the filter.)
MAX.C
X1 Y1 Z1
Possible to reduce power supply facility capacity

X2 Y2 Z2
Fig. B Fig. G
Protective
Functions
D±2 Grounding screw H
4-mounting holes
D 4-mounting holes E Output terminal Its power-factor control realizes the same phase current as the
(for screw K) A (for screw K) B
power-supply phase-voltage. The equipment, thus, can be
Z Y X W V U
E±3
Terminal screw J
Fig. E 6-terminal holes
550
NP
operated with the power-factor of almost "1."

注意
(for screw J) MAX.F

4- 13
NP
This makes it possible to reduce the power transformer capacity
30
35
450 620
Dimensions
X1 Y1 Z1
MAX.C
500 650
and downsize the other devices, compared with those required
External
X2 Y2 Z2
without the converter.

C
D 4-mounting holes E
A B A (for screw K) B
Upgraded braking performance
Comparison of input current waveform
Functions of Parts
Regenerated energy occurring at highly frequent accelerating and
Names and
<Without PWM converter> <With PWM converter>
decelerating operation and elevating machine operation is entirely
Nominal Inverter Type Dimensions [mm] Approx.
Filter returned to power supply side. Thus, energy saving during
Voltage applied Unit Type Stack Type Fig Terminal Mounting weight
motor [kW] HD Specification Type A B C D E F G Grounding
MD Specification LD Specification MD Specification LD Specification screw H screw J screw K [kg]
regenerative operation is possible. As the current waveform is
3.7 FRN3.7VG1S-4 – – – – OFL-3.7-4A 220 225 220 200 115 – – M4 M4 M5 14
sinusoidal during regenerative operation, no troubles are caused to

5.5 FRN5.5VG1S-4 – – – – A

OFL-7.5-4A 290 290 230 260 160 – – M5 M5 M6 22
7.5 FRN7.5VG1S-4 – – – – the power supply system.
11 FRN11VG1S-4 – – – –
OFL-15-4A 330 275 310 300 145 – – M6 M6 M8 35
15 FRN15VG1S-4 – – – –
B Rated continuous regeneration : 100%
18.5 FRN18.5VG1S-4 – – – –
OFL-22-4A 330 300 330 300 170 – – M6 M6 M8 45 Rated regeneration for 1 min 150% MD (CT) spec.
22 FRN22VG1S-4 – – –
30 FRN30VG1S-4 – – FRN30SVG1S-4 – OFL-30-4A 210 175 210 70 140 90 160 – M5 M6 12 120% LD (VT) spec.
C/F
*Stack type: 110% Allowable characteristics of the RHC unit
55 FRN55VG1S-4 – FRN45VG1S-4 FRN55SVG1S-4 FRN45SVG1S-4 OFL-55-4A 260 200 275 85 160 150 160 – M6 M8 22 180
75 FRN75VG1S-4 – FRN55VG1S-4 FRN75SVG1S-4 FRN55SVG1S-4 OFL-75-4A 260 210 290 85 170 150 233 – M8 M10 25 (%)
Enhanced maintenance/protective functions 170
Max. allowable regenerative power (150%, 1 min.)
Wiring Diagram
3-phase 160
110 FRN110VG1S-4 FRN90VG1S-4 FRN90VG1S-4 FRN110SVG1S-4 FRN90SVG1S-4 OFL-110-4A 300 230 330 100 190 170 233 – M8 M10 38 Failure can be easily analyzed with the trace back (option). 150
400V 132 FRN132VG1S-4 FRN110VG1S-4 FRN110VG1S-4 FRN132SVG1S-4 FRN110SVG1S-4 OFL-132-4A D/F 300 240 340 100 200 170 233 – M10 M10 42 The past 10 alarms can be displayed with the keypad LED display. 140
160 FRN160VG1S-4 FRN132VG1S-4 FRN132VG1S-4 FRN160SVG1S-4 FRN132SVG1S-4 OFL-160-4A 300 240 340 100 200 180 233 – M10 M10 48
200 FRN200VG1S-4 FRN160VG1S-4 FRN160VG1S-4 FRN200SVG1S-4 FRN160SVG1S-4 OFL-200-4A 320 270 350 105 220 190 333 – M10 M12 60 This helps you analyze the alarm causes and take countermeasures. 130
120
220 FRN220VG1S-4 FRN200VG1S-4 FRN200VG1S-4 FRN220SVG1S-4 FRN200SVG1S-4 OFL-220-4A 340 300 390 115 250 190 333 – M10 M12 70 When momentary power failure occurs, the converter turns off the Continuous allowable regenerative power (100%, continuous)
250 – FRN220VG1S-4 – FRN250SVG1S-4 FRN220SVG1S-4 110
OFL-280-4A 350 300 430 115 250 200 333 – M10 M12 78 gates to enable continuous operation after recovery.
280 FRN280VG1S-4 – FRN220VG1S-4 FRN280SVG1S-4 FRN250SVG1S-4
Options
100
Allowable
315 FRN315VG1S-4 FRN280VG1S-4 – FRN315SVG1S-4 FRN280SVG1S-4 OFL-315-4A 440 275 450 150 230 170 – – M12 M12 90 The converter can issue warning signals like overload, heat sink regenerative 90
power
355 FRN355VG1S-4 FRN315VG1S-4 FRN280VG1S-4 – FRN315SVG1S-4 OFL-355-4A 440 290 480 150 245 175 – – M12 M12 100 overheating, or the end of service life prior to converter tripping. 80
400 FRN400VG1S-4 FRN355VG1S-4 FRN315VG1S-4 – – OFL-400-4A 440 295 510 150 240 175 – – M12 M12 110 70
450 – FRN400VG1S-4 FRN355VG1S-4 – – OFL-450-4A 440 325 470 150 270 195 – – M12 M12 125 60
500 FRN500VG1S-4 – FRN400VG1S-4 – – OFL-500-4A E/G 440 335 500 150 280 210 – – M12 M12 145 Enhanced network support
50
Warranty
630 FRN630VG1S-4 – FRN500VG1S-4 FRN630BVG1S-4 – OFL-630-4A 480 355 560 150 280 245 – – M12 M12 170 •The converter can be connected to MICREX-SX, F series and 40
710 – – FRN630VG1S-4 FRN710BVG1S-4 FRN630BVG1S-4 –
800 –
CC-Link master devices (using option). The RS-485 interface is 30
– – FRN800BVG1S-4 FRN710BVG1S-4 – – – – – – – – – – – –
1000 – – – – FRN800BVG1S-4 – provided as standard. 20
10
* Carrier frequency is not limited with OFL-*** -4A.
Delivery Period
0
and Code
170 200 250
340 400 500
Power supply voltage (V)
Guidelines for
44 45
Options
Standard Specifications : MD (CT) specifications of medium overload, light overload LD (VT) specifications (Unit and Stack Type) [Terminal Functions] [Communications Specifications], [Function Settings], [Protective Functions], [Structure and environment]
Standard
200V series
Terminal Functions
Item Standard Specifications Specifications
Category Terminal signal Terminal name
Type RHC -2C 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 90 L1/R, L2/S, L3/T Main Power input Connects with a 3-phase power supply via the dedicated reactor.
Applicable inverter capacity [kW] 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 90 Main circuit
P(+), N(–) Converter output Connects with the inverter power supply input terminal P (+), N (-).
Common
E(G) Grounding Ground terminal for inverter chassis (housing).
Continuous capacity [kW] 8.8 13 18 22 26 36 44 53 65 88 103 R0, T0 Auxiliary control power supply input Connects with the same power circuit as that for the control power backup terminal and the main power circuit.
Output Overload rating R1, S1, T1 Synchronous power supply input for voltage detection Voltage detection terminals used for the internal converter control. These are connected with the power supply side of the dedicated reactor and filter.
MD(CT) 150% of rated current for 1 min. Voltage detection
R2, T2 Control monitor input Terminals that connect with the circuit for detecting disconnection caused by blown AC fuse.
Specifications Voltage 200V DC320 to 355V (Variable with input power supply voltage) (*3) RUN RUN command The converter starts running when this command is ON between RUN and CM, and stops when OFF.
RST Alarm reset command In case of alarm stop, eliminate the cause and activate this input by closing the circuit between RST and CM. The protective function is disabled and the alarm state is released.
Required power supply capacity [kVA] 9.5 14 19 24 29 38 47 57 70 93 111 X1 0: External fault [THR], 1: Current limit cancel [LMT-CCL], 2: 73 answerback [73ANS],
General-purpose transistor input
Carrier frequency Standard 15kHz Standard 10kHz 3: Current limit switching [1-LIM], 4: Optional DI [OPY-DI]
Input signal CM Digital input common Common terminal to digital input signals.
Functions
Terminal
Applicable inverter capacity [kW] 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 90 110 When a DC fuse is connected to the converter output, a microswitch for detecting blow-out of
DCF1,DCF2 DC fuse blow-out detection input – the DC fuse is connected to this terminal. This terminal corresponds to the "b" contact output.
Continuous capacity [kW] 13 18 22 26 36 44 53 65 88 103 126 DC 24V 12mA Typ
LD(VT) Output Overload rating 120% of rated current for 1 min. PLC PLC signal power Connects with the PLC output signal power supply. (Rated voltage: 24V (22 to 27V) DC)
30A, 30B, 30C Outputs a signal when a protective function is activated to stop the converter.
Specifications Voltage 200V DC320 to 355V (Variable with input power supply voltage) (*3) Alarm relay output (for any fault)
(Contact at 1C, Circuit between 30A and 30C comes ON when an alarm occurs) (Contact capacity: 250V AC, max 50mA.)
Y1, Y2, Y3, Y11 to Y18 0: Inverter running [RUN] 1: Operation ready output [RDY] 2: Power supply current limiting [IL] 3: Lifetime alarm [LIFE] 4: Cooling fin overload [PRE-OH]
Required power supply capacity [kVA] 14 19 24 29 38 47 57 70 93 111 136 General-purpose transistor output
5: Overload alarm [PRE-OL] 6: Driving [DRV] 7: Regenerating [REG] 8: Current limit alarm [CUR]9: Under restart [U-RES]
Protective
Carrier frequency Standard 10kHz Standard 6kHz
Functions
CME Digital output common 10: Power supply frequency synchronizing [SY-HZ] 11: Alarm indication [AL1]12: Alarm indication 2 [AL2] 13: Alarm indication 4 [AL4]
Y5A, Y5C 14: Optional DO [OPT-DO]
Power supply Number of phase/Voltage/Frequency 3-phase 3-wire, 200 to 220V 50Hz,220 to 230V 50Hz(*1), 200 to 230V 60Hz Output signal Relay output
* With OPC-VG7-DIO option, 8-point expanded functions become available (DI function is not available.)
voltage Voltage/Frequency variation Voltage+10 to -15% Frequency ± 5%, Voltage unbalance: 2% or less (*4) 0: Input power [PWR] 1: Input current rms [I-AC] 2: Input voltage rms [V-AC] 3: DC link circuit voltage [V-DC]
A01, A04, A05 General-purpose analog output 4: Power supply frequency [FREQ] 5: + 10V output test [P10] - 10V output test [N10]
* With OPC-VG7-AIO option, 2-point expanded functions become available (Ai function is not usable.)
400V series M Analog output common Common terminal to analog output signals.
73A, 73C Charging circuit relay output Control output for the input relay of the external charging resistor (73)
Item Standard Specifications
Dimensions
Communication specification
External
Type RHC -4 (*5) 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 90 110 132 160 200 220 280 315 355 400 500 630 710 800
Applicable inverter capacity [kW] 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 90 110 132 160 200 220 280 315 355 400 500 630 710 800 Specifications
Item
Continuous capacity [kW] 8.8 13 18 22 26 36 44 53 65 88 103 126 150 182 227 247 314 353 448 Unit Type Stack Type
400 560 705 795 896
Enables to show running information and running status, and to monitor the function code (polling), and to control (selecting) RUN, RST, and X1.
General specifications for communication
MD(CT) Output Overload rating 150% of rated current for 1 min. * No function code can be written.
RS-485 Communicates with the PC or PLC (Fuji protocol and modbus RTU are supported).
Specifications Voltage 200V DC640 to 710V (Variable with input power supply voltage) (*3) T-Link (option card) OPC-VG7-TL option allows T-Link communication with the T-Link module in the MICREX-F or MICREX-SX.
Functions of Parts
Required power supply capacity [kVA] 9.5 14 19 24 29 38 47 57 70 93 111 136 161 196 244 267 341 383 433 488 610 762 858 967 Communication
SX bus (option card) OPC-VG7-SX option allows connection with MICREX-SX via SX bus.
Names and
CC-Link (option card) OPC-VG7-CCL option allows connection with the CC-Link master device.
Carrier frequency(*6) Standard 15kHz Standard 10kHz Standard 5kHz Specification
Trace back (optional) OPC-RHC-TR option allows trace-back of the converter operation status data.
Hardware
Applicable inverter capacity [kW] The software (WPS-LD-TR) is required.
11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 90 110 132 160 200 220 280 315 355 400 500 710 800 1000 Software WPS-RHC-TR software allows collecting the trace back data on the PC.
Continuous capacity [kW] 13 18 22 26 36 44 53 65 88 103 126 150 182 227 247 314 353 400 448 560 795 896 1120 Optical communications (optional) OPC-VG7-SI option allows sharing the load by connecting in parallel 2 or more converters.
Therefore, a capacity of up to 2400kW can be supported.
LD(VT) Output Overload rating 120% of rated current for 1 min.(*7)
Specifications Function Settings Protective Functions

Voltage 200V DC640 to 710V (Variable with input power supply voltage) (*3)

Required power supply capacity [kVA] 14 19 24 29 38 47 57 70 93 111 136 161 196 244 267 341 383 433 488 610 858 967 1210 Name Protection Specifications
Function code Item Displays Remarks
Carrier frequency(*6) Standard 10kHz Standard 6kHz Unit Type Stack Type Unit Type Stack Type
F00 Data protection AC fuse blown ACF When the AC fuse is blown (only R and T phases), the converter stops running.
Power supply Number of phase/Voltage/Frequency 3-phase 3-wire, 380 to 440V 50Hz,380 to 460V 60Hz(*2) F01 High-frequency filter selection AC overvoltage AOV The converter stops running on detection of AC overvoltage.
voltage Voltage/Frequency variation Voltage+10 to -15% Frequency ± 5%, Voltage unbalance: 2% or less (*4) F02 Restart mode after momentary power failure (operation selection) AC undervoltage ALV The converter stops running on detection of AC undervoltage.
F03 Current rating switching AC overcurrent AOC The converter stops running if the input current peak value exceeds the overcurrent level.
(*1) 220 to 230V / 50Hz model available on request. LED monitor (Display selection) AC input current error ACE The converter stops running on detection of excessive deviation between AC input and ACR.
F04
Input phase loss LPV The converter stops running if the input phase loss occurs in the power supply.
(*2) The tap in the converter must be switched when the power supply voltage is 380 to 398V / 50Hz or 380 to 430V / 60Hz. The capacity must be reduced when the power supply voltage is less than 400V. F05 LCD monitor (Display selection)
Synchronous power FrE The power supply frequency is checked after 73 is input. If a frequency error is detected, the converter
(*3) The output voltage is 320 / 640V DC, 343 / 686V DC, 355 / 710V DC when the power supply voltage is 200 / 400V, 220 / 440V and 230 / 460V, respectively. F06 LCD monitor (Language selection) supply frequency error stops running. Error during converter running (such as momentary power failure) triggers no alarm.
F07 LCD monitor (Contrast adjusting) DC fuse blown dCF The converter stops running if the DC fuse is blown (P side). Above 18.5kW
(*4) Voltage unbalance [%] = (Max. voltage [V] - Min. voltage [V])/Three-phase average voltage [V] × 67
F08 Carrier frequency DC overvoltage dOV The converter stops running on detection of DC overvoltage. 200V series: Above 400V ± 3V
(*5) Unit type: 7.5 to 630kW, Stack type: 132 to 315 and 630 to 800kW E01 X1 function selection If the power failure takes long and the control power goes out, the converter is 400V series: Above 800V ± 5V
(*6) Always 5kHz for the stack type. E02 to 13 Y1,Y2,Y3,Y5, automatically reset.
(*7) Stack type: 110% of constant rating for 1 minute Y11 to 18 function selection DC undervoltage dLV The converter stops running on detection of DC undervoltage. 200V series: Goes off at 185V and restarts at 208V
If the power failure takes long and the control power goes out, the converter is
Wiring Diagram
E14 I/O function normally open/normally closed 400V series: Goes off at 371V and restarts at 417V
automatically reset.
Common specifications (Unit and Stack Type) E15
E16
RHC overload early warning level
Cooling fan ON-OFF control Charge circuit error PbF When the charge circuit error is detected by using the 73 answerback signal Condition: X1 “73 Answerback” is selected.
Output while limiting the current (hysteresis width) configured in the digital input X1, the converter stops running.
E17
Specifications Cooling fin overheat OH1 The converter stops running if the cooling fin overheat is detected.
Item E18 to 20 A01, A04, A05 function selection
External alarm OH2 The converter stops running if an external signal (THR) is input. Condition: X1 “External alarm” is selected.
Unit Type Stack Type E21 to 23 A01, A04, A05 gain setting Converter internal overheat OH3 When overheat is detected in the inverter, the converter stops running.
E24 to 26 A01, A04, A05 bias setting
Control method AVR constant control with ACR minor loop. Converter overload OLU When the output current exceeds the overload characteristic of the inverse time characteristic, the converter stops running. Start point: 105%, 150% 1 minute
E27 A01 to 5 filter setting Memory error Er1 When a fault such as “write error” occurs in the memory (checksum values in EEPROM
Rectification starts with power ON after connected. Boosting starts with the running signal (RUN-CM short-circuit S01 Operation method and RAM do not match), the converter stops running.
Running and operation S02,03 Power supply current limit (drive/ control) Keypad communication error Er2 Activated if an error is detected during initial communication.
or running command from communications). Then, preparation for operation is completed.
Options
H01 Station address The converter continues operating.
Running status signal Running, driving, regenerating, operation ready, alarm relay output (for any fault), etc. H02 Communication error processing selection CPU error Er3 Activated if an error is detected in the CPU.
H03 Timer operation time Network device error Er4 The converter stops running if a fatal error is detected in the master network device Applicable to T-Link, SX and CC-Link
control MD(CT)/LD(VT) switching Selecting from MD (CT): Overload rating 150% (1 min.) and LD (VT): Overload rating 120% (1 min.) Selecting from MD (CT): Overload rating 150% (1 min.) and LD (VT): Overload rating 110% (1 min.) (including unconnected power supply).
H04 Baud rate
Carrier frequency Fixed to high carrier frequency 5kHz H05 Data length selection Operation procedure error Er6 When an error is detected in operation procedure, the converter stops running.
A/D converter error Er8 When an error is detected in the A/D converter circuit, the converter stops running.
Input power factor Above 0.99 (when 100% loading) H06 Parity bit selection
Optical network error Erb The converter stops running if the optical cable is disconnected or a fatal error is detected in an optical device (optional)
H07 Stop bit selection IPM error IPE Activated if IPM self-shutoff function is triggered by
Input harmonics current According to the guideline for suppressing harmonics issued by the Ministry of Economy, Trade and Industry, the converter factor (Ki) can be set to 0. – Less than 15kW
H08 No-response error detection time excessive current or overheat.
Warranty
Restart mode after momentary power failure Stops the gates when the voltage level reaches undervoltage level if momentary power failure occurs, and the converter can automatically restart after the power recovers. H09 Response interval time
Power limit control Controls the power not to exceed the preset limit value.
H10
H11
Protocol selection
TL transmission format Structure and environment
AC fuse blown, AC overvoltage, AC undervoltage, AC overcurrent, AC input current error, Input phase loss, Synchronous power supply H12 Parallel system Structure, environment and standard
H13 Number of slave stations in parallel system Item Remarks
Alarm display frequency error, DC fuse blown, DC overvoltage, DC undervoltage, Charge circuit error, Heat sink overheat, External alarm, Converter Unit Type Stack Type
H14 Alarm data deletion Structure Installed in the panel and cooled by external device
(protective functions) overheat, Overload, Memory error, Keypad communication error, CPU error, Network device error, Operation procedure error, A/D H15,16 Power supply current limit (drive 1/2) Protective structure IP00
Delivery Period
H17,18 Power supply current limit (control 1/2) Structure Cooling system Forced air cooling
converter error, Optical network error, IPM error (*1)
and Code
Displays H19,20 Current limit early warning (level/ timer) Specifications Installation method Vertical installation
Records and displays the last 10 alarms. M09 Power supply frequency Painting Color Munsell 5Y3/0.5 half-burnished
of Alarm history M10 Input power Maintainability Structure designed for easy parts change
Keypad The detailed information of the trip cause for the latest alarm is stored and displayed. • Indoor (location free from corrosive gas, flammable gas, dust and oil mist) (Pollution level 2: IEC 60664-1)
M11 Effective input current Location
Monitor Displays input power, input effective current, input effective voltage, DC intermediate current and power supply frequency. M12 Effective input voltage • No direct sunlight.
M13 Run command Ambient temperature -10 to 50°C -10 to +40°C
Load factor The load rate can be measured by using the keypad. Humidity 5 to 95% RH Without condensing
M14 Running status
Display language
Text can displayed in 3 languages: Japanese, English and Chinese. M15 Output terminals Y1 to Y18 Less than 3000m (output reduction may occur if the Less than 3000m
altitude is in the range between 1001 and 3000m) However, the output may be reduced at the altitude of 1001 to 3000m
Guidelines for
Charge LED Lights when the main circuit capacitor is charged. Environment Altitude
For use at the altitude of 2001 to 3000m, the insulation class of the control
circuit is changed from "Enhanced insulation" to "Basic insulation."
(*1) Not available in the stack type
2 to 9Hz: Amplitude=3mm, 9 to 20Hz: 9.8m / s2, 20 to 55Hz: 2m / s2 Amplitude = 0.3mm, 2 to 9Hz:
Vibration
(9 to 55Hz: 2 m / s is used if the power is higher than 90kW.)
2
1m / s2:9 to 200Hz2
Storage temperature -20 to 55°C -25 to 70°C (-10 to +30°C for long-term storage)
Storage humidity 5 to 95%RH
46 47
Options
Standard Specifications : MD (CT) specifications of medium overload, light overload LD (VT) specifications (Unit and Stack Type) [Terminal Functions] [Communications Specifications], [Function Settings], [Protective Functions], [Structure and environment]
Standard
200V series
Terminal Functions
Item Standard Specifications Specifications
Category Terminal signal Terminal name
Type RHC -2C 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 90 L1/R, L2/S, L3/T Main Power input Connects with a 3-phase power supply via the dedicated reactor.
Applicable inverter capacity [kW] 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 90 Main circuit
P(+), N(–) Converter output Connects with the inverter power supply input terminal P (+), N (-).
Common
E(G) Grounding Ground terminal for inverter chassis (housing).
Continuous capacity [kW] 8.8 13 18 22 26 36 44 53 65 88 103 R0, T0 Auxiliary control power supply input Connects with the same power circuit as that for the control power backup terminal and the main power circuit.
Output Overload rating R1, S1, T1 Synchronous power supply input for voltage detection Voltage detection terminals used for the internal converter control. These are connected with the power supply side of the dedicated reactor and filter.
MD(CT) 150% of rated current for 1 min. Voltage detection
R2, T2 Control monitor input Terminals that connect with the circuit for detecting disconnection caused by blown AC fuse.
Specifications Voltage 200V DC320 to 355V (Variable with input power supply voltage) (*3) RUN RUN command The converter starts running when this command is ON between RUN and CM, and stops when OFF.
RST Alarm reset command In case of alarm stop, eliminate the cause and activate this input by closing the circuit between RST and CM. The protective function is disabled and the alarm state is released.
Required power supply capacity [kVA] 9.5 14 19 24 29 38 47 57 70 93 111 X1 0: External fault [THR], 1: Current limit cancel [LMT-CCL], 2: 73 answerback [73ANS],
General-purpose transistor input
Carrier frequency Standard 15kHz Standard 10kHz 3: Current limit switching [1-LIM], 4: Optional DI [OPY-DI]
Input signal CM Digital input common Common terminal to digital input signals.
Functions
Terminal
Applicable inverter capacity [kW] 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 90 110 When a DC fuse is connected to the converter output, a microswitch for detecting blow-out of
DCF1,DCF2 DC fuse blow-out detection input – the DC fuse is connected to this terminal. This terminal corresponds to the "b" contact output.
Continuous capacity [kW] 13 18 22 26 36 44 53 65 88 103 126 DC 24V 12mA Typ
LD(VT) Output Overload rating 120% of rated current for 1 min. PLC PLC signal power Connects with the PLC output signal power supply. (Rated voltage: 24V (22 to 27V) DC)
30A, 30B, 30C Outputs a signal when a protective function is activated to stop the converter.
Specifications Voltage 200V DC320 to 355V (Variable with input power supply voltage) (*3) Alarm relay output (for any fault)
(Contact at 1C, Circuit between 30A and 30C comes ON when an alarm occurs) (Contact capacity: 250V AC, max 50mA.)
Y1, Y2, Y3, Y11 to Y18 0: Inverter running [RUN] 1: Operation ready output [RDY] 2: Power supply current limiting [IL] 3: Lifetime alarm [LIFE] 4: Cooling fin overload [PRE-OH]
Required power supply capacity [kVA] 14 19 24 29 38 47 57 70 93 111 136 General-purpose transistor output
5: Overload alarm [PRE-OL] 6: Driving [DRV] 7: Regenerating [REG] 8: Current limit alarm [CUR]9: Under restart [U-RES]
Protective
Carrier frequency Standard 10kHz Standard 6kHz
Functions
CME Digital output common 10: Power supply frequency synchronizing [SY-HZ] 11: Alarm indication [AL1]12: Alarm indication 2 [AL2] 13: Alarm indication 4 [AL4]
Y5A, Y5C 14: Optional DO [OPT-DO]
Power supply Number of phase/Voltage/Frequency 3-phase 3-wire, 200 to 220V 50Hz,220 to 230V 50Hz(*1), 200 to 230V 60Hz Output signal Relay output
* With OPC-VG7-DIO option, 8-point expanded functions become available (DI function is not available.)
voltage Voltage/Frequency variation Voltage+10 to -15% Frequency ± 5%, Voltage unbalance: 2% or less (*4) 0: Input power [PWR] 1: Input current rms [I-AC] 2: Input voltage rms [V-AC] 3: DC link circuit voltage [V-DC]
A01, A04, A05 General-purpose analog output 4: Power supply frequency [FREQ] 5: + 10V output test [P10] - 10V output test [N10]
* With OPC-VG7-AIO option, 2-point expanded functions become available (Ai function is not usable.)
400V series M Analog output common Common terminal to analog output signals.
73A, 73C Charging circuit relay output Control output for the input relay of the external charging resistor (73)
Item Standard Specifications
Dimensions
Communication specification
External
Type RHC -4 (*5) 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 90 110 132 160 200 220 280 315 355 400 500 630 710 800
Applicable inverter capacity [kW] 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 90 110 132 160 200 220 280 315 355 400 500 630 710 800 Specifications
Item
Continuous capacity [kW] 8.8 13 18 22 26 36 44 53 65 88 103 126 150 182 227 247 314 353 448 Unit Type Stack Type
400 560 705 795 896
Enables to show running information and running status, and to monitor the function code (polling), and to control (selecting) RUN, RST, and X1.
General specifications for communication
MD(CT) Output Overload rating 150% of rated current for 1 min. * No function code can be written.
RS-485 Communicates with the PC or PLC (Fuji protocol and modbus RTU are supported).
Specifications Voltage 200V DC640 to 710V (Variable with input power supply voltage) (*3) T-Link (option card) OPC-VG7-TL option allows T-Link communication with the T-Link module in the MICREX-F or MICREX-SX.
Functions of Parts
Required power supply capacity [kVA] 9.5 14 19 24 29 38 47 57 70 93 111 136 161 196 244 267 341 383 433 488 610 762 858 967 Communication
SX bus (option card) OPC-VG7-SX option allows connection with MICREX-SX via SX bus.
Names and
CC-Link (option card) OPC-VG7-CCL option allows connection with the CC-Link master device.
Carrier frequency(*6) Standard 15kHz Standard 10kHz Standard 5kHz Specification
Trace back (optional) OPC-RHC-TR option allows trace-back of the converter operation status data.
Hardware
Applicable inverter capacity [kW] The software (WPS-LD-TR) is required.
11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 90 110 132 160 200 220 280 315 355 400 500 710 800 1000 Software WPS-RHC-TR software allows collecting the trace back data on the PC.
Continuous capacity [kW] 13 18 22 26 36 44 53 65 88 103 126 150 182 227 247 314 353 400 448 560 795 896 1120 Optical communications (optional) OPC-VG7-SI option allows sharing the load by connecting in parallel 2 or more converters.
Therefore, a capacity of up to 2400kW can be supported.
LD(VT) Output Overload rating 120% of rated current for 1 min.(*7)
Specifications Function Settings Protective Functions

Voltage 200V DC640 to 710V (Variable with input power supply voltage) (*3)

Required power supply capacity [kVA] 14 19 24 29 38 47 57 70 93 111 136 161 196 244 267 341 383 433 488 610 858 967 1210 Name Protection Specifications
Function code Item Displays Remarks
Carrier frequency(*6) Standard 10kHz Standard 6kHz Unit Type Stack Type Unit Type Stack Type
F00 Data protection AC fuse blown ACF When the AC fuse is blown (only R and T phases), the converter stops running.
Power supply Number of phase/Voltage/Frequency 3-phase 3-wire, 380 to 440V 50Hz,380 to 460V 60Hz(*2) F01 High-frequency filter selection AC overvoltage AOV The converter stops running on detection of AC overvoltage.
voltage Voltage/Frequency variation Voltage+10 to -15% Frequency ± 5%, Voltage unbalance: 2% or less (*4) F02 Restart mode after momentary power failure (operation selection) AC undervoltage ALV The converter stops running on detection of AC undervoltage.
F03 Current rating switching AC overcurrent AOC The converter stops running if the input current peak value exceeds the overcurrent level.
(*1) 220 to 230V / 50Hz model available on request. LED monitor (Display selection) AC input current error ACE The converter stops running on detection of excessive deviation between AC input and ACR.
F04
Input phase loss LPV The converter stops running if the input phase loss occurs in the power supply.
(*2) The tap in the converter must be switched when the power supply voltage is 380 to 398V / 50Hz or 380 to 430V / 60Hz. The capacity must be reduced when the power supply voltage is less than 400V. F05 LCD monitor (Display selection)
Synchronous power FrE The power supply frequency is checked after 73 is input. If a frequency error is detected, the converter
(*3) The output voltage is 320 / 640V DC, 343 / 686V DC, 355 / 710V DC when the power supply voltage is 200 / 400V, 220 / 440V and 230 / 460V, respectively. F06 LCD monitor (Language selection) supply frequency error stops running. Error during converter running (such as momentary power failure) triggers no alarm.
F07 LCD monitor (Contrast adjusting) DC fuse blown dCF The converter stops running if the DC fuse is blown (P side). Above 18.5kW
(*4) Voltage unbalance [%] = (Max. voltage [V] - Min. voltage [V])/Three-phase average voltage [V] × 67
F08 Carrier frequency DC overvoltage dOV The converter stops running on detection of DC overvoltage. 200V series: Above 400V ± 3V
(*5) Unit type: 7.5 to 630kW, Stack type: 132 to 315 and 630 to 800kW E01 X1 function selection If the power failure takes long and the control power goes out, the converter is 400V series: Above 800V ± 5V
(*6) Always 5kHz for the stack type. E02 to 13 Y1,Y2,Y3,Y5, automatically reset.
(*7) Stack type: 110% of constant rating for 1 minute Y11 to 18 function selection DC undervoltage dLV The converter stops running on detection of DC undervoltage. 200V series: Goes off at 185V and restarts at 208V
If the power failure takes long and the control power goes out, the converter is
Wiring Diagram
E14 I/O function normally open/normally closed 400V series: Goes off at 371V and restarts at 417V
automatically reset.
Common specifications (Unit and Stack Type) E15
E16
RHC overload early warning level
Cooling fan ON-OFF control Charge circuit error PbF When the charge circuit error is detected by using the 73 answerback signal Condition: X1 “73 Answerback” is selected.
Output while limiting the current (hysteresis width) configured in the digital input X1, the converter stops running.
E17
Specifications Cooling fin overheat OH1 The converter stops running if the cooling fin overheat is detected.
Item E18 to 20 A01, A04, A05 function selection
External alarm OH2 The converter stops running if an external signal (THR) is input. Condition: X1 “External alarm” is selected.
Unit Type Stack Type E21 to 23 A01, A04, A05 gain setting Converter internal overheat OH3 When overheat is detected in the inverter, the converter stops running.
E24 to 26 A01, A04, A05 bias setting
Control method AVR constant control with ACR minor loop. Converter overload OLU When the output current exceeds the overload characteristic of the inverse time characteristic, the converter stops running. Start point: 105%, 150% 1 minute
E27 A01 to 5 filter setting Memory error Er1 When a fault such as “write error” occurs in the memory (checksum values in EEPROM
Rectification starts with power ON after connected. Boosting starts with the running signal (RUN-CM short-circuit S01 Operation method and RAM do not match), the converter stops running.
Running and operation S02,03 Power supply current limit (drive/ control) Keypad communication error Er2 Activated if an error is detected during initial communication.
or running command from communications). Then, preparation for operation is completed.
Options
H01 Station address The converter continues operating.
Running status signal Running, driving, regenerating, operation ready, alarm relay output (for any fault), etc. H02 Communication error processing selection CPU error Er3 Activated if an error is detected in the CPU.
H03 Timer operation time Network device error Er4 The converter stops running if a fatal error is detected in the master network device Applicable to T-Link, SX and CC-Link
control MD(CT)/LD(VT) switching Selecting from MD (CT): Overload rating 150% (1 min.) and LD (VT): Overload rating 120% (1 min.) Selecting from MD (CT): Overload rating 150% (1 min.) and LD (VT): Overload rating 110% (1 min.) (including unconnected power supply).
H04 Baud rate
Carrier frequency Fixed to high carrier frequency 5kHz H05 Data length selection Operation procedure error Er6 When an error is detected in operation procedure, the converter stops running.
A/D converter error Er8 When an error is detected in the A/D converter circuit, the converter stops running.
Input power factor Above 0.99 (when 100% loading) H06 Parity bit selection
Optical network error Erb The converter stops running if the optical cable is disconnected or a fatal error is detected in an optical device (optional)
H07 Stop bit selection IPM error IPE Activated if IPM self-shutoff function is triggered by
Input harmonics current According to the guideline for suppressing harmonics issued by the Ministry of Economy, Trade and Industry, the converter factor (Ki) can be set to 0. – Less than 15kW
H08 No-response error detection time excessive current or overheat.
Warranty
Restart mode after momentary power failure Stops the gates when the voltage level reaches undervoltage level if momentary power failure occurs, and the converter can automatically restart after the power recovers. H09 Response interval time
Power limit control Controls the power not to exceed the preset limit value.
H10
H11
Protocol selection
TL transmission format Structure and environment
AC fuse blown, AC overvoltage, AC undervoltage, AC overcurrent, AC input current error, Input phase loss, Synchronous power supply H12 Parallel system Structure, environment and standard
H13 Number of slave stations in parallel system Item Remarks
Alarm display frequency error, DC fuse blown, DC overvoltage, DC undervoltage, Charge circuit error, Heat sink overheat, External alarm, Converter Unit Type Stack Type
H14 Alarm data deletion Structure Installed in the panel and cooled by external device
(protective functions) overheat, Overload, Memory error, Keypad communication error, CPU error, Network device error, Operation procedure error, A/D H15,16 Power supply current limit (drive 1/2) Protective structure IP00
Delivery Period
H17,18 Power supply current limit (control 1/2) Structure Cooling system Forced air cooling
converter error, Optical network error, IPM error (*1)
and Code
Displays H19,20 Current limit early warning (level/ timer) Specifications Installation method Vertical installation
Records and displays the last 10 alarms. M09 Power supply frequency Painting Color Munsell 5Y3/0.5 half-burnished
of Alarm history M10 Input power Maintainability Structure designed for easy parts change
Keypad The detailed information of the trip cause for the latest alarm is stored and displayed. • Indoor (location free from corrosive gas, flammable gas, dust and oil mist) (Pollution level 2: IEC 60664-1)
M11 Effective input current Location
Monitor Displays input power, input effective current, input effective voltage, DC intermediate current and power supply frequency. M12 Effective input voltage • No direct sunlight.
M13 Run command Ambient temperature -10 to 50°C -10 to +40°C
Load factor The load rate can be measured by using the keypad. Humidity 5 to 95% RH Without condensing
M14 Running status
Display language
Text can displayed in 3 languages: Japanese, English and Chinese. M15 Output terminals Y1 to Y18 Less than 3000m (output reduction may occur if the Less than 3000m
altitude is in the range between 1001 and 3000m) However, the output may be reduced at the altitude of 1001 to 3000m
Guidelines for
Charge LED Lights when the main circuit capacitor is charged. Environment Altitude
For use at the altitude of 2001 to 3000m, the insulation class of the control
circuit is changed from "Enhanced insulation" to "Basic insulation."
(*1) Not available in the stack type
2 to 9Hz: Amplitude=3mm, 9 to 20Hz: 9.8m / s2, 20 to 55Hz: 2m / s2 Amplitude = 0.3mm, 2 to 9Hz:
Vibration
(9 to 55Hz: 2 m / s is used if the power is higher than 90kW.)
2
1m / s2:9 to 200Hz2
Storage temperature -20 to 55°C -25 to 70°C (-10 to +30°C for long-term storage)
Storage humidity 5 to 95%RH
46 47
Options
Equipment Configuration List Basic Wiring Diagram
Standard
MD(CT) Specifications <Unit Type> <Stack Type> <Unit Type> <Stack Type>
Charging circuit box (*1) RHC7.5-2C to RHC90-2C RHC132S-4D to RHC220S-4D RHC7.5-2C to RHC90-2C RHC132S-4D to RHC220S-4D
Power Nominal PWM Charging circuit Contactor for Boosting Resistor Reactor Capacitor Filtering circuit
Supply applied converter contactor power source Charging resistor AC Fuse reactor for filter for filter for filter contactor RHC7.5-4C to RHC220-4C CU (Charge BOX) RHC7.5-4C to RHC220-4C
Converter Inverter Converter Inverter
Voltage motor [kW] Type *When adapting a charge BOX 11 R0 R0
(73) Q'ty (52) Q'ty (CU) Q'ty (R0) Q'ty (Fac) Q'ty (Lr) Q'ty (Rf) Q'ty (Lf) Q'ty (Cf) Q'ty (6F) Q'ty
Common
12 (DCF1) (DCF1) (DCF1) (DCF1)
(Note 7) (Note 7)
7.5 RHC7.5-2C SC-5-1 1 CU7.5-2C 1 (80W 7.5Ω) (3) (CR2LS-50/UL) (2) LR2-7.5C 1 GRZG80 0.42Ω 3 LFC2-7.5C 1 CF2-7.5C 1 13 (DCF2) (DCF2) (DCF2) (DCF2)
11 RHC11-2C SC-N1 1 CU11-2C 1 (HF5C5504) (CR2LS-75/UL) (2) LR2-15C 1 GRZG150 0.2Ω 3 LFC2-15C 1 CF2-15C 1 52 Lf Lr 73
1 Fac 4 Fdc 52 Lf Lr 73 Fac Fdc
L1/R P(+) P(+) U L1/R P(+) P(+) U
15 RHC15-2C SC-N2 1 CU15-2C 1 (CR2LS-100/UL) (2) 2 5
L2/S V M L2/S V M
3 Fac 6 Fac
18.5 RHC18.5-2C SC-N3 1 CU18.5-2C 1 (GRZG120 2Ω) (3) LR2-22C 1 GRZG200 0.13Ω 3 LFC2-22C 1 CF2-22C 1 L3/T N(-) N(-) W L3/T N(-) N(-) W
R2
22 RHC22-2C CU22-2C 1 (CR2L-150/UL) (2) R2 R2
Rf T2 g R1 Rf g R1
G T2 T2
3-phase 30 RHC30-2C SC-N4 1 CU30-2C 1 (CR2L-200/UL) (2) LR2-37C 1 GRZG400 0.1Ω 3 LFC2-37C 1 CF2-37C 1 Cf h T1 (Note 4) Cf h T1 (Note 4)
Functions
ef ef
Terminal
200V 37 RHC37-2C SC-N5 1 CU45-2C 1 (CR2L-260/UL) (2) R1 FX R1 FX
S1 Y5A e FWD S1 Y5A e FWD
45 RHC45-2C SC-N7 1 LR2-55C 1 LFC2-55C 1 CF2-55C 1
T1 Y5C f CM T1 Y5C f CM
55 RHC55-2C SC-N8 1 CU55-2C 1 (CR2L-400/UL) (2) 52 or 73 (Note 2)
30A (Note 5)
52 or 73 (Note 2)
30A (Note 5)
R0 R0
75 RHC75-2C SC-N11 1 CU75-2C 1 LR2-75C 1 LFC2-75C 1 CF2-75C 1 T0 30B X9(THR) 13 T0 30B X9(THR) 13
g i g i
(Note 3) 30C CM 12 (Note 3) 30C CM 12
90 RHC90-2C CU90-2C 1 (GRZG400 1Ω) (3) (A50P600-4) (2) LR2-110C 1 GRZG400 0.12Ω 6 LFC2-110C 1 CF2-110C 1 h j h j
30A 11 30A 11
[2 parallel] 73A 73A
a 30B a 30B
7.5 RHC7.5-4C SC-05 1 CU7.5-4C 1 (TK50B 30ΩJ) (3) (CR6L-30/UL) (2) LR4-7.5C 1 GRZG80 1.74Ω 3 LFC4-7.5C 1 CF4-7.5C 1 73C 73C
Protective
RUN, b 30C RUN, b 30C
Functions
RUN RUN
READY 52 RUN FX READY 52 RUN FX
11 RHC11-4C SC-4-0 1 CU15-4C 1 (HF5B0416) (CR6L-50/UL) (2) LR4-15C 1 GRZG150 0.79Ω 3 LFC4-15C 1 CF4-15C 1 RUN i R0 RUN i R0
15 RHC15-4C SC-5-1 1 a RST j T0 a RST j T0

b CM E(G) E(G) b CM E(G) E(G)
18.5 RHC18.5-4C SC-N1 1 CU18.5-4C 1 (80W 7.5Ω) (3) LR4-22C 1 GRZG200 0.53Ω 3 LFC4-22C 1 CF4-22C 1 220V or less 73 Stop 220V or less 73 Stop
(Note 1) (Note 1)
22 RHC22-4C CU22-4C 1 (HF5C5504) (CR6L-75/UL) (2)
RUN RUN
30 RHC30-4C SC-N2 1 CU30-4C 1 (CR6L-100/UL) (2) LR4-37C 1 GRZG400 0.38Ω 3 LFC4-37C 1 CF4-37C 1 Symbol Part name Symbol Part name
Lr Boosting reactor Lr Boosting reactor
37 RHC37-4C SC-N2S 1 CU45-4C 1 (CR6L-150/UL) (2) MC RUN FX 73 Lf Reactor for filter MC RUN FX 73 Lf Reactor for filter
Dimensions
45 RHC45-4C SC-N3 1 LR4-55C 1 GRZG400 0.26Ω 3 LFC4-55C 1 CF4-55C 1 Cf Capacitor for filter Cf Capacitor for filter
External
Rf Resistor for filter Rf Resistor for filter
55 RHC55-4C SC-N4 1 CU55-4C 1 (CR6L-200/UL) (2) R0 Charging resistor R0 Charging resistor
75 RHC75-4C SC-N5 1 CU75-4C 1 LR4-75C 1 GRZG400 0.38Ω 3 LFC4-75C 1 CF4-75C 1 Fac AC fuse Fac AC fuse
Fdc DC fuse Fdc DC fuse
90 RHC90-4C SC-N7 1 CU90-4C 1 (CR6L-300/UL) (2) LR4-110C 1 GRZG400 0.53Ω 6 LFC4-110C 1 CF4-110C 1 73 Electromagnetic contactor for charge circuit 73 Electromagnetic contactor for charge circuit
52 Electromagnetic contactor for power supply 52 Electromagnetic contactor for power supply
3-phase 110 RHC110-4C SC-N8 1 CU110-4C 1 (GRZG120 2Ω) (3) [2 parallel]
132 RHC132 -4 CU132-4C 1 (A50P400-4) (2) LR4-160C 1 RF4-160C 1 LFC4-160C 1 CF4-160C 1 (Note 1) If the main power supply is 400V series, connect a step-down transformer to limit the (Note 1) If the main power supply is 400V series, connect a step-down transformer to limit the
400V
voltage of the sequence circuit lower than 220V. voltage of the sequence circuit lower than 220V.
160 RHC160 -4 SC-N11 1 CU160-4C 1 (A50P600-4) (2)
Functions of Parts
(Note 2) The auxiliary power supply input terminals for the PWM converter (R0, T0) must be connected to the (Note 2) The auxiliary power supply input terminals for the PWM converter (R0, T0) must be connected to the
200 RHC200 -4 SC-N12 1 CU200-4C 1 (GRZG400 1Ω) (3) LR4-220C 1 RF4-220C 1 LFC4-220C 1 CF4-220C 1 main power supply via the contact“ b” of the charging circuit electromagnetic contactor (73 or 52). main power supply via the contact“ b” of the charging circuit electromagnetic contactor (73 or 52).
Names and
220 RHC220 -4 CU220-4C 1 (A70QS800-4) (2) When applying ungrounded power supply, ground transformer must be set. When applying ungrounded power supply, ground transformer must be set.
280 RHC280 -4 SC-N3 1 SC-N14 1 GRZG400 1Ω 6 A70QS800-4 2 LR4-280C 1 RF4-280C 1 LFC4-280C 1 CF4-280C 1 SC-N4/SF 1 (Note 3) Make sure to connect the auxiliary power supply input terminals of the inverter (R0,T0) to (Note 3) Make sure to connect the auxiliary power supply input terminals of the inverter (R0,T0) to
315 RHC315 -4 [2 parallel] A70P1600-4TA 2 LR4-315C 1 RF4-315C 1 LFC4-315C 1 CF4-315C 1 the main power supply via the contact "b" of the charging circuit electromagnetic contactor the main power supply via the contact "b" of the charging circuit electromagnetic contactor
(73 or 52). For the capacities FRN37VG1S-2 and FRN75VG1S-4 or higher and stack type (73 or 52). For the capacities FRN37VG1S-2 and FRN75VG1S-4 or higher and stack type
355 RHC355-4C LR4-355C 1 RF4-355C 1 LFC4-355C 1 CF4-355C 1
inverter (all capacity range), connect the inverter fan power auxiliary input terminals (R1,T1) inverter (all capacity range), connect the inverter fan power auxiliary input terminals (R1,T1)
400 RHC400-4C SC-N16 1 LR4-400C 1 RF4-400C 1 LFC4-400C 1 CF4-400C 1 to the main power supply without passing through the contact "b" of 73 or 52. to the main power supply without passing through the contact "b" of 73 or 52.
500 RHC500-4C SC-N11 3 LR4-500C 1 RF4-500C 1 LFC4-500C 1 CF4-500C 1(*2) (Note 4) Use the sequence that the run command signal is input in the inverter after the PWM converter becomes ready. (Note 4) Use the sequence that the run command signal is input in the inverter after the PWM converter becomes ready.

630 RHC630 -4 SC-N12 3 A70P2000-4(*3) 2 LR4-630C 1 RF4-630C 1 LFC4-630C 1 CF4-630C 1(*2) SC-N7 1 (Note 5) One of terminals (X1 to X9) on the inverter unit must be set to external alarm (THR). (Note 5) One of terminals (X1 to X9) on the inverter unit must be set to external alarm (THR).
710 RHC710B-4 SC-N4 1 HF5G2655 2 LR4-710C 1 RF4-710C 1 LFC4-710C 1 CF4-710C 1(*2) SC-N8 (Note 6) Be sure to connect the L1/R, L2/S, L3/T, R2, T2, R1, S1, and T1 terminals keeping the phase sequence. (Note 6) Be sure to connect the L1/R, L2/S, L3/T, R2, T2, R1, S1, and T1 terminals keeping the phase sequence.
1
(Note 7) Not available in the unit type inverter. (Note 7) Not available in the unit type inverter.
800 RHC800B-4 SC-N14 3 LR4-800C 1 RF4-800C 1 LFC4-800C 1 CF4-800C 1(*2)
LD (CT) Specifications <Unit Type> <Stack Type> <Unit Type> <Stack Type>
Charging circuit box (*1) RHC280-4C to RHC400-4C RHC280S-4D to RHC315S-4D RHC500-4C to RHC630-4C RHC630S-4D to RHC800B-4D
Supply applied converter contactor power source Charging resistor AC Fuse reactor for filter for filter for filter contactor
Voltage motor [kW] Type 73 73
(73) Q'ty (52) Q'ty (CU) Q'ty (R0) Q'ty (Fac) Q'ty (Lr) Q'ty (Rf) Q'ty (Lf) Q'ty (Cf) Q'ty (6F) Q'ty R0 R0
11 RHC7.5-2C SC-N1 1 CU7.5-2C 1 (80W 7.5Ω) (3) (CR2LS-50/UL) (2) LR2-15C 1 GRZG150 0.2Ω 3 LFC2-15C 1 CF2-15C 1
15 RHC11-2C SC-N2 1 CU11-2C 1 (HF5C5504) (CR2LS-75/UL) (2) (DCF1) (DCF1) (DCF1) (DCF1)
52 (Note 8) 52-1 to 52-3 (Note 8)
18.5 RHC15-2C SC-N3 1 CU15-2C 1 (CR2LS-100/UL) (2) LR2-22C 1 GRZG200 0.13Ω 3 LFC2-22C 1 CF2-22C 1 Lf Lr Fac (DCF2) (DCF2) Lf Lr Fac (DCF2) (DCF2)
L1/R L1/R
22 RHC18.5-2C CU18.5-2C 1 (GRZG120 2Ω) (3)
Wiring Diagram
30 RHC22-2C SC-N4 1 CU22-2C 1 (CR2L-150/UL) (2) LR2-37C 1 GRZG400 0.1Ω 3 LFC2-37C 1 CF2-37C 1 Fdc Fdc
3-phase P(+) P(+) U P(+) P(+) U
L2/S L2/S
37 RHC30-2C SC-N5 1 CU30-2C 1 (CR2L-200/UL) (2) V M V M
200V N(-) N(-) N(-) N(-)
45 RHC37-2C SC-N7 1 CU45-2C 1 (CR2L-260/UL) (2) LR2-55C 1 LFC2-55C 1 CF2-55C 1 Fac W Fac W
L3/T i R0 L3/T i R0
55 RHC45-2C SC-N8 1 R2 j T0 R2 j T0
6F g R1 6F g R1
75 RHC55-2C SC-N11 1 CU55-2C 1 (CR2L-400/UL) (2) LR2-75C 1 LFC2-75C 1 CF2-75C 1 T2 T2
h T1 (Note 4) h T1 (Note 4)
Rf RUN e f Rf RUN e f
90 RHC75-2C CU75-2C 1 LR2-110C 1 GRZG400 0.12Ω 6 LFC2-110C 1 CF2-110C 1 RUN Y5A e FX RUN Y5A e FX
RST Y5C f (Note 6) FWD RST Y5C f (Note 6) FWD
110 RHC90-2C SC-N12 1 CU90-2C 1 (GRZG400 1Ω) (3) (A50P600-4) (2) [2 parallel] Cf2 CM 30A X9 Cf1 Cf2
CM 30A X9
30B CM 30B CM
11 RHC7.5-4C SC-4-0 1 CU7.5-4C 1 (TK50B 30ΩJ) (3) (CR6L-30/UL) (2) LR4-15C 1 GRZG150 0.79Ω 3 LFC4-15C 1 CF4-15C 1 (THR) (THR)
R1 30C CM 13 R1 30C CM 13
15 RHC11-4C SC-5-1 1 CU15-4C 1 (HF5B0416) (CR6L-50/UL) (2) S1 12 S1 12
T1 30A T1 30A
Options
11 11
18.5 RHC15-4C SC-N1 1 LR4-22C 1 GRZG200 0.53Ω 3 LFC4-22C 1 CF4-22C 1 52 a 30B 52 a 30B
R0 R0
T0 b 30C T0 b 30C
22 RHC18.5-4C CU18.5-4C 1 (80W 7.5Ω) (3) g (Note 2) c 73A g (Note 2) c 73A
E(G) E(G) E(G) E(G)
h d 73C h d 73C
30 RHC22-4C SC-N2 1 CU22-4C 1 (HF5C5504) (CR6L-75/UL) (2) LR4-37C 1 GRZG400 0.38Ω 3 LFC4-37C 1 CF4-37C 1 (Note 3)
i j
(Note 3)
i j
37 RHC30-4C SC-N2S 1 CU30-4C 1 (CR6L-100/UL) (2)

45 RHC37-4C SC-N3 1 CU45-4C 1 (CR6L-150/UL) (2) LR4-55C 1 GRZG400 0.26Ω 3 LFC4-55C 1 CF4-55C 1 RUN, RUN,
READY RDY RDY 52A 52 RUN FX READY RDY RDY 52A 52-1 RUN FX
55 RHC45-4C SC-N4 1 a c Symbol Part name a c Symbol Part name
b d Lr Boosting reactor b d 52-2 Lr Boosting reactor
75 RHC55-4C SC-N5 1 CU55-4C 1 (CR6L-200/UL) (2) LR4-75C 1 GRZG400 0.38Ω 3 LFC4-75C 1 CF4-75C 1 52T
Stop
52T
52-1 52T Stop
Reactor for filter Reactor for filter
Warranty
52 52T Lf Lf
90 RHC75-4C SC-N7 1 CU75-4C 1 LR4-110C 1 GRZG400 0.53Ω 6 LFC4-110C 1 CF4-110C 1 220V or less Cf Capacitor for filter 220V or less 52-3 Cf Capacitor for filter
RUN 52-2 6F RUN
(Note 1) Rf Resistor for filter (Note 1) Rf Resistor for filter
110 RHC90-4C SC-N8 1 CU90-4C 1 (CR6L-300/UL) (2) [2 parallel] 6F
3-phase (Note 5) R0 Charging resistor 52-3 R0 Charging resistor
132 RHC110 -4 CU110-4C 1 (GRZG120 2Ω) (3) LR4-160C 1 RF4-160C 1 LFC4-160C 1 CF4-160C 1 Fac AC fuse Fac AC fuse
400V RDY 73 52A 52 52T RUN 6F FX Fdc DC fuse RDY 73 52A 52-1 52-2 52-3 52T RUN 6F FX Fdc DC fuse
160 RHC132 -4 SC-N11 1 CU132-4C 1 (A50P400-4) (2)
73 Electromagnetic contactor for charge circuit (Note 5) 73 Electromagnetic contactor for charge circuit
200 RHC160 -4 SC-N12 1 CU160-4C 1 (A50P600-4) (2) LR4-220C 1 RF4-220C 1 LFC4-220C 1 CF4-220C 1 52 Electromagnetic contactor for power supply 52 Electromagnetic contactor for power supply
220 RHC200 -4 CU200-4C 1 (GRZG400 1Ω) (3) 6F Electromagnetic contactor for filter circuit 6F Electromagnetic contactor for filter circuit
Delivery Period
280 RHC220 -4 SC-N14 1 CU220-4C 1 (GRZG400 1Ω) (3) (A70QS800-4) (2) LR4-280C 1 RF4-280C 1 LFC4-280C 1 CF4-280C 1 (Note 1) Connect a step-down transformer to limit the voltage of the sequence circuit lower than 220V. (Note 1) Connect a step-down transformer to limit the voltage of the sequence circuit lower than 220V.
and Code
315 RHC280 -4 SC-N3 1 SC-N14 1 GRZG400 1Ω 6 A70QS800-4 2 LR4-315C 1 RF4-315C 1 LFC4-315C 1 CF4-315C 1 SC-N4/SF 1
355 RHC315 -4 [2 parallel] A70P1600-4TA 2 LR4-355C 1 RF4-355C 1 LFC4-355C 1 CF4-355C 1 main power supply via the contact "b" of the charging circuit electromagnetic contactor (52). When main power supply via the contact "b" of the charging circuit electromagnetic contactor (52). When
applying ungrounded power supply, grounded transformer must be set. applying ungrounded power supply, grounded transformer must be set.
400 RHC355-4C SC-N16 1 LR4-400C 1 RF4-400C 1 LFC4-400C 1 CF4-400C 1
(Note 3) Since the AC fan power supply receives power from R1 and T1 terminals, the power supply (Note 3) Since the AC fan power supply receives power from R1 and T1 terminals, the power supply
500 RHC400-4C SC-N11 3 LR4-500C 1 RF4-500C 1 LFC4-500C 1 CF4-500C 1(*2) must be connected without passing through the contact “b” of 73 or 52. must be connected without passing through the contact “b” of 73 or 52.
710 RHC630B-4 SC-N12 3 HF5G2655 2 LR4-710C 1 RF4-710C 1 LFC4-710C 1 CF4-710C 1(*2) (Note 4) Use the sequence that the run command signal is input in the inverter after the PWM (Note 4) Use the sequence that the run command signal is input in the inverter after the PWM
800 RHC710B-4 SC-N14 3 2 LR4-800C 1 RF4-800C 1 LFC4-800C 1 CF4-800C 1(*2) converter becomes ready. converter becomes ready.
1000 RHC800B-4 Contact Fuji. (Note 5) The 52T timer must be set to 1 sec. (Note 5) The 52T timer must be set to 1 sec.
(Note 6) One of terminals (X1 to X9) on the inverter unit must be set to external alarm (THR). (Note 6) One of terminals (X1 to X9) on the inverter unit must be set to external alarm (THR).
Guidelines for
(*1) The charging resistor (R0) and AC fuse (Fac) have been built inside the charging circuit box (CU). When the charging circuit box (CU) is not ordered, the charging resistor (R0) and fuse (Fac) must be ordered separately. (Note 7) Be sure to connect the L1/R, L2/S, L3/T, R2, T2, R1, S1, and T1 terminals keeping the (Note 7) Be sure to connect the L1/R, L2/S, L3/T, R2, T2, R1, S1, and T1 terminals keeping the
(*2) The filter capacitor consists of two capacitors. A pair of capacitors is shipped by ordering "1" pc. phase sequence. phase sequence.
(*3) The "SA598473" will be used for the stack type inverter.
48 49
Options
Equipment Configuration List Basic Wiring Diagram
Standard
MD(CT) Specifications <Unit Type> <Stack Type> <Unit Type> <Stack Type>
Charging circuit box (*1) RHC7.5-2C to RHC90-2C RHC132S-4D to RHC220S-4D RHC7.5-2C to RHC90-2C RHC132S-4D to RHC220S-4D
Supply applied converter contactor power source Charging resistor AC Fuse reactor for filter for filter for filter contactor RHC7.5-4C to RHC220-4C CU (Charge BOX) RHC7.5-4C to RHC220-4C
Voltage motor [kW] Type *When adapting a charge BOX 11 R0 R0
(73) Q'ty (52) Q'ty (CU) Q'ty (R0) Q'ty (Fac) Q'ty (Lr) Q'ty (Rf) Q'ty (Lf) Q'ty (Cf) Q'ty (6F) Q'ty
Common
12 (DCF1) (DCF1) (DCF1) (DCF1)
(Note 7) (Note 7)
7.5 RHC7.5-2C SC-5-1 1 CU7.5-2C 1 (80W 7.5Ω) (3) (CR2LS-50/UL) (2) LR2-7.5C 1 GRZG80 0.42Ω 3 LFC2-7.5C 1 CF2-7.5C 1 13 (DCF2) (DCF2) (DCF2) (DCF2)
11 RHC11-2C SC-N1 1 CU11-2C 1 (HF5C5504) (CR2LS-75/UL) (2) LR2-15C 1 GRZG150 0.2Ω 3 LFC2-15C 1 CF2-15C 1 52 Lf Lr 73
1 Fac 4 Fdc 52 Lf Lr 73 Fac Fdc
L1/R P(+) P(+) U L1/R P(+) P(+) U
15 RHC15-2C SC-N2 1 CU15-2C 1 (CR2LS-100/UL) (2) 2 5
L2/S V M L2/S V M
3 Fac 6 Fac
18.5 RHC18.5-2C SC-N3 1 CU18.5-2C 1 (GRZG120 2Ω) (3) LR2-22C 1 GRZG200 0.13Ω 3 LFC2-22C 1 CF2-22C 1 L3/T N(-) N(-) W L3/T N(-) N(-) W
R2
22 RHC22-2C CU22-2C 1 (CR2L-150/UL) (2) R2 R2
Rf T2 g R1 Rf g R1
G T2 T2
3-phase 30 RHC30-2C SC-N4 1 CU30-2C 1 (CR2L-200/UL) (2) LR2-37C 1 GRZG400 0.1Ω 3 LFC2-37C 1 CF2-37C 1 Cf h T1 (Note 4) Cf h T1 (Note 4)
Functions
ef ef
Terminal
200V 37 RHC37-2C SC-N5 1 CU45-2C 1 (CR2L-260/UL) (2) R1 FX R1 FX
S1 Y5A e FWD S1 Y5A e FWD
45 RHC45-2C SC-N7 1 LR2-55C 1 LFC2-55C 1 CF2-55C 1
T1 Y5C f CM T1 Y5C f CM
55 RHC55-2C SC-N8 1 CU55-2C 1 (CR2L-400/UL) (2) 52 or 73 (Note 2)
30A (Note 5)
52 or 73 (Note 2)
30A (Note 5)
R0 R0
75 RHC75-2C SC-N11 1 CU75-2C 1 LR2-75C 1 LFC2-75C 1 CF2-75C 1 T0 30B X9(THR) 13 T0 30B X9(THR) 13
g i g i
(Note 3) 30C CM 12 (Note 3) 30C CM 12
90 RHC90-2C CU90-2C 1 (GRZG400 1Ω) (3) (A50P600-4) (2) LR2-110C 1 GRZG400 0.12Ω 6 LFC2-110C 1 CF2-110C 1 h j h j
30A 11 30A 11
[2 parallel] 73A 73A
a 30B a 30B
7.5 RHC7.5-4C SC-05 1 CU7.5-4C 1 (TK50B 30ΩJ) (3) (CR6L-30/UL) (2) LR4-7.5C 1 GRZG80 1.74Ω 3 LFC4-7.5C 1 CF4-7.5C 1 73C 73C
Protective
RUN, b 30C RUN, b 30C
Functions
RUN RUN
READY 52 RUN FX READY 52 RUN FX
11 RHC11-4C SC-4-0 1 CU15-4C 1 (HF5B0416) (CR6L-50/UL) (2) LR4-15C 1 GRZG150 0.79Ω 3 LFC4-15C 1 CF4-15C 1 RUN i R0 RUN i R0
15 RHC15-4C SC-5-1 1 a RST j T0 a RST j T0

b CM E(G) E(G) b CM E(G) E(G)
18.5 RHC18.5-4C SC-N1 1 CU18.5-4C 1 (80W 7.5Ω) (3) LR4-22C 1 GRZG200 0.53Ω 3 LFC4-22C 1 CF4-22C 1 220V or less 73 Stop 220V or less 73 Stop
(Note 1) (Note 1)
22 RHC22-4C CU22-4C 1 (HF5C5504) (CR6L-75/UL) (2)
RUN RUN
30 RHC30-4C SC-N2 1 CU30-4C 1 (CR6L-100/UL) (2) LR4-37C 1 GRZG400 0.38Ω 3 LFC4-37C 1 CF4-37C 1 Symbol Part name Symbol Part name
Lr Boosting reactor Lr Boosting reactor
37 RHC37-4C SC-N2S 1 CU45-4C 1 (CR6L-150/UL) (2) MC RUN FX 73 Lf Reactor for filter MC RUN FX 73 Lf Reactor for filter
Dimensions
45 RHC45-4C SC-N3 1 LR4-55C 1 GRZG400 0.26Ω 3 LFC4-55C 1 CF4-55C 1 Cf Capacitor for filter Cf Capacitor for filter
External
Rf Resistor for filter Rf Resistor for filter
55 RHC55-4C SC-N4 1 CU55-4C 1 (CR6L-200/UL) (2) R0 Charging resistor R0 Charging resistor
75 RHC75-4C SC-N5 1 CU75-4C 1 LR4-75C 1 GRZG400 0.38Ω 3 LFC4-75C 1 CF4-75C 1 Fac AC fuse Fac AC fuse
Fdc DC fuse Fdc DC fuse
90 RHC90-4C SC-N7 1 CU90-4C 1 (CR6L-300/UL) (2) LR4-110C 1 GRZG400 0.53Ω 6 LFC4-110C 1 CF4-110C 1 73 Electromagnetic contactor for charge circuit 73 Electromagnetic contactor for charge circuit
52 Electromagnetic contactor for power supply 52 Electromagnetic contactor for power supply
3-phase 110 RHC110-4C SC-N8 1 CU110-4C 1 (GRZG120 2Ω) (3) [2 parallel]
132 RHC132 -4 CU132-4C 1 (A50P400-4) (2) LR4-160C 1 RF4-160C 1 LFC4-160C 1 CF4-160C 1 (Note 1) If the main power supply is 400V series, connect a step-down transformer to limit the (Note 1) If the main power supply is 400V series, connect a step-down transformer to limit the
400V
voltage of the sequence circuit lower than 220V. voltage of the sequence circuit lower than 220V.
160 RHC160 -4 SC-N11 1 CU160-4C 1 (A50P600-4) (2)
Functions of Parts
200 RHC200 -4 SC-N12 1 CU200-4C 1 (GRZG400 1Ω) (3) LR4-220C 1 RF4-220C 1 LFC4-220C 1 CF4-220C 1 main power supply via the contact“ b” of the charging circuit electromagnetic contactor (73 or 52). main power supply via the contact“ b” of the charging circuit electromagnetic contactor (73 or 52).
Names and
220 RHC220 -4 CU220-4C 1 (A70QS800-4) (2) When applying ungrounded power supply, ground transformer must be set. When applying ungrounded power supply, ground transformer must be set.
280 RHC280 -4 SC-N3 1 SC-N14 1 GRZG400 1Ω 6 A70QS800-4 2 LR4-280C 1 RF4-280C 1 LFC4-280C 1 CF4-280C 1 SC-N4/SF 1 (Note 3) Make sure to connect the auxiliary power supply input terminals of the inverter (R0,T0) to (Note 3) Make sure to connect the auxiliary power supply input terminals of the inverter (R0,T0) to
315 RHC315 -4 [2 parallel] A70P1600-4TA 2 LR4-315C 1 RF4-315C 1 LFC4-315C 1 CF4-315C 1 the main power supply via the contact "b" of the charging circuit electromagnetic contactor the main power supply via the contact "b" of the charging circuit electromagnetic contactor
(73 or 52). For the capacities FRN37VG1S-2 and FRN75VG1S-4 or higher and stack type (73 or 52). For the capacities FRN37VG1S-2 and FRN75VG1S-4 or higher and stack type
355 RHC355-4C LR4-355C 1 RF4-355C 1 LFC4-355C 1 CF4-355C 1
inverter (all capacity range), connect the inverter fan power auxiliary input terminals (R1,T1) inverter (all capacity range), connect the inverter fan power auxiliary input terminals (R1,T1)
400 RHC400-4C SC-N16 1 LR4-400C 1 RF4-400C 1 LFC4-400C 1 CF4-400C 1 to the main power supply without passing through the contact "b" of 73 or 52. to the main power supply without passing through the contact "b" of 73 or 52.
500 RHC500-4C SC-N11 3 LR4-500C 1 RF4-500C 1 LFC4-500C 1 CF4-500C 1(*2) (Note 4) Use the sequence that the run command signal is input in the inverter after the PWM converter becomes ready. (Note 4) Use the sequence that the run command signal is input in the inverter after the PWM converter becomes ready.

630 RHC630 -4 SC-N12 3 A70P2000-4(*3) 2 LR4-630C 1 RF4-630C 1 LFC4-630C 1 CF4-630C 1(*2) SC-N7 1 (Note 5) One of terminals (X1 to X9) on the inverter unit must be set to external alarm (THR). (Note 5) One of terminals (X1 to X9) on the inverter unit must be set to external alarm (THR).
710 RHC710B-4 SC-N4 1 HF5G2655 2 LR4-710C 1 RF4-710C 1 LFC4-710C 1 CF4-710C 1(*2) SC-N8 (Note 6) Be sure to connect the L1/R, L2/S, L3/T, R2, T2, R1, S1, and T1 terminals keeping the phase sequence. (Note 6) Be sure to connect the L1/R, L2/S, L3/T, R2, T2, R1, S1, and T1 terminals keeping the phase sequence.
1
800 RHC800B-4 SC-N14 3 LR4-800C 1 RF4-800C 1 LFC4-800C 1 CF4-800C 1(*2)
LD (CT) Specifications <Unit Type> <Stack Type> <Unit Type> <Stack Type>
Charging circuit box (*1) RHC280-4C to RHC400-4C RHC280S-4D to RHC315S-4D RHC500-4C to RHC630-4C RHC630S-4D to RHC800B-4D
Supply applied converter contactor power source Charging resistor AC Fuse reactor for filter for filter for filter contactor
Voltage motor [kW] Type 73 73
(73) Q'ty (52) Q'ty (CU) Q'ty (R0) Q'ty (Fac) Q'ty (Lr) Q'ty (Rf) Q'ty (Lf) Q'ty (Cf) Q'ty (6F) Q'ty R0 R0
11 RHC7.5-2C SC-N1 1 CU7.5-2C 1 (80W 7.5Ω) (3) (CR2LS-50/UL) (2) LR2-15C 1 GRZG150 0.2Ω 3 LFC2-15C 1 CF2-15C 1
15 RHC11-2C SC-N2 1 CU11-2C 1 (HF5C5504) (CR2LS-75/UL) (2) (DCF1) (DCF1) (DCF1) (DCF1)
52 (Note 8) 52-1 to 52-3 (Note 8)
18.5 RHC15-2C SC-N3 1 CU15-2C 1 (CR2LS-100/UL) (2) LR2-22C 1 GRZG200 0.13Ω 3 LFC2-22C 1 CF2-22C 1 Lf Lr Fac (DCF2) (DCF2) Lf Lr Fac (DCF2) (DCF2)
L1/R L1/R
22 RHC18.5-2C CU18.5-2C 1 (GRZG120 2Ω) (3)
Wiring Diagram
30 RHC22-2C SC-N4 1 CU22-2C 1 (CR2L-150/UL) (2) LR2-37C 1 GRZG400 0.1Ω 3 LFC2-37C 1 CF2-37C 1 Fdc Fdc
3-phase P(+) P(+) U P(+) P(+) U
L2/S L2/S
37 RHC30-2C SC-N5 1 CU30-2C 1 (CR2L-200/UL) (2) V M V M
200V N(-) N(-) N(-) N(-)
45 RHC37-2C SC-N7 1 CU45-2C 1 (CR2L-260/UL) (2) LR2-55C 1 LFC2-55C 1 CF2-55C 1 Fac W Fac W
L3/T i R0 L3/T i R0
55 RHC45-2C SC-N8 1 R2 j T0 R2 j T0
6F g R1 6F g R1
75 RHC55-2C SC-N11 1 CU55-2C 1 (CR2L-400/UL) (2) LR2-75C 1 LFC2-75C 1 CF2-75C 1 T2 T2
h T1 (Note 4) h T1 (Note 4)
Rf RUN e f Rf RUN e f
90 RHC75-2C CU75-2C 1 LR2-110C 1 GRZG400 0.12Ω 6 LFC2-110C 1 CF2-110C 1 RUN Y5A e FX RUN Y5A e FX
RST Y5C f (Note 6) FWD RST Y5C f (Note 6) FWD
110 RHC90-2C SC-N12 1 CU90-2C 1 (GRZG400 1Ω) (3) (A50P600-4) (2) [2 parallel] Cf2 CM 30A X9 Cf1 Cf2
CM 30A X9
30B CM 30B CM
11 RHC7.5-4C SC-4-0 1 CU7.5-4C 1 (TK50B 30ΩJ) (3) (CR6L-30/UL) (2) LR4-15C 1 GRZG150 0.79Ω 3 LFC4-15C 1 CF4-15C 1 (THR) (THR)
R1 30C CM 13 R1 30C CM 13
15 RHC11-4C SC-5-1 1 CU15-4C 1 (HF5B0416) (CR6L-50/UL) (2) S1 12 S1 12
T1 30A T1 30A
Options
11 11
18.5 RHC15-4C SC-N1 1 LR4-22C 1 GRZG200 0.53Ω 3 LFC4-22C 1 CF4-22C 1 52 a 30B 52 a 30B
R0 R0
T0 b 30C T0 b 30C
22 RHC18.5-4C CU18.5-4C 1 (80W 7.5Ω) (3) g (Note 2) c 73A g (Note 2) c 73A
E(G) E(G) E(G) E(G)
h d 73C h d 73C
30 RHC22-4C SC-N2 1 CU22-4C 1 (HF5C5504) (CR6L-75/UL) (2) LR4-37C 1 GRZG400 0.38Ω 3 LFC4-37C 1 CF4-37C 1 (Note 3)
i j
(Note 3)
i j
37 RHC30-4C SC-N2S 1 CU30-4C 1 (CR6L-100/UL) (2)

45 RHC37-4C SC-N3 1 CU45-4C 1 (CR6L-150/UL) (2) LR4-55C 1 GRZG400 0.26Ω 3 LFC4-55C 1 CF4-55C 1 RUN, RUN,
READY RDY RDY 52A 52 RUN FX READY RDY RDY 52A 52-1 RUN FX
55 RHC45-4C SC-N4 1 a c Symbol Part name a c Symbol Part name
b d Lr Boosting reactor b d 52-2 Lr Boosting reactor
75 RHC55-4C SC-N5 1 CU55-4C 1 (CR6L-200/UL) (2) LR4-75C 1 GRZG400 0.38Ω 3 LFC4-75C 1 CF4-75C 1 52T
Stop
52T
52-1 52T Stop
Reactor for filter Reactor for filter
Warranty
52 52T Lf Lf
90 RHC75-4C SC-N7 1 CU75-4C 1 LR4-110C 1 GRZG400 0.53Ω 6 LFC4-110C 1 CF4-110C 1 220V or less Cf Capacitor for filter 220V or less 52-3 Cf Capacitor for filter
RUN 52-2 6F RUN
(Note 1) Rf Resistor for filter (Note 1) Rf Resistor for filter
110 RHC90-4C SC-N8 1 CU90-4C 1 (CR6L-300/UL) (2) [2 parallel] 6F
3-phase (Note 5) R0 Charging resistor 52-3 R0 Charging resistor
132 RHC110 -4 CU110-4C 1 (GRZG120 2Ω) (3) LR4-160C 1 RF4-160C 1 LFC4-160C 1 CF4-160C 1 Fac AC fuse Fac AC fuse
400V RDY 73 52A 52 52T RUN 6F FX Fdc DC fuse RDY 73 52A 52-1 52-2 52-3 52T RUN 6F FX Fdc DC fuse
160 RHC132 -4 SC-N11 1 CU132-4C 1 (A50P400-4) (2)
73 Electromagnetic contactor for charge circuit (Note 5) 73 Electromagnetic contactor for charge circuit
200 RHC160 -4 SC-N12 1 CU160-4C 1 (A50P600-4) (2) LR4-220C 1 RF4-220C 1 LFC4-220C 1 CF4-220C 1 52 Electromagnetic contactor for power supply 52 Electromagnetic contactor for power supply
220 RHC200 -4 CU200-4C 1 (GRZG400 1Ω) (3) 6F Electromagnetic contactor for filter circuit 6F Electromagnetic contactor for filter circuit
Delivery Period
280 RHC220 -4 SC-N14 1 CU220-4C 1 (GRZG400 1Ω) (3) (A70QS800-4) (2) LR4-280C 1 RF4-280C 1 LFC4-280C 1 CF4-280C 1 (Note 1) Connect a step-down transformer to limit the voltage of the sequence circuit lower than 220V. (Note 1) Connect a step-down transformer to limit the voltage of the sequence circuit lower than 220V.
and Code
315 RHC280 -4 SC-N3 1 SC-N14 1 GRZG400 1Ω 6 A70QS800-4 2 LR4-315C 1 RF4-315C 1 LFC4-315C 1 CF4-315C 1 SC-N4/SF 1
355 RHC315 -4 [2 parallel] A70P1600-4TA 2 LR4-355C 1 RF4-355C 1 LFC4-355C 1 CF4-355C 1 main power supply via the contact "b" of the charging circuit electromagnetic contactor (52). When main power supply via the contact "b" of the charging circuit electromagnetic contactor (52). When
applying ungrounded power supply, grounded transformer must be set. applying ungrounded power supply, grounded transformer must be set.
400 RHC355-4C SC-N16 1 LR4-400C 1 RF4-400C 1 LFC4-400C 1 CF4-400C 1
(Note 3) Since the AC fan power supply receives power from R1 and T1 terminals, the power supply (Note 3) Since the AC fan power supply receives power from R1 and T1 terminals, the power supply
500 RHC400-4C SC-N11 3 LR4-500C 1 RF4-500C 1 LFC4-500C 1 CF4-500C 1(*2) must be connected without passing through the contact “b” of 73 or 52. must be connected without passing through the contact “b” of 73 or 52.
710 RHC630B-4 SC-N12 3 HF5G2655 2 LR4-710C 1 RF4-710C 1 LFC4-710C 1 CF4-710C 1(*2) (Note 4) Use the sequence that the run command signal is input in the inverter after the PWM (Note 4) Use the sequence that the run command signal is input in the inverter after the PWM
800 RHC710B-4 SC-N14 3 2 LR4-800C 1 RF4-800C 1 LFC4-800C 1 CF4-800C 1(*2) converter becomes ready. converter becomes ready.
1000 RHC800B-4 Contact Fuji. (Note 5) The 52T timer must be set to 1 sec. (Note 5) The 52T timer must be set to 1 sec.
(Note 6) One of terminals (X1 to X9) on the inverter unit must be set to external alarm (THR). (Note 6) One of terminals (X1 to X9) on the inverter unit must be set to external alarm (THR).
Guidelines for
(*1) The charging resistor (R0) and AC fuse (Fac) have been built inside the charging circuit box (CU). When the charging circuit box (CU) is not ordered, the charging resistor (R0) and fuse (Fac) must be ordered separately. (Note 7) Be sure to connect the L1/R, L2/S, L3/T, R2, T2, R1, S1, and T1 terminals keeping the (Note 7) Be sure to connect the L1/R, L2/S, L3/T, R2, T2, R1, S1, and T1 terminals keeping the
(*2) The filter capacitor consists of two capacitors. A pair of capacitors is shipped by ordering "1" pc. phase sequence. phase sequence.
(*3) The "SA598473" will be used for the stack type inverter.
48 49
Options Guideline for Suppressing Harmonics
External Dimensions Application to "Guideline for Suppressing Harmonics by the Users Who Receive High Voltage or Special High Voltage"
Standard
Our FRENIC series are the products specified in the "Guideline for Suppressing Harmonics by Customers Receiving High Voltage or Special High Voltage." When you enter
PWM converter main body (Unit Type) into a new contract with an electric power company or update a contract, you are requested by the electric power company to submit an accounting statement form.
Fig. A Fig. B Dimensions [mm] Approx.

W D
PWM converter Type Fig
W W1 H H1 D D1 n B C
weight [kg] (1) Scope of regulation Table 4 "Input fundamental currents" of general-purpose inverters determined by the nominal applied motors
n- B
Common
W 2- B D W1 D1 4- 18 In principle, the guideline applies to the customers that meet the following two conditions:
W1 D1 Lifting hall
RHC7.5-2C A 250 226 380 358 245 125 2 10 10 12.5
Nominal applied motor [kW] 0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22
RHC11-2C • The customer receives high voltage or special high voltage.
Input 200V 1.62 2.74 5.50 7.92 13.0 19.1 25.6 36.9 49.8 61.4 73.1
RHC15-2C • The "equivalent capacity" of the converter load exceeds the standard value fundamental
RHC18.5-2C B 340 240 480 460 255 145 2 10 10 24 for the receiving voltage (50kVA at a receiving voltage of 6.6kV). current [A] 400V 0.81 1.37 2.75 3.96 6.50 9.55 12.8 18.5 24.9 30.7 36.6
H1
H
H1
RHC22-2C
H
6.6 kV converted value [mA] 49 83 167 240 394 579 776 1121 1509 1860 2220
200V
series RHC30-2C B 340 240 550 530 255 145 2 10 10 29 (2) Regulation method
C RHC37-2C B 375 275 615 595 270 145 2 10 10 36 The level (calculated value) of the harmonic current that flows from the customer's receiving point Nominal applied motor [kW] 30 37 45 55 75 90 110 132 160 200 220
Functions
C RHC45-2C 375 275 740 720 270 145 2 10 10 42
Terminal
B
out to the system is subjected to the regulation. The regulation value is proportional to the Input 200V 98.0 121 147 180 245 293 357
RHC55-2C B 375 275 740 720 270 145 2 10 10 44
contract demand. The regulation values specified in the guideline are shown in Table 1. fundamental
RHC75-2C C 530 430 750 720 285 145 2 15 15 70 current [A] 400V 49.0 60.4 73.5 89.9 123 147 179 216 258 323 355
RHC90-2C 680 580 880 850 360 220 3 15 15 115
C
Table 1 Upper limits of harmonic outflow current per kW of contract demand [mA/kW] 6.6 kV converted value [mA] 2970 3660 4450 5450 7450 8910 10850 13090 15640 19580 21500
RHC7.5-4C A 250 226 380 358 245 125 2 10 10 12.5
RHC11-4C Receiving voltage 5th 7th 11th 13th 17th 19th 23th Over 25th Nominal applied motor [kW] 250 280 315 355 400 450 500 530 560 630
RHC15-4C
Fig. D 6.6kV 3.5 2.5 1.6 1.3 1.0 0.90 0.76 0.70 Input 200V
n- B D RHC18.5-4C 340 240 480 460 255 145 2 10 10 24
fundamental
Protective
B
Functions
Fig. C
W n- B D W D1 RHC22-4C 22kV 1.8 1.3 0.82 0.69 0.53 0.47 0.39 0.36 current [A] 400V 403 450 506 571 643 723 804 852 900 1013
W1 D1 RHC30-4C B 340 240 550 530 255 145 2 10 10 29
6.6 kV converted value [mA] 24400 27300 30700 34600 39000 43800 48700 51600 54500 61400
RHC37-4C B 375 275 550 530 270 145 2 10 10 34
RHC45-4C
RHC55-4C
B
B
375
375
275
275
675
675
655
655
270
270
145
145
2
2
10
10
10
10
38
39
1. Calculation of Equivalent Capacity (Pi) (2) Calculation of harmonic current
RHC75-4C 375 275 740 720 270 145 2 10 10 48 Although the equivalent capacity (Pi) is calculated using the equation of (input rated Table 5 Generated harmonic current [%], 3-phase rectifier (smoothing capacitor)
H1
B
H
H1
H
400V RHC90-4C C 530 430 740 710 315 175 2 15 15 70 capacity) x (conversion factor), catalog of conventional inverters do not contain input
Dimensions
series
rated capacities. A description of the input rated capacity is shown below: Degree 5th 7th 11th 13th 17th 19th 23th 25th
External
RHC110-4C
RHC132-4C C 530 430 1000 970 360 220 2 15 15 100
Without a reactor 65 41 8.5 7.7 4.3 3.1 2.6 1.8
C RHC160-4C
C
RHC200-4C C 680 580 1000 970 360 220 3 15 15 140 (1) "Inverter rated capacity" corresponding to "Pi" With a reactor (ACR) 38 14.5 7.4 3.4 3.2 1.9 1.7 1.3
W1 RHC220-4C • Calculate the input fundamental current l1 from the kW rating and efficiency of With a reactor (DCR) 30 13 8.4 5.0 4.7 3.2 3.0 2.2
RHC280-4C 680 580 1400 1370 450 285 3 15 15 320
C the load motor, as well as the efficiency of the inverter. Then, calculate the With reactors (ACR and DCR) 28 9.1 7.2 4.1 3.2 2.4 1.6 1.4
RHC315-4C
input rated capacity as shown below:
Functions of Parts
RHC355-4C 880 780 1400 1370 450 285 4 15 15 410
C
Input rated capacity = 3 x (power supply voltage) x I1 x 1.0228/1000[kVA] • ACR: 3%
Names and
RHC400-4C
Where 1.0228 is the 6-pulse converter's value obtained by (effective current) / • DCR: Accumulated energy equal to 0.08 to 0.15ms (100% load conversion)
RHC500-4C D 999 900 1550 1520 500 313.2 4 15 15 525
RHC630-4C
(fundamental current). • Smoothing capacitor: Accumulated energy equal to 15 to 30ms (100% load conversion)
• When a general-purpose motor or inverter motor is used, the appropriate value shown in Table 2 can be • Load: 100%
used. Select a value based on the kW rating of the motor used, irrespective of the inverter type. Generated nth harmonic current [%]
nth harmonic current [A] = Fundamental current [A] ×
100
PWM converter main body (Stack Type) Table 2 "Input rated capacities" of general-purpose inverters determined by the nominal applied motors Calculate the harmonic current of each order (harmonic number) using the following equation:

MAX 226.2(W) MAX 565(D) MAX 226.2(W) MAX 565(D) Nominal applied motor [kW] 0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 (3) Maximum availability factor
Fig. A 220 550 11 Fig. B 220 550 11
144.8 144.8 Pi 200V 0.57 0.97 1.95 2.81 4.61 6.77 9.07 13.1 17.6 21.8 25.9 • For a load like elevators, which provides intermittent operation, or a load with a over-dimensioned motor
30 160 [kVA] 400V 0.57 0.97 1.95 2.81 4.61 6.77 9.07 13.1 17.6 21.8 25.9 rating, reduce the current by multiplying the equation by the "maximum availability factor" of the load.
1.6
30 160
2.3
• The "maximum availability factor of an appliance" means the ratio of the capacity of the harmonic generator in operation at which the availability
Body external [mm] Approx.
Nominal applied motor [kW] 30 37 45 55 75 90 110 132 160 200 220 reaches the maximum, to its total capacity, and the capacity of the generator in operation is an average for 30 minutes.
Series Inverter Type Fig
W H D weight [kg]
Pi 200V 34.7 42.8 52.1 63.7 87.2 104 127 • In general, the maximum availability factor is calculated according to this definition, but the
RHC132S-4D A 226.2 1100 565 85
[kVA] 400V 34.7 42.8 52.1 63.7 87.2 standard values shown in Table 6 are recommended for inverters for building equipment.
RHC160S-4D A 226.2 1100 565 85
104 127 153 183 229 252
Table 6 Availability factors of inverters, etc. for building equipment (standard values)
1027.8
RHC200S-4D A 226.2 1100 565 85

Nominal applied motor [kW] 250 280 315 355 400 450 500 530 560 630
1367.2
RHC220S-4D B 226.2 1400 565 126

Equipment type Inverter capacity category Single inverter availability factor
Pi 200V
1100(H)
1400(H)
400V RHC280S-4D B 226.2 1400 565 126

RHC315S-4D B 226.2 1400 565 126 [kVA] 400V 286 319 359 405 456 512 570 604 638 718 200kW or less 0.55
956.5
1190
RHC630B-4D (*1) – – – – – Air conditioning system

Over 200kW 0.60
789.7
Wiring Diagram
RHC710B-4D (*1) – – – – –
834.6
RHC800B-4D (*1) – – – – – Sanitary pump ——— 0.30

91.2
91.2
3.2
(2) Values of "Ki (conversion factor)"

3.2
*1) Each stack corresponds to one phase, and one set of the inverter Elevator ——— 0.25
14.5
14.5
consists of three stacks.

• Depending on whether an optional ACR (AC REACTOR) or DCR (DC REACTOR) is used, apply the appropriate conversion Refrigerator, freezer 50kW or less 0.60
The touch panel is attached only to the V phase.
factor specified in the appendix to the guideline. The values of the converter factor are shown in Table 3.
70 75
70 75
For external dimensions, contact Fuji Electric Sales Department. UPS (6-pulse) 200kVA 0.60
70
70
55
55
191
191
63 94 63 94

Table 3 "Conversion factors Ki" for general-purpose inverters determined by reactors [Correction coefficient according to contract demand level]
56.2 455.3 56.2 455.3
Circuit category Circuit Type Conversion factor Ki Main applications • Since the total availability factor decreases with increase in the building scale, calculating
Options
RHC132S-4D to RHC200S-4D RHC220S-4D to RHC315S-4D
reduced harmonics with the correction coefficient β defined in Table 7 below is permitted.
Without a reactor K31=3.4 • General-purpose inverters
<Boosting reactor> 3-phase rectifier With a reactor (ACR) K32=1.8 • Elevators Table 7 Correction coefficient according to the building scale
3 • Refrigerators, *If the contract demand is between two
(smoothing capacitor) With a reactor (DCR) K33=1.8 air conditioning systems Contract demand [kW] Correction coefficient β
Fig. A Fig. B specified values shown in Table 7, calculate
Pressurization
reactor Type
Fig
Dimensions [mm] Approx.
weight [kg] With reactors (ACR and DCR) K34=1.4 • Other general appliances 300 1.00 the value by interpolation.
6-terminal holes MAX. D2 W W1 H D D1 D2 K M
W 6-terminal holes MAX. D2 W
(for screw M) (for screw M) LR2-7.5C A 180 75 205 105 85 95 7 M5 12 500 0.90
Guidelines for
LR2-15C B 195 75 215 131 110 130 7 M8 18
LR2-22C C 240 80 340 215 180 145 10 M8 33
1000 0.85
X1 X2 Y1 Y2 Z1 Z2
X1 Y1 Z1 200V
series
LR2-37C C 285 95 420 240 205 150 12 M10 50 2. Calculation of Harmonic Current 2000 0.80
H
LR2-55C C 285 95 420 250 215 160 12 M12 58

X2 Y2 Z2 LR2-75C C 330 110 440 255 220 165 12 M12 70
(1) Value of "input fundamental current" (4) Harmonic order to be calculated
LR2-110C C 345 115 500 280 245 185 12 M12 100
W1 4- K Elongated hole • Apply the appropriate value shown in Table 4 based on the kW rating of the Calculate only the "5th and 7th" harmonic currents
D1 D1 LR4-7.5C B 180 75 205 105 85 90 7 M4 12
4- K Elongated hole
D W1
D LR4-15C A 195 75 215 131 110 120 7 M5 18 motor, irrespective of the inverter type or whether a reactor is used.
Guidelines for
LR4-22C C 240 80 340 215 180 120 10 M6 33 * If the input voltage is different, calculate the input fundamental current in
Fig. C Fig. D MAX. D2
LR4-37C C 285 95 405 240 205 130 12 M8 50
inverse proportion to the voltage.
W 6-terminal holes MAX. D2 LR4-55C C 285 95 415 250 215 145 12 M10 58
(for screw M) LR4-75C C 330 110 440 255 220 150 12 M10 70
LR4-110C C 345 115 490 280 245 170 12 M12 100
X1 Y1 Z1 400V C 380 125 550 300 260 185 15 M12 140
LR4-160C
X1 Y1 Z1 series
LR4-220C C 450 150 620 330 290 230 15 M12 200
6-terminal holes
H
LR4-280C C 480 160 740 330 290 240 15 M16 250

H
(for screw M)
X2 Y2 Z2 LR4-315C C 480 160 760 340 300 250 15 M16 270
X2 Y2 Z2 Terminal detail
LR4-355C C 480 160 830 355 315 255 15 M16 310
LR4-400C C 480 160 890 380 330 260 19 M16 340
D1 W1 D1
LR4-500C C 525 175 960 410 360 290 19 M16 420
W1 4- K W 4- K D
D LR4-630C D 600 200 640 440 390 290 19 4×M12 450
50 51
Options Guideline for Suppressing Harmonics
External Dimensions Application to "Guideline for Suppressing Harmonics by the Users Who Receive High Voltage or Special High Voltage"
Standard
Our FRENIC series are the products specified in the "Guideline for Suppressing Harmonics by Customers Receiving High Voltage or Special High Voltage." When you enter
PWM converter main body (Unit Type) into a new contract with an electric power company or update a contract, you are requested by the electric power company to submit an accounting statement form.
Fig. A Fig. B Dimensions [mm] Approx.

W D
PWM converter Type Fig
W W1 H H1 D D1 n B C
weight [kg] (1) Scope of regulation Table 4 "Input fundamental currents" of general-purpose inverters determined by the nominal applied motors
n- B
Common
W 2- B D W1 D1 4- 18 In principle, the guideline applies to the customers that meet the following two conditions:
W1 D1 Lifting hall
RHC7.5-2C A 250 226 380 358 245 125 2 10 10 12.5
Nominal applied motor [kW] 0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22
RHC11-2C • The customer receives high voltage or special high voltage.
Input 200V 1.62 2.74 5.50 7.92 13.0 19.1 25.6 36.9 49.8 61.4 73.1
RHC15-2C • The "equivalent capacity" of the converter load exceeds the standard value fundamental
RHC18.5-2C B 340 240 480 460 255 145 2 10 10 24 for the receiving voltage (50kVA at a receiving voltage of 6.6kV). current [A] 400V 0.81 1.37 2.75 3.96 6.50 9.55 12.8 18.5 24.9 30.7 36.6
H1
H
H1
RHC22-2C
H
6.6 kV converted value [mA] 49 83 167 240 394 579 776 1121 1509 1860 2220
200V
series RHC30-2C B 340 240 550 530 255 145 2 10 10 29 (2) Regulation method
C RHC37-2C B 375 275 615 595 270 145 2 10 10 36 The level (calculated value) of the harmonic current that flows from the customer's receiving point Nominal applied motor [kW] 30 37 45 55 75 90 110 132 160 200 220
Functions
C RHC45-2C 375 275 740 720 270 145 2 10 10 42
Terminal
B
out to the system is subjected to the regulation. The regulation value is proportional to the Input 200V 98.0 121 147 180 245 293 357
RHC55-2C B 375 275 740 720 270 145 2 10 10 44
contract demand. The regulation values specified in the guideline are shown in Table 1. fundamental
RHC75-2C C 530 430 750 720 285 145 2 15 15 70 current [A] 400V 49.0 60.4 73.5 89.9 123 147 179 216 258 323 355
RHC90-2C 680 580 880 850 360 220 3 15 15 115
C
Table 1 Upper limits of harmonic outflow current per kW of contract demand [mA/kW] 6.6 kV converted value [mA] 2970 3660 4450 5450 7450 8910 10850 13090 15640 19580 21500
RHC7.5-4C A 250 226 380 358 245 125 2 10 10 12.5
RHC11-4C Receiving voltage 5th 7th 11th 13th 17th 19th 23th Over 25th Nominal applied motor [kW] 250 280 315 355 400 450 500 530 560 630
RHC15-4C
Fig. D 6.6kV 3.5 2.5 1.6 1.3 1.0 0.90 0.76 0.70 Input 200V
n- B D RHC18.5-4C 340 240 480 460 255 145 2 10 10 24
fundamental
Protective
B
Functions
Fig. C
W n- B D W D1 RHC22-4C 22kV 1.8 1.3 0.82 0.69 0.53 0.47 0.39 0.36 current [A] 400V 403 450 506 571 643 723 804 852 900 1013
W1 D1 RHC30-4C B 340 240 550 530 255 145 2 10 10 29
6.6 kV converted value [mA] 24400 27300 30700 34600 39000 43800 48700 51600 54500 61400
RHC37-4C B 375 275 550 530 270 145 2 10 10 34
RHC45-4C
RHC55-4C
B
B
375
375
275
275
675
675
655
655
270
270
145
145
2
2
10
10
10
10
38
39
1. Calculation of Equivalent Capacity (Pi) (2) Calculation of harmonic current
RHC75-4C 375 275 740 720 270 145 2 10 10 48 Although the equivalent capacity (Pi) is calculated using the equation of (input rated Table 5 Generated harmonic current [%], 3-phase rectifier (smoothing capacitor)
H1
B
H
H1
H
400V RHC90-4C C 530 430 740 710 315 175 2 15 15 70 capacity) x (conversion factor), catalog of conventional inverters do not contain input
Dimensions
series
rated capacities. A description of the input rated capacity is shown below: Degree 5th 7th 11th 13th 17th 19th 23th 25th
External
RHC110-4C
RHC132-4C C 530 430 1000 970 360 220 2 15 15 100
Without a reactor 65 41 8.5 7.7 4.3 3.1 2.6 1.8
C RHC160-4C
C
RHC200-4C C 680 580 1000 970 360 220 3 15 15 140 (1) "Inverter rated capacity" corresponding to "Pi" With a reactor (ACR) 38 14.5 7.4 3.4 3.2 1.9 1.7 1.3
W1 RHC220-4C • Calculate the input fundamental current l1 from the kW rating and efficiency of With a reactor (DCR) 30 13 8.4 5.0 4.7 3.2 3.0 2.2
RHC280-4C 680 580 1400 1370 450 285 3 15 15 320
C the load motor, as well as the efficiency of the inverter. Then, calculate the With reactors (ACR and DCR) 28 9.1 7.2 4.1 3.2 2.4 1.6 1.4
RHC315-4C
input rated capacity as shown below:
Functions of Parts
RHC355-4C 880 780 1400 1370 450 285 4 15 15 410
C
Input rated capacity = 3 x (power supply voltage) x I1 x 1.0228/1000[kVA] • ACR: 3%
Names and
RHC400-4C
Where 1.0228 is the 6-pulse converter's value obtained by (effective current) / • DCR: Accumulated energy equal to 0.08 to 0.15ms (100% load conversion)
RHC500-4C D 999 900 1550 1520 500 313.2 4 15 15 525
RHC630-4C
(fundamental current). • Smoothing capacitor: Accumulated energy equal to 15 to 30ms (100% load conversion)
• When a general-purpose motor or inverter motor is used, the appropriate value shown in Table 2 can be • Load: 100%
used. Select a value based on the kW rating of the motor used, irrespective of the inverter type. Generated nth harmonic current [%]
nth harmonic current [A] = Fundamental current [A] ×
100
PWM converter main body (Stack Type) Table 2 "Input rated capacities" of general-purpose inverters determined by the nominal applied motors Calculate the harmonic current of each order (harmonic number) using the following equation:

MAX 226.2(W) MAX 565(D) MAX 226.2(W) MAX 565(D) Nominal applied motor [kW] 0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 (3) Maximum availability factor
Fig. A 220 550 11 Fig. B 220 550 11
144.8 144.8 Pi 200V 0.57 0.97 1.95 2.81 4.61 6.77 9.07 13.1 17.6 21.8 25.9 • For a load like elevators, which provides intermittent operation, or a load with a over-dimensioned motor
30 160 [kVA] 400V 0.57 0.97 1.95 2.81 4.61 6.77 9.07 13.1 17.6 21.8 25.9 rating, reduce the current by multiplying the equation by the "maximum availability factor" of the load.
1.6
30 160
2.3
• The "maximum availability factor of an appliance" means the ratio of the capacity of the harmonic generator in operation at which the availability
Body external [mm] Approx.
Nominal applied motor [kW] 30 37 45 55 75 90 110 132 160 200 220 reaches the maximum, to its total capacity, and the capacity of the generator in operation is an average for 30 minutes.
Series Inverter Type Fig
W H D weight [kg]
Pi 200V 34.7 42.8 52.1 63.7 87.2 104 127 • In general, the maximum availability factor is calculated according to this definition, but the
RHC132S-4D A 226.2 1100 565 85
[kVA] 400V 34.7 42.8 52.1 63.7 87.2 standard values shown in Table 6 are recommended for inverters for building equipment.
RHC160S-4D A 226.2 1100 565 85
104 127 153 183 229 252
Table 6 Availability factors of inverters, etc. for building equipment (standard values)
1027.8
RHC200S-4D A 226.2 1100 565 85

Nominal applied motor [kW] 250 280 315 355 400 450 500 530 560 630
1367.2
RHC220S-4D B 226.2 1400 565 126

Equipment type Inverter capacity category Single inverter availability factor
Pi 200V
1100(H)
1400(H)
400V RHC280S-4D B 226.2 1400 565 126

RHC315S-4D B 226.2 1400 565 126 [kVA] 400V 286 319 359 405 456 512 570 604 638 718 200kW or less 0.55
956.5
1190
RHC630B-4D (*1) – – – – – Air conditioning system

Over 200kW 0.60
789.7
Wiring Diagram
RHC710B-4D (*1) – – – – –
834.6
RHC800B-4D (*1) – – – – – Sanitary pump ——— 0.30

91.2
91.2
3.2
(2) Values of "Ki (conversion factor)"

3.2
*1) Each stack corresponds to one phase, and one set of the inverter Elevator ——— 0.25
14.5
14.5
consists of three stacks.

• Depending on whether an optional ACR (AC REACTOR) or DCR (DC REACTOR) is used, apply the appropriate conversion Refrigerator, freezer 50kW or less 0.60
The touch panel is attached only to the V phase.
factor specified in the appendix to the guideline. The values of the converter factor are shown in Table 3.
70 75
70 75
For external dimensions, contact Fuji Electric Sales Department. UPS (6-pulse) 200kVA 0.60
70
70
55
55
191
191
63 94 63 94

Table 3 "Conversion factors Ki" for general-purpose inverters determined by reactors [Correction coefficient according to contract demand level]
56.2 455.3 56.2 455.3
Circuit category Circuit Type Conversion factor Ki Main applications • Since the total availability factor decreases with increase in the building scale, calculating
Options
RHC132S-4D to RHC200S-4D RHC220S-4D to RHC315S-4D
reduced harmonics with the correction coefficient β defined in Table 7 below is permitted.
Without a reactor K31=3.4 • General-purpose inverters
<Boosting reactor> 3-phase rectifier With a reactor (ACR) K32=1.8 • Elevators Table 7 Correction coefficient according to the building scale
3 • Refrigerators, *If the contract demand is between two
(smoothing capacitor) With a reactor (DCR) K33=1.8 air conditioning systems Contract demand [kW] Correction coefficient β
Fig. A Fig. B specified values shown in Table 7, calculate
Pressurization
reactor Type
Fig
Dimensions [mm] Approx.
weight [kg] With reactors (ACR and DCR) K34=1.4 • Other general appliances 300 1.00 the value by interpolation.
6-terminal holes MAX. D2 W W1 H D D1 D2 K M
W 6-terminal holes MAX. D2 W
(for screw M) (for screw M) LR2-7.5C A 180 75 205 105 85 95 7 M5 12 500 0.90
Guidelines for
LR2-15C B 195 75 215 131 110 130 7 M8 18
LR2-22C C 240 80 340 215 180 145 10 M8 33
1000 0.85
X1 X2 Y1 Y2 Z1 Z2
X1 Y1 Z1 200V
series
LR2-37C C 285 95 420 240 205 150 12 M10 50 2. Calculation of Harmonic Current 2000 0.80
H
LR2-55C C 285 95 420 250 215 160 12 M12 58

X2 Y2 Z2 LR2-75C C 330 110 440 255 220 165 12 M12 70
(1) Value of "input fundamental current" (4) Harmonic order to be calculated
LR2-110C C 345 115 500 280 245 185 12 M12 100
W1 4- K Elongated hole • Apply the appropriate value shown in Table 4 based on the kW rating of the Calculate only the "5th and 7th" harmonic currents
D1 D1 LR4-7.5C B 180 75 205 105 85 90 7 M4 12
4- K Elongated hole
D W1
D LR4-15C A 195 75 215 131 110 120 7 M5 18 motor, irrespective of the inverter type or whether a reactor is used.
Guidelines for
LR4-22C C 240 80 340 215 180 120 10 M6 33 * If the input voltage is different, calculate the input fundamental current in
Fig. C Fig. D MAX. D2
LR4-37C C 285 95 405 240 205 130 12 M8 50
inverse proportion to the voltage.
W 6-terminal holes MAX. D2 LR4-55C C 285 95 415 250 215 145 12 M10 58
(for screw M) LR4-75C C 330 110 440 255 220 150 12 M10 70
LR4-110C C 345 115 490 280 245 170 12 M12 100
X1 Y1 Z1 400V C 380 125 550 300 260 185 15 M12 140
LR4-160C
X1 Y1 Z1 series
LR4-220C C 450 150 620 330 290 230 15 M12 200
6-terminal holes
H
LR4-280C C 480 160 740 330 290 240 15 M16 250

H
(for screw M)
X2 Y2 Z2 LR4-315C C 480 160 760 340 300 250 15 M16 270
X2 Y2 Z2 Terminal detail
LR4-355C C 480 160 830 355 315 255 15 M16 310
LR4-400C C 480 160 890 380 330 260 19 M16 340
D1 W1 D1
LR4-500C C 525 175 960 410 360 290 19 M16 420
W1 4- K W 4- K D
D LR4-630C D 600 200 640 440 390 290 19 4×M12 450
50 51
NOTES
• Measures against surge currents
When running general-purpose motors Environmental conditions If an overvoltage trip occurs while the inverter is High Performance Vector Control Inverter
• Driving a 400V general-purpose motor • Installation location stopped or operated under a light load, it is
When driving a 400V general-purpose motor with Use the inverter in a location with an ambient assumed that the surge current is generated by
an inverter using extremely long cables, damage to temperature range of -10 to 50˚C. open/close of the phase-advancing capacitor in the
the insulation of the motor may occur. Use an output The inverter and braking resistor surfaces become power system.
circuit filter (OFL) if necessary after checking with hot under certain operating conditions. Install the We recommend connecting a DC REACTOR to the
the motor manufacturer. Fuji's motors do not require inverter on nonflammable material such as metal. inverter.
the use of output circuit filters because of their Ensure that the installation location meets the • Megger test
reinforced insulation. environmental conditions specified in "Environment" When checking the insulation resistance of the
in inverter specifications. inverter, use a 500V megger and follow the
• Torque characteristics and temperature rise
When the inverter is used to run a general-purpose instructions contained in the Instruction Manual.
motor, the temperature of the motor becomes
Combination with peripheral devices
higher than when it is operated using a commercial Wiring
• Installing a molded case circuit
power supply. In the low-speed range, the cooling breaker (MCCB) • Wiring distance of control circuit
effect will be weakened, so decrease the output Install a recommended molded case circuit breaker When performing remote operation, use twisted
torque of the motor. If constant torque is required in (MCCB) or an earth leakage circuit breaker (ELCB) shielded wire and limit the distance between the
the low-speed range, use a Fuji inverter motor or a in the primary circuit of each inverter to protect the inverter and the control box to 20m.
motor equipped with an externally powered wiring. Ensure that the circuit breaker capacity is
ventilating fan. equivalent to or lower than the recommended
• Wiring length between inverter and motor
If long wiring is used between the inverter and the motor, the
• Vibration capacity.
inverter will overheat or trip as a result of overcurrent (high-
When the motor is mounted to a machine, • Installing a magnetic contactor (MC) frequency current flowing into the stray capacitance) in the
resonance may be caused by the natural in the output (secondary) circuit wires connected to the phases. Ensure that the wiring is
frequencies, including that of the machine. If a magnetic contactor (MC) is mounted in the shorter than 50m. If this length must be exceeded, lower the
Operation of a 2-pole motor at 60Hz or more may inverter's secondary circuit for switching the motor carrier frequency or mount an output circuit filter (OFL).
cause abnormal vibration. to commercial power or for any other purpose, When wiring is longer than 50m, and sensorless vector
* Study use of tier coupling or dampening rubber. ensure that both the inverter and the motor are fully control or vector control with speed sensor is selected,
* It is also recommended to use the inverter jump stopped before you turn the MC on or off. Remove execute off-line tuning.
frequencies control to avoid resonance points. the surge killer integrated with the MC.
• Wiring size
• Noise • Installing a magnetic contactor (MC) Select cables with a sufficient capacity by referring
When an inverter is used with a general-purpose in the input (primary) circuit to the current value or recommended wire size.
motor, the motor noise level is higher than that with Do not turn the magnetic contactor (MC) in the
a commercial power supply. To reduce noise, raise primary circuit on or off more than once an hour as • Wiring type
carrier frequency of the inverter. High-speed an inverter fault may result. If frequent starts or Do not use multicore cables that are normally used
operation at 60Hz or more can also result in more stops are required during motor operation, use for connecting several inverters and motors.
noise. FWD/REV signals. • Grounding
• Protecting the motor Securely ground the inverter using the grounding
When running special motors terminal.
The electronic thermal facility of the inverter can
• Explosion-proof motors protect the general-purpose motor. The operation
level and the motor type (general-purpose motor,
Selecting inverter capacity
When driving an explosion-proof motor with an
inverter, use a combination of a motor and an inverter motor) should be set. For high-speed • Driving general-purpose motor
inverter that has been approved in advance. motors or water-cooled motors, set a small value for Select an inverter according to the applicable motor
the thermal time constant to protect the motor. ratings listed in the standard specifications table for
• Brake motors
If you connect the motor thermal relay to the motor the inverter. When high starting torque is required or
For motors equipped with parallel-connected
with a long cable, a high-frequency current may flow quick acceleration or deceleration is required, select
brakes, their braking power must be supplied from
into the wiring stray capacitance. This may cause an inverter with a capacity one size greater than the
the primary circuit (commercial power supply). If the
the relay to trip at a current lower than the set value standard.
brake power is connected to the inverter power
for the thermal relay. If this happens, lower the
output circuit (secondary circuit) by mistake, • Driving special motors
carrier frequency or use the output circuit filter
problems may occur. Select an inverter that meets the following condition:
(OFL).
Do not use inverters for driving motors equipped Inverter rated current > Motor rated current.
with series-connected brakes. • Discontinuance of power-factor correcting capacitor
Do not mount power factor correcting capacitors in Transportation and storage
• Geared motors
the inverter (primary) circuit. (Use the DC
If the power transmission mechanism uses an oil-
REACTOR to improve the inverter power factor.) Do When transporting or storing inverters, follow the
lubricated gearbox or speed changer/reducer, then
not use power factor correcting capacitors in the procedures and select locations that meet the
continuous motor operation at low speed may
inverter output circuit (secondary). An overcurrent environmental conditions that agree with the
cause poor lubrication. Avoid such operation.
trip will occur, disabling motor operation. inverter specifications.
• Single-phase motors
• Discontinuance of surge killer
Single-phase motors are not suitable for inverter-
Do not mount surge killers in the inverter output
driven variable speed operation. Use three-phase
(secondary) circuit.
motors.
• Reducing noise
Use of a filter and shielded wires are typical
measures against noise to ensure that EMC
Directives are met.
High performance enabled by the comprehensive use of Fuji technology.

Maintains safety and protects the environment.
Gate City Ohsaki, East Tower, 11-2, Opens up possibilities for the new generation.
Osaki 1-chome, Shinagawa-ku,
Tokyo 141-0032, Japan
Phone: +81-3-5435-7057 Fax: +81-3-5435-7420
URL: http://www.fujielectric.com/
Printed in Japan 2012-11(K12/K12)CM 10 FOLS

24A1-E-0002

Frenic VG1

Uploaded by

Frenic VG1

Uploaded by

NOTES

• Measures against surge currents

High performance enabled by the comprehensive use of Fuji technology.

Printed in Japan 2012-11(K12/K12)CM 10 FOLS

Easier A Wide Range

External Dimensions Dedicated Motor

Converter section Inverter section Structure

High performance enabled by the comprehensive use of Fuji technology. Converter

Fuji Electric proudly introduces the FRENIC-VG to the world.

Easier A Wide Range

External Dimensions Dedicated Motor

Converter section Inverter section Structure

High performance enabled by the comprehensive use of Fuji technology. Converter

Fuji Electric proudly introduces the FRENIC-VG to the world.

of 600 Hz Follow-up characteristics High Duty 200V

under impact load

dBMg Note）A DCL may be selected according to applicable specifications.

Uneven rotation A wide range of options

Categoly Name Type

50 ABS encoder with 17-bit high resolution OPC-VG1-SPGT

of 600 Hz Follow-up characteristics High Duty 200V

under impact load

dBMg Note）A DCL may be selected according to applicable specifications.

Uneven rotation A wide range of options

Categoly Name Type

50 ABS encoder with 17-bit high resolution OPC-VG1-SPGT

Function code setting User-defined displays (customized displays),

Trace function Real-time trace: for long-term monitoring

Historical trace: for detailed data diagnosis for

Function code setting User-defined displays (customized displays),

Trace function Real-time trace: for long-term monitoring

Historical trace: for detailed data diagnosis for

Inverter body Fan body

For the various consumable parts inside the inverter, their

Inverter body Fan body

For the various consumable parts inside the inverter, their

Precision synchronization control System support System support

Precision synchronization control System support System support

0.75 FRN0.75VG1S-2 7.5 RHC7.5-2C RHC7.5-4C

200 FRN200VG1S-4 FRN160VG1S-4 FRN160VG1S-4 FRN200SVG1S-4 FRN160SVG1S-4 400 RHC400-4C RHC355-4C

250 FRN220VG1S-4 FRN250SVG1S-4 FRN220SVG1S-4 500 RHC500-4C RHC400-4C

External Dimensions Dedicated Motor

315 FRN315VG1S-4 FRN280VG1S-4 FRN315SVG1S-4 FRN280SVG1S-4 710 RHC710B-4D RHC630B-4D

355 FRN355VG1S-4 FRN315VG1S-4 FRN280VG1S-4 FRN315SVG1S-4 800 RHC800B-4D RHC710B-4D

400 FRN400VG1S-4 FRN355VG1S-4 FRN315VG1S-4 1000 RHC800B-4D

450 FRN400VG1S-4 FRN355VG1S-4

500 FRN500VG1S-4 FRN400VG1S-4

630 FRN630VG1S-4 FRN500VG1S-4 FRN630BVG1S-4

710 FRN630VG1S-4 FRN710BVG1S-4 FRN630BVG1S-4

How to read the model number Description of converter type

0.75 FRN0.75VG1S-2 7.5 RHC7.5-2C RHC7.5-4C

200 FRN200VG1S-4 FRN160VG1S-4 FRN160VG1S-4 FRN200SVG1S-4 FRN160SVG1S-4 400 RHC400-4C RHC355-4C

250 FRN220VG1S-4 FRN250SVG1S-4 FRN220SVG1S-4 500 RHC500-4C RHC400-4C

External Dimensions Dedicated Motor

315 FRN315VG1S-4 FRN280VG1S-4 FRN315SVG1S-4 FRN280SVG1S-4 710 RHC710B-4D RHC630B-4D

355 FRN355VG1S-4 FRN315VG1S-4 FRN280VG1S-4 FRN315SVG1S-4 800 RHC800B-4D RHC710B-4D

400 FRN400VG1S-4 FRN355VG1S-4 FRN315VG1S-4 1000 RHC800B-4D

450 FRN400VG1S-4 FRN355VG1S-4

500 FRN500VG1S-4 FRN400VG1S-4

630 FRN630VG1S-4 FRN500VG1S-4 FRN630BVG1S-4

710 FRN630VG1S-4 FRN710BVG1S-4 FRN630BVG1S-4

How to read the model number Description of converter type

Power supply voltage

External Dimensions Dedicated Motor

Power supply voltage

External Dimensions Dedicated Motor

Power supply voltage

Auxiliary control power supply Phase, Voltage, Frequency

External Dimensions Dedicated Motor

Power supply voltage

Power supply voltage

Auxiliary control power supply Phase, Voltage, Frequency

External Dimensions Dedicated Motor

Power supply voltage

Test mode Simulated operation mode

External Dimensions Dedicated Motor